礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
《相应部》· 《六处品》义注巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Saṃyuttanikāye · Saḷāyatanavagga-aṭṭhakathā
1. 六处相应义注
590 段
六处相应巴利
1. Saḷāyatanasaṃyuttaṃ
《内无常经》的注释巴利
1. Ajjhattāniccasuttavaṇṇanā
1 在《六处品》的第一品中,“眼”有两种眼——智眼和肉眼。其中,智眼有五种:佛眼、法眼、一切眼、天眼通、慧眼。在这些当中,所谓“佛眼”,是指了知倾向与随眠的智,以及了知众生根器胜劣的智,也就是经中所说的“以佛眼观察世间”(《大品》9;《中部》1.283;2.338)。所谓“法眼”,是指较低的三道与三果,也就是经中所说的“远离尘垢、无有污秽的法眼生起了”(《大品》16;《中部》2.395)。所谓“一切眼”,是指一切知智,即如经所说:“登楼台而普观”(《大品》8)。所谓“天眼”,是指由遍满光而生起的智,即如经所说:“以超人间、清净天眼”(《律藏·波罗夷》13)。所谓“慧眼”,是指能决断四谛的智,即如经所说:“眼生起了”(《相应部》5.1081)。巴利
1. Saḷāyatanavaggassa paṭhame cakkhunti dve cakkhūni – ñāṇacakkhu ceva maṃsacakkhu ca. Tattha ñāṇacakkhu pañcavidhaṃ – buddhacakkhu, dhammacakkhu, samantacakkhu, dibbacakkhu, paññācakkhūti. Tesu buddhacakkhu nāma āsayānusayañāṇañceva indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca, yaṃ – ‘‘buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento’’ti (mahāva. 9; ma. ni. 1.283; 2.338) āgataṃ . Dhammacakkhu nāma heṭṭhimā tayo maggā tīṇi ca phalāni, yaṃ – ‘‘virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (mahāva. 16; ma. ni. 2.395) āgataṃ. Samantacakkhu nāma sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, yaṃ – ‘‘pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhū’’ti (mahāva. 8; ma. ni. 1.282; 2.338) āgataṃ. Dibbacakkhu nāma ālokapharaṇena uppannaṃ ñāṇaṃ, yaṃ – ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā’’ti (pārā. 13; ma. ni. 2.341) āgataṃ. Paññācakkhu nāma catusaccaparicchedakañāṇaṃ, yaṃ – ‘‘cakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (sa. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15) āgataṃ.
肉眼也分两种:有成分的眼和净色眼。其中,所谓有成分的眼,就是位于眼眶里、被眼膜包着的那个肉团。它里面有四界、色、香、味、食素、生、命根、性根、眼净色、身净色——简单说就是十三种成分。如果详细分别:四界、色、香、味、食素、生这九种,按四种等起算,共三十六种;命根、性根、眼净色、身净色这四种只是业等起,这样一共是四十种成分。这就叫有成分的眼。至于净色眼,是指在白圈所限定、黑圈所环绕的视域中,能见色、纯粹是净色的那一部分。关于它以及耳等其他诸根的详细说明,在《清净道论》里已经讲过了。巴利
Maṃsacakkhupi duvidhaṃ – sasambhāracakkhu, pasādacakkhūti. Tesu yvāyaṃ akkhikūpake akkhipaṭalehi parivārito maṃsapiṇḍo, yattha catasso dhātuyo vaṇṇagandharasojā sambhavo jīvitaṃ bhāvo cakkhupasādo kāyapasādoti saṅkhepato terasa sambhārā honti. Vitthārato pana catasso dhātuyo vaṇṇagandharasojā sambhavoti ime nava catusamuṭṭhānavasena chattiṃsa, jīvitaṃ bhāvo cakkhupasādo kāyapasādoti ime kammasamuṭṭhānā tāva cattāroti cattārīsa sambhārā honti. Idaṃ sasambhāracakkhu nāma. Yaṃ panettha setamaṇḍalaparicchinnena kaṇhamaṇḍalena parivārite diṭṭhimaṇḍale sanniviṭṭhaṃ rūpadassanasamatthaṃ pasādamattaṃ, idaṃ pasādacakkhu nāma. Tassa tato paresañca sotādīnaṃ vitthārakathā visuddhimagge vuttāva.
这里,说到净色眼,世尊就抓住这个,开示说:“比丘们,眼是无常的……”等等。其中,“以四种原因说无常,因为有生灭变易”等,这种详细解说在前面已经讲过了。耳也是指净色耳,鼻、舌、身也一样。意则是指三地中的观照心。这样,这部经是在六内处上显示了三种相之后所说的,是依照能够觉悟的人的根性而说的。巴利
Tattha yadidaṃ pasādacakkhu, taṃ gahetvā bhagavā – cakkhuṃ, bhikkhave, aniccantiādimāha. Tattha – ‘‘catūhi kāraṇehi aniccaṃ udayabbayavantatāyā’’tiādinā nayena vitthārakathā heṭṭhā pakāsitāyeva. Sotampi pasādasotameva adhippetaṃ, tathā ghānajivhākāyā. Manoti tebhūmakasammasanacāracittaṃ. Iti idaṃ suttaṃ chasu ajjhattikāyatanesu tīṇi lakkhaṇāni dassetvā kathite bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayena vuttaṃ.
2-3. 对《内苦经》等经的注释巴利
2-3. Ajjhattadukkhasuttādivaṇṇanā
2-3 第二部经显示了两种相,第三部经显示了一种相,这是按照能理解者的意乐而说的。至于其余诸经,要么已经靠这些相辨明了,要么仅凭这一点就能辨明。巴利
2-3. Dutiyaṃ dve lakkhaṇāni, tatiyaṃ ekalakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā kathite bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayena vuttaṃ. Sesāni pana tehi sallakkhitāni vā ettakeneva vā sallakkhessantīti.
4-6. 外无常经等注释巴利
4-6. Bāhirāniccasuttādivaṇṇanā
4-6 第四经里说:色、香、味、触这四种由四种原因产生,声音由两种原因产生,而“法”则是指以三界之法为所缘。这一段也是在讲了外六处之后,为了显示三相,针对能够觉悟的人而说的。第五经和第六经的讲法,跟第二经、第三经里说的是一样的。巴利
4-6. Catutthe rūpagandharasaphoṭṭhabbā catusamuṭṭhānā, saddo dvisamuṭṭhāno, dhammāti tebhūmakadhammārammaṇaṃ. Idampi bāhiresu chasu āyatanesu tilakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā kathite bujjhanakānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Pañcame chaṭṭhe ca dutiyatatiyesu vuttasadisova nayo.
7-12. 过去未来内无常经等的注释巴利
7-12. Ajjhattāniccātītānāgatasuttādivaṇṇanā
7-12 第7经到第12经,是针对那些在过去和未来的眼等(六根)上观察无常相等之后,因对现在的眼等强执不舍而疲惫的人所说的。其余部分,在所有地方都和前面所说的方法完全一样。巴利
7-12. Sattamādīni atītānāgatesu cakkhādīsu aniccalakkhaṇādīni sallakkhetvā paccuppannesu balavagāhena kilamantānaṃ vasena vuttāni. Sesaṃ sabbattha heṭṭhā vuttanayamevāti.
1-4. 第一前正觉经等的注释巴利
1-4. Paṭhamapubbesambodhasuttādivaṇṇanā
13-16 13-16. 在《双品》第一经和第二经中,“内”是指从内内这个角度说的内处。不过,应该知道它们之所以是内,是因为对它们的欲贪特别强、特别有力。对人们来说,六内处就像家里的内室,六外处就像院子周围。就像人们对充满儿女、妻子、财富、谷物的内室,欲贪特别强、特别有力,不许任何人进去,哪怕只是听到器皿轻轻碰响,也会问“这是什么声音?”同样,对六内处的欲贪特别强、特别有力。正因为这种欲贪的力量强大,它们才被称为“内”。而对院子周围,欲贪就没有那么强,对在那里走动的人甚至四足动物,也不会立刻去阻拦;即使不阻拦,若不愿意,连一点牲畜尾巴都不让人拿走。所以,人们对那里的欲贪并非特别强、特别有力。对色等外处也是如此,欲贪并非特别强、特别有力,因此它们被称为“外”。至于详细讨论内处和外处,在《清净道论》中已经说过。这两部经中其余的内容,都按照前面所说的方式来理解。第三经和第四经也同样如此。巴利
13-16. Yamakavaggassa paṭhamadutiyesu ajjhattikānanti ajjhattajjhattavasena ajjhattikānaṃ. So pana nesaṃ ajjhattikabhāvo chandarāgassa adhimattabalavatāya veditabbo. Manussānañhi antogharaṃ viya cha ajjhattikāyatanāni, gharūpacāraṃ viya cha bāhirāyatanāni. Yathā nesaṃ puttadāradhanadhaññapuṇṇe antoghare chandarāgo adhimattabalavā hoti, tattha kassaci pavisituṃ na denti, appamattena bhājanasaddamattenāpi ‘‘kiṃ eta’’nti? Vattāro bhavanti. Evamevaṃ chasu ajjhattikesu āyatanesu adhimattabalavachandarāgoti. Iti imāya chandarāgabalavatāya tāni ‘‘ajjhattikānī’’ti vuttāni. Gharūpacāre pana no tathā balavā hoti, tattha carante manussepi catuppadānipi na sahasā nivārenti. Kiñcāpi na nivārenti, anicchantā pana pasupacchimattampi gahituṃ na denti. Iti nesaṃ tattha na adhimattabalavachandarāgo hoti. Rūpādīsupi tatheva na adhimattabalavachandarāgo, tasmā tāni ‘‘bāhirānī’’ti vuttāni. Vitthārato pana ajjhattikabāhirakathā visuddhimagge vuttāva. Sesaṃ dvīsupi suttesu heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Tathā tatiyacatutthesu.
5-6. 第一《无味经》等的注释巴利
5-6. Paṭhamanoceassādasuttādivaṇṇanā
17-18 17-18. 在第五部经中,“出离”指已经脱离、已经出去。“离系”指不再相连。“解脱”指不再倾向,也就是“以没有界限的心”——以不被界限所限制的心。因为只要还有某种烦恼或轮回没有被断除,有学圣者的心就还是被那界限所限制;一旦断除了,心就不再被限制。而在这里,由于一切烦恼和轮回都已经彻底断除,所以意思是:他们以无界限、超越了烦恼与轮回界限的心而安住。第六部经也是同样的道理。不过应当知道,这六部经里说的都只是四圣谛。巴利
17-18. Pañcame nissaṭāti nikkhantā. Visaññuttāti nosaṃyuttā. Vippamuttāti no adhimuttā vimariyādīkatena cetasāti nimmariyādīkatena cetasā. Yañhi kilesajātaṃ vā vaṭṭaṃ vā appahīnaṃ hoti, tena sekhānaṃ cittaṃ samariyādīkataṃ nāma. Yaṃ pahīnaṃ, tena vimariyādīkataṃ. Idha pana sabbaso kilesānañceva vaṭṭassa ca pahīnattā vimariyādīkatena kilesavaṭṭamariyādaṃ atikkantena cittena vihariṃsūti attho. Chaṭṭhepi eseva nayo. Chasupi panetesu suttesu catusaccameva kathitanti veditabbaṃ.
第7到第10经,也就是《第一欢喜经》等经的注释。巴利
7-10. Paṭhamābhinandasuttādivaṇṇanā
19-22 从第七部经开始的四部经里,讲的都只是轮回与还灭。至于它们当中渐次解说的方式,应当依照下面所说的方式来了知。巴利
19-22. Sattamādīsu catūsu vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ. Anupubbakathā pana nesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbāti.
《一切经》的注释巴利
1. Sabbasuttavaṇṇanā
23 23. 在《一切品》的第一经中,“诸比丘,我为你们说一切”——这里所说的“一切”有四种:一切一切、处一切、有身一切、部分一切。其中——巴利
23. Sabbavaggassa paṭhame sabbaṃ vo, bhikkhaveti sabbaṃ nāma catubbidhaṃ – sabbasabbaṃ, āyatanasabbaṃ, sakkāyasabbaṃ, padesasabbanti. Tattha –
在他那里,这世上没有任何未见之物。
同样,未知且不可知。
他了知一切应当被了知的事物,
如来以那一切眼(而见),如此。巴利
‘‘Na tassa addiṭṭhamidhaatthi kiñci, Atho aviññātamajānitabbaṃ; Sabbaṃ abhiññāsi yadatthi neyyaṃ, Tathāgato tena samantacakkhū’’ti. (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāniddeso 32; paṭi. ma. 1.121) –
这叫作“一切一切”。“比丘们,我要为你们讲说一切,你们要听”(相应部4.24),这叫作“处一切”。“比丘们,我要为你们讲说一切法的根本法门”(中部1.1),这叫作“有身一切”。“或者,在一切法中,最初的心、意、意的生起运作……乃至由此生起的意界”(中部1.1),这叫作“部分一切”。这样,仅仅以五种所缘为范围,就是“部分一切”。三地之法是“有身一切”。四地之法是“处一切”。凡是任何可被了知的事物,就是“一切一切”。“部分一切”达不到“有身一切”,“有身一切”达不到“处一切”,“处一切”达不到“一切一切”。为什么?因为一切知智的所缘不存在这样的法,由于不存在。不过,在这部经里,所指的其实是“处一切”。巴利
Idaṃ sabbasabbaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sabbaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi, taṃ suṇāthā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.24) idaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.1) idaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sabbadhammesu vā pana paṭhamasamannāhāro uppajjati cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ…pe… tajjāmanodhātū’’ti idaṃ padesasabbaṃ nāma. Iti pañcārammaṇamattaṃ padesasabbaṃ. Tebhūmakadhammā sakkāyasabbaṃ. Catubhūmakadhammā āyatanasabbaṃ. Yaṃkiñci neyyaṃ sabbasabbaṃ. Padesasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti, sakkāyasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti, āyatanasabbaṃ sabbasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Kasmā? Sabbaññutaññāṇassa ayaṃ nāma dhammo ārammaṇaṃ na hotīti natthitāya. Imasmiṃ pana sutte āyatanasabbaṃ adhippetaṃ.
“拒绝”就是拒绝、否定之后。“只是以言语为谈论对象”的意思是:仅仅停留在言语所能表达的范围之内。然而,如果超越这十二处,他就无法指出“另有一个具有真实自性的法,名叫某某”。如果被问到“所谓其他的一切是什么呢”,他被这样问时,也无法用“就是这个”这样的话来说明。就会陷入苦恼,也就是会遭受痛苦。“比丘们,正如那是在自己能力范围之外”这里,“那”只是一个语气助词。“正如”是表示原因的词,意思是:因为是在自己能力范围之外被问到的。众生在自己能力范围之外行事,只会带来苦恼。比如用头顶起像尖顶屋那么大的石头在深水里渡水,这是能力范围之外的事;同样,想把日月拉下来、拽下来,也是能力范围之外的事。在这种超出能力范围的事情上努力,只会陷入苦恼。同样地,在这个超出他能力范围的领域里,他也只会陷入苦恼,这就是这段话的意涵。巴利
Paccakkhāyāti paṭikkhipitvā. Vācāvatthukamevassāti, vācāya vattabbavatthumattakameva bhaveyya. Imāni pana dvādasāyatanāni atikkamitvā ayaṃ nāma añño sabhāvadhammo atthīti dassetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Puṭṭho ca na sampāyeyyāti, ‘‘katamaṃ aññaṃ sabbaṃ nāmā’’ti? Pucchito, ‘‘idaṃ nāmā’’ti vacanena sampādetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Vighātaṃ āpajjeyyāti dukkhaṃ āpajjeyya. Yathā taṃ, bhikkhave, avisayasminti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ. Yathāti kāraṇavacanaṃ, yasmā avisaye puṭṭhoti attho. Avisayasmiñhi sattānaṃ vighātova hoti, kūṭāgāramattaṃ silaṃ sīsena ukkhipitvā gambhīre udake taraṇaṃ avisayo, tathā candimasūriyānaṃ ākaḍḍhitvā pātanaṃ, tasmiṃ avisaye vāyamanto vighātameva āpajjati, evaṃ imasmimpi avisaye vighātameva āpajjeyyāti adhippāyo.
2. 《舍断经》的注释巴利
2. Pahānasuttavaṇṇanā
24 24. 在第二经中,“为了断弃一切”的意思是:为了断弃一切。“由眼触为缘而生起的感受”:指以眼触为根本缘而生起的领受、推度、确定、速行阶段的受。至于与眼识相应的受,这里根本不必再说。在耳门等以受为缘等情况下,也是同样的道理。在这里,“意”指有分心;“法”指所缘;“意识”指与转向同时生起的速行心;“意触”指与有分一同生起的触;“感受”指与转向同时生起的受和速行阶段的受。与有分相应的受,同样根本不必再说。不把转向从有分中分离出来时,“意”应看作与转向同时生起的有分心。“法”是所缘,“意识”是速行识,“意触”是与有分一同生起的触,“感受”是与速行一同生起的受。与转向同时生起的有分心一同生起的受也是可以的。而在这里,这段开示、教导、教诫,就称为“施设”。巴利
24. Dutiye sabbappahānāyāti sabbassa pahānāya. Cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitanti cakkhusamphassaṃ mūlapaccayaṃ katvā uppannā sampaṭicchanasantīraṇavoṭṭhabbanajavanavedanā. Cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttāya pana vattabbameva natthi. Sotadvārādivedanāpaccayādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha pana manoti bhavaṅgacittaṃ. Dhammāti ārammaṇaṃ. Manoviññāṇanti sahāvajjanakajavanaṃ. Manosamphassoti bhavaṅgasahajāto samphasso. Vedayitanti sahāvajjanavedanāya javanavedanā. Bhavaṅgasampayuttāya pana vattabbameva natthi. Āvajjanaṃ bhavaṅgato amocetvā manoti sahāvajjanena bhavaṅgaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dhammāti ārammaṇaṃ. Manoviññāṇanti javanaviññāṇaṃ. Manosamphassoti bhavaṅgasahajāto samphasso. Vedayitanti javanasahajātā vedanā. Sahāvajjanena bhavaṅgasahajātāpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Yā panettha desanā anusiṭṭhiāṇā, ayaṃ paṇṇatti nāmāti.
第三 证智遍知舍断经的注释巴利
3. Abhiññāpariññāpahānasuttavaṇṇanā
25 在第三经里说“为了断舍对一切的证知、遍知”:意思是证知一切、遍知一切之后,为了断舍它们。“证知、遍知之后应当断舍”:就是说应当证知、遍知之后再来断舍。剩下的内容,按照前面已经讲过的方式理解就好。巴利
25. Tatiye sabbaṃ abhiññā pariññā pahānāyāti sabbaṃ abhijānitvā parijānitvā pajahanatthāya. Abhiññā pariññā pahātabbanti abhijānitvā parijānitvā pahātabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
4. 《第一不遍知经》的注释巴利
4. Paṭhamaaparijānanasuttavaṇṇanā
26 26. 在第四经中,“不了知、不遍知、不离染、不舍断”——意思是:不了知、不遍知、不离染、不舍断。这里,“不离染”就是不使(烦恼)消失。这样一来,在这部经里就讲了三种遍知:用“了知”这个词讲的是知遍知,用“遍知”这个词讲的是审察遍知,用“离染”和“舍断”这两个词讲的是断遍知。巴利
26. Catutthe anabhijānaṃ aparijānaṃ avirājayaṃ appajahanti anabhijānanto aparijānanto avirājento appajahanto. Ettha ca avirājentoti avigacchāpento. Iti imasmiṃ sutte tissopi pariññā kathitā honti. ‘‘Abhijāna’’nti hi vacanena ñātapariññā kathitā, ‘‘parijāna’’nti vacanena tīraṇapariññā, ‘‘virājayaṃ pajaha’’nti dvīhi pahānapariññāti.
第五《第二不遍知经》的注释巴利
5. Dutiyaaparijānanasuttavaṇṇanā
27 27. 在第五经中,“眼识所识知的法”这一说法,是拿前面已经提到的色法来显示的。或者说,前面取的是已经进入眼门范围的色法,而这里指的是尚未进入眼门范围的。不过,这里的定论是这样的:前面其实已经把进入范围和未进入范围的色法都取了,而这里则是指与眼识相应的三蕴。因为这三蕴和眼识一起都是被识知的,所以称为“眼识所识知的”。其余类似的语句,也应依照这个道理来理解。巴利
27. Pañcame cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbā dhammāti heṭṭhā gahitarūpameva gahetvā dasseti. Heṭṭhā vā āpāthagataṃ gahitaṃ, idha anāpāthagataṃ. Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – heṭṭhā āpāthagatampi anāpāthagatampi gahitameva, idha pana cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttā tayo khandhā. Te hi cakkhuviññāṇena saha viññātabbattā ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbā’’ti vuttā. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
第六《燃烧经》的注释巴利
6. Ādittasuttavaṇṇanā
28 第六经中,“在伽耶山”:离伽耶村不远,有一个叫“伽耶”的池塘,也有一条河;还有一座名叫伽耶山的石山,形状像象的额头,能容纳一千位比丘,世尊就住在那里。因此说“在伽耶山”。“比丘们”:世尊先挑选适合他们的法教,想着“我要为他们开示这个”,于是召唤了比丘们。巴利
28. Chaṭṭhe gayāsīseti gayāgāmassa hi avidūre gayāti ekā pokkharaṇīpi atthi nadīpi, gayāsīsanāmako hatthikumbhasadiso piṭṭhipāsāṇopi, yattha bhikkhusahassassapi okāso pahoti, bhagavā tattha viharati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘gayāsīse’’ti. Bhikkhū āmantesīti tesaṃ sappāyadhammadesanaṃ vicinitvā taṃ desessāmīti āmantesi.
关于这件事,有一段循序渐进的讲述:据说在九十二劫以前,有一位名叫马欣德的国王。他的长子名叫弗沙,是圆满诸波罗蜜、最后一生受生的有情,智慧成熟后,登上菩提座,证得了一切知智。国王的幼子成了那位佛的上首弟子,国师之子成了第二弟子。国王心想:“我的长子出家成了佛,幼子成了上首弟子,国师之子成了第二弟子。”于是他想着“佛是我们家的,法是我们家的,僧团也是我们家的”,便建了一座精舍,从精舍的门房一直到自家门口,道路两边都用竹墙小屋围起来,顶上挂起交织着金星星纹、缀满香花鬘与花环的天盖,下面铺上银色的沙,撒满鲜花,就沿着这条路迎请世尊前来。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – ito kira dvānavutikappe mahindo nāma rājā ahosi. Tassa jeṭṭhaputto phusso nāma. So pūritapāramī pacchimabhavikasatto, paripākagate ñāṇe bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha sabbaññutaṃ paṭivijjhi . Rañño kaniṭṭhaputto tassa aggasāvako ahosi, purohitaputto dutiyasāvako. Rājā cintesi – ‘‘mayhaṃ jeṭṭhaputto nikkhamitvā buddho jāto, kaniṭṭhaputto aggasāvako, purohitaputto dutiyasāvako’’ti. So ‘‘amhākaṃyeva buddho, amhākaṃ dhammo, amhākaṃ saṅgho’’ti vihāraṃ kāretvā vihāradvārakoṭṭhakato yāva attano gharadvārā ubhato veḷubhittikuṭikāhi parikkhipitvā matthake suvaṇṇatārakakhacitasamosaritagandhadāmamālādāmavitānaṃ bandhāpetvā heṭṭhā rajatavaṇṇaṃ vālukaṃ santharitvā pupphāni vikirāpetvā tena maggena bhagavato āgamanaṃ kāresi.
导师就待在精舍里,穿上袈裟后,沿着布帘围起的通道,和比丘僧团一起前往国王的住处;吃完饭,又沿着布帘围起的通道回去。谁都没办法布施哪怕一勺饭的食物。于是城里人纷纷抱怨说:“佛陀出现在世间了,我们却没法做功德。日月为所有人带来光明,同样,诸佛出现在世间是为了利益所有人,可这位国王却把所有人行善的心意全都收归到自己那里去了。”巴利
Satthā vihārasmiṃyeva ṭhito cīvaraṃ pārupitvā antosāṇiyāva saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena rājagehaṃ āgacchati, katabhattakicco antosāṇiyāva gacchati. Koci kaṭacchubhikkhāmattampi dātuṃ na labhati. Tato nāgarā ujjhāyiṃsu, ‘‘buddho loke uppanno, na ca mayaṃ puññāni kātuṃ labhāma. Yathā hi candimasūriyā sabbesaṃ ālokaṃ karonti, evaṃ buddhā nāma sabbesaṃ hitatthāya uppajjanti, ayaṃ pana rājā sabbesaṃ puññacetanaṃ attanoyeva anto pavesetī’’ti.
国王还有另外三个儿子。城里的人们和这三个儿子聚在一起商量:“我们跟王室之间并没有什么冤仇,咱们想个办法吧。”他们就在边境一带煽动盗贼,又让人传回消息说“有几个村庄被袭击了”,然后禀报给国王。国王把儿子们叫来,说:“孩子们,我年纪大了,你们去把盗贼平定吧。”就把他们派了出去。那些被安排好的盗贼并没有四处散开,而是直接来到他们跟前。他们让盗贼住进没有人烟的村庄,然后回来禀报说“盗贼已经平定了”,向国王行礼后站在一旁。巴利
Tassa ca rañño aññe tayo puttā atthi. Nāgarā tehi saddhiṃ ekato hutvā sammantayiṃsu, ‘‘rājakulehi saddhiṃ aṭṭo nāma natthi, ekaṃ upāyaṃ karomā’’ti. Te paccante core uṭṭhāpetvā, ‘‘katipayā gāmā pahaṭā’’ti sāsanaṃ āharāpetvā rañño ārocayiṃsu. Rājā putte pakkosāpetvā‘‘tātā, ahaṃ mahallako, gacchatha core vūpasamethā’’ti pesesi. Payuttacorā ito cito ca avippakiritvā tesaṃ santikameva āgacchiṃsu. Te anāvāse gāme vāsetvā ‘‘vūpasamitā corā’’ti āgantvā rājānaṃ vanditvā aṭṭhaṃsu.
国王很高兴,说:“孩子们,我给你们一个恩惠。”他们答应了,回去和市民们商量:“国王给了我们一个恩惠,我们该要什么呢?”市民们说:“王子们,你们要象、马之类的东西并不难得到,但佛宝才难得,不是什么时候都能出世的。你们就向国王请求照顾你们兄长弗沙佛这个恩惠吧。”他们说:“好,就这么办。”答应了市民们之后,他们剃了须发,沐浴涂香,来到国王面前,请求说:“大王,请把恩惠赐给我们吧。”国王问:“孩子们,你们想要什么?”他们说:“大王,我们不需要象、马之类的东西,请把照顾我们兄长弗沙佛这个恩惠赐给我们。”国王说:“这个恩惠,我活着的时候没法给。”说完就捂住了两只耳朵。他们说:“大王,不是您被我们逼着才给恩惠的,是您自己高兴自愿给的。大王,难道王室说话还能有两种说法吗?”他们这样据实说道。巴利
Rājā tuṭṭho ‘‘tātā, varaṃ vo demī’’ti āha. Te adhivāsetvā gantvā nāgarehi saddhiṃ mantayiṃsu, ‘‘raññā amhākaṃ varo dinno. Kiṃ gaṇhāmā’’ti? Ayyaputtā, tumhākaṃ hatthiassādayo na dullabhā , buddharatanaṃ pana dullabhaṃ, na sabbakālaṃ uppajjati, tumhākaṃ jeṭṭhabhātikassa phussabuddhassa paṭijagganavaraṃ gaṇhathāti. Te ‘‘evaṃ karissāmā’’ti nāgarānaṃ paṭissuṇitvā katamassukammā sunhātā suvilittā rañño santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘deva, no varaṃ dethā’’ti yāciṃsu. Kiṃ gaṇhissatha tātāti? Deva, amhākaṃ hatthiassādīhi attho natthi, jeṭṭhabhātikassa no phussabuddhassa paṭijagganavaraṃ dethāti. ‘‘Ayaṃ varo na sakkā mayā jīvamānena dātu’’nti dve kaṇṇe pidahi. ‘‘Deva, na tumhe amhehi balakkārena varaṃ dāpitā, tumhehi attano ruciyā tuṭṭhehi dinno. Kiṃ, deva, rājakulassa dve kathā vaṭṭantī’’ti? Saccavāditāya bhaṇiṃsu.
国王没法推脱,就说:“孩子们,我先照顾七年七个月零七天,之后我就把他交给你们。”他们说:“太好了,大王,请给我们一个保证。”国王问:“要什么保证,孩子们?”他们说:“请保证在这段时间里您不会死,大王。”国王说:“孩子们,你们要的保证不合理,这样的保证根本给不了。众生的生命就像草尖上的露珠一样。”他们说:“大王,如果您不给保证,万一我们在这期间死了,还能做什么善事呢?”国王说:“那这样吧,孩子们,就六年。”他们说:“不行,大王。”国王又说:“那就五年、四年、三年、两年、一年。”国王说:“七个月、六个月……乃至半个月。”他们说:“不行,大王。”国王说:“那就只给七天吧。”他们说:“好的,大王。”于是接受了七天。国王就把七年七个月零七天里该做的供养,全在七天之内做完了。巴利
Rājā vinivattituṃ alabhanto – ‘‘tātā, satta saṃvacchare satta māse satta ca divase upaṭṭhahitvā tumhākaṃ dassāmī’’ti āha. ‘‘Sundaraṃ, deva, pāṭibhogaṃ dethā’’ti. ‘‘Kissa pāṭibhogaṃ tātā’’ti? ‘‘Ettakaṃ kālaṃ amaraṇapāṭibhogaṃ devā’’ti. ‘‘Tātā, ayuttaṃ pāṭibhogaṃ dāpetha, na sakkā evaṃ pāṭibhogaṃ dātuṃ, tiṇagge ussāvabindusadisaṃ sattānaṃ jīvita’’nti. ‘‘No ce, deva, pāṭibhogaṃ detha, mayaṃ antarā matā kiṃ kusalaṃ karissāmā’’ti? ‘‘Tena hi, tātā, cha saṃvaccharāni dethā’’ti. ‘‘Na sakkā, devā’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi pañca, cattāri, tīṇi, dve, ekaṃ saṃvaccharaṃ detha’’. ‘‘Satta, cha māse detha…pe… māsaḍḍhamattaṃ dethā’’ti. ‘‘Na sakkā, devā’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi sattadivasamattaṃ dethā’’ti. ‘‘Sādhu, devāti satta divase sampaṭicchiṃsu’’. Rājā satta saṃvacchare satta māse satta divase kattabbasakkāraṃ sattasuyeva divasesu akāsi.
随后,为了送世尊去儿子们居住的地方,国王让人把一条八乌沙巴宽的大道装饰起来。在正中间,他让人用大象把一块四乌沙巴见方的地面踩平,弄得像遍作圆相一样,再铺上沙子,撒满鲜花;又让人到处摆上芭蕉树和满水罐,竖起旗帜和幡。每隔一乌沙巴,他让人挖一个池塘;在后面两侧,开设了香店、花鬘店和花店。在正中间那条四乌沙巴宽的装饰大道两旁,他让人清除了两条各二乌沙巴宽道路上的树桩和荆棘,并造了立柱灯。王子们也在各自管辖的地方,照样装饰了一条十六乌沙巴宽的大道。巴利
Tato puttānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ satthāraṃ pesetuṃ aṭṭhausabhavitthataṃ maggaṃ alaṅkārāpesi, majjhaṭṭhāne catuusabhappamāṇaṃ padesaṃ hatthīhi maddāpetvā kasiṇamaṇḍalasadisaṃ katvā vālukāya santharāpetvā pupphābhikiṇṇamakāsi, tattha tattha kadaliyo ca puṇṇaghaṭe ca ṭhapāpetvā dhajapaṭākā ukkhipāpesi. Usabhe usabhe pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇāpesi, aparabhāge dvīsu passesu gandhamālāpupphāpaṇe pasārāpesi. Majjhaṭṭhāne catuusabhavitthārassa alaṅkatamaggassa ubhosu passesu dve dve usabhavitthāre magge khāṇukaṇṭake harāpetvā daṇḍadīpikāyo kārāpesi. Rājaputtāpi attano āṇāpavattiṭṭhāne soḷasausabhamaggaṃ tatheva alaṅkārāpesuṃ.
国王来到自己管辖的地方,走到田边,礼敬世尊后,哭着说:“孩子们啊,你们这样离去,就像挖走我的右眼带走一样。既然你们把世尊带走了,就该做与诸佛相称的事。不要像嗜酒的人那样放逸度日。”他们回答:“大王,我们会明白的。”便带着世尊离去,建好精舍献给世尊,在那里照料世尊,有时坐在长老的座位上,有时坐在中间的座位上,有时坐在僧团新人的座位上。他们三人对布施的考量完全一样。临近雨安居时,他们心想:“怎样才能领会世尊的心意呢?”接着他们想到:“诸佛尊重的是法,不是看重物质供养。如果我们安住在戒上,就能领会世尊的心意。”于是叫来负责布施事务的人,说:“孩子们,就照这个样子准备粥、饭、嚼食等,继续行布施吧。”这样,他们就放下了筹办布施事务的牵绊。巴利
Rājā attano āṇāpavattiṭṭhānassa kedārasīmaṃ gantvā satthāraṃ vanditvā paridevamāno, ‘‘tātā, mayhaṃ dakkhiṇakkhiṃ uppāṭetvā gaṇhantā viya gacchatha, evaṃ gaṇhitvā gatā pana buddhānaṃ anucchavikaṃ kareyyātha. Mā surāsoṇḍā viya pamattā vicaritthā’’ti āha. Te ‘‘jānissāma mayaṃ, devā’’ti satthāraṃ gahetvā gatā, vihāraṃ kāretvā satthu niyyātetvā tattha satthāraṃ paṭijaggantā kālena therāsane, kālena majjhimāsane, kālena saṅghanavakāsane tiṭṭhanti. Dānaṃ upaparikkhamānānaṃ tiṇṇampi janānaṃ ekasadisameva ahosi. Te upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya cintayiṃsu – ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gaṇheyyāmā’’ti? Atha nesaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘buddhā nāma dhammagaruno, na āmisagaruno, sīle patiṭṭhamānā mayaṃ satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ sakkhissāmā’’ti dānasaṃvidhāyake manusse pakkosāpetvā, ‘‘tātā, imināva nīhārena yāgubhattakhādanīyādīni sampādentā dānaṃ pavattethā’’ti vatvā dānasaṃvidahanapalibodhaṃ chindiṃsu.
于是,他们的长兄带着五百个男人,安住在十戒上,披着两件袈裟,使用允许的水,在那里住了下来。老二带着三百人,老三带着二百人,也同样这样做。他们一辈子都侍奉导师。导师就在他们身边般涅槃了。巴利
Atha nesaṃ jeṭṭhabhātā pañcasate purise ādāya dasasu sīlesu patiṭṭhāya dve kāsāyāni acchādetvā kappiyaṃ udakaṃ paribhuñjamāno vāsaṃ kappesi. Majjhimo tīhi, kaniṭṭho dvīhi purisasatehi saddhiṃ tatheva paṭipajji. Te yāvajīvaṃ satthāraṃ upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Satthā tesaṃyeva santike parinibbāyi.
他们命终之后,从那时起,在九十二劫里,从人界到天界、从天界到人界不断流转。到了我们导师住世的时代,他们从天界命终,投生到人界。他们当中那位负责布施事务的大臣,投生为央伽摩揭陀国的频婆娑罗王。他们自己则出生在那位国王境内一个婆罗门大富豪家里。长兄依旧生为长兄,中弟和幼弟也依旧按中、幼的次序出生。他们前世的那些随从眷属,也照样生为他们的随从眷属。这三人长大后,带着那一千个人离家出走,出家成为苦行者,就住在优楼频螺河边。央伽摩揭陀的居民每个月都给他们送去盛大的供养和敬意。巴利
Tepi kālaṃ katvā tato paṭṭhāya dvānavutikappe manussalokato devalokaṃ, devalokato ca manussalokaṃ saṃsarantā amhākaṃ satthukāle devalokā cavitvā manussaloke nibbattiṃsu. Tesaṃ dānagge byāvaṭo mahāamacco aṅgamagadhānaṃ rājā bimbisāro hutvā nibbatti. Te tasseva rañño raṭṭhe brāhmaṇamahāsālakule nibbattiṃsu. Jeṭṭhabhātā jeṭṭhova jāto, majjhimakaniṭṭhā majjhimakaniṭṭhāyeva. Yepi tesaṃ parivāramanussā, te parivāramanussāva jātā. Te vuddhimanvāya tayopi janā taṃ purisasahassaṃ ādāya nikkhamitvā tāpasā hutvā uruvelāyaṃ nadītīreyeva vasiṃsu. Aṅgamagadhavāsino māse māse tesaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ abhiharanti.
那时,我们的菩萨已经出家,依次证得了一切知智,转动了殊胜的法轮。他调伏了耶舍等善男子之后,派遣六十位阿罗汉到各方去说法,自己则拿着衣钵,心想:“我要去调伏那三位结发兄弟。”于是前往优楼频螺,用几百种神通变化破除他们的邪见,让他们出家。然后,他带着那一千位持神通所成衣钵的沙门,前往象头山,在他们的围绕中坐下,心里思量:“对他们来说,什么样的法谈才合适呢?”他断定:“这些人早晚都在侍奉火。我要为他们说法,以十二处被点燃、正在燃烧为比喻而宣说,这样他们就能证得阿罗汉果。”于是,为了这样为他们说法,他宣说了这部《燃烧法门》。因此说“对诸比丘说”,意思就是:他选定了适合他们的法谈,为了宣说那个法,而对他们说。其中,“燃烧的”是指被点燃的、正在炽燃的。其余部分按照前面所说的方式理解。这样,在这部经中解说了苦相。巴利
Atha amhākaṃ bodhisatto katābhinikkhamano anupubbena sabbaññutaṃ patvā pavattitavaradhammacakko yasādayo kulaputte vinetvā saṭṭhi arahante dhammadesanatthāya disāsu uyyojetvā sayaṃ pattacīvaramādāya – ‘‘te tayo jaṭilabhātike damessāmī’’ti uruvelaṃ gantvā anekehi pāṭihāriyasatehi tesaṃ diṭṭhiṃ bhinditvā te pabbājesi. So taṃ iddhimayapattacīvaradharaṃ samaṇasahassaṃ ādāya gayāsīsaṃ gantvā tehi parivārito nisīditvā, – ‘‘katarā nu kho etesaṃ dhammakathā sappāyā’’ti cintento, ‘‘ime sāyaṃpātaṃ aggiṃ paricaranti. Imesaṃ dvādasāyatanāni ādittāni sampajjalitāni viya katvā desessāmi, evaṃ ime arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ sakkhissantī’’ti sanniṭṭhānamakāsi. Atha nesaṃ tathā dhammaṃ desetuṃ imaṃ ādittapariyāyaṃ abhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhikkhū āmantesīti tesaṃ sappāyadhammadesanaṃ vicinitvā taṃ desessāmīti āmantesī’’ti. Tattha ādittanti padittaṃ sampajjalitaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Iti imasmiṃ sutte dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ.
第七经《被逼恼经》的注释。巴利
7. Addhabhūtasuttavaṇṇanā
29 29. 在第七经中,“已变成被征服的状态”是指被压制、被笼罩,意思就是被逼迫、被折磨。在这部经里,同样讲的是苦的特征。巴利
29. Sattame addhabhūtanti adhibhūtaṃ ajjhotthaṭaṃ, upaddutanti attho. Imasmimpi sutte dukkhalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ.
第八经《适合根除经》的注释。巴利
8. Samugghātasāruppasuttavaṇṇanā
30 第三十节。“适合断除一切‘认为’”,意思是适合把一切由渴爱、慢、邪见所生的“认为”彻底断除。“在此”,指在这个教法之中。“不认为眼”,就是不认为眼是我,或是我所有的,或是他人,或是他人所有的。“不认为在眼中”,就是不认为:我在眼中,我有什么东西系缚在眼中,他人 在眼中,或他人有什么东西系缚在眼中。“不从眼认为”,也不认为:我从眼而出,我有什么东西系缚从眼而出,他人从眼而出,或他人有什么东西系缚从眼而出。意思是,对由渴爱、慢、邪见所生的“认为”,连一种也不让它生起。“不认为眼是我的”,就是不认为“我的眼”,也就是不让执为“我所”的渴爱之“认为”生起。其余内容显而易见。在这部经中,讲了能导向阿罗汉果的观,即在四十四个处所令证达阿罗汉果。巴利
30. Aṭṭhame sabbamaññitasamugghātasāruppanti sabbesaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhimaññitānaṃ samugghātāya anucchavikaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Cakkhuṃ na maññatīti cakkhuṃ ahanti vā mamanti vā paroti vā parassāti vā na maññati. Cakkhusmiṃ na maññatīti ahaṃ cakkhusmiṃ, mama kiñcanapalibodho cakkhusmiṃ paro cakkhusmiṃ, parassa kiñcanapalibodho cakkhusminti na maññati. Cakkhuto na maññatīti ahaṃ cakkhuto niggato, mama kiñcanapalibodho cakkhuto niggato, paro cakkhuto niggato, parassa kiñcanapalibodho cakkhuto niggatoti evampi na maññati, taṇhāmānadiṭṭhimaññanānaṃ ekampi na uppādetīti attho. Cakkhuṃ meti na maññatīti mama cakkhūti na maññati, mamattabhūtaṃ taṇhāmaññanaṃ na uppādetīti attho. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Imasmiṃ sutte catucattālīsāya ṭhānesu arahattaṃ pāpetvā vipassanā kathitā.
第九经,第一根除适宜经的解释。巴利
9. Paṭhamasamugghātasappāyasuttavaṇṇanā
31 31. 在第九经中,“适合断除”是指对断除有帮助。“由此,它成为异样”是指:由于那个,它以另一种方式存在。“具有变异性、执着于有的世间,只欣喜于有”是指:这个世间,因为走向变异、经历改变而具有变异性,却仍然对种种有执着、黏着、纠缠、被障碍,只对有感到欣喜。“诸比丘,凡所有的蕴、界、处”是指:比丘们,所有这些蕴、界、处,就是蕴界处。“连那个也不认为”是把前面已经提到的内容总括起来,再次说明:一切都不认为。在这部经中,以在四十八个地方导向阿罗汉果而解说了观。巴利
31. Navame samugghātasappāyāti samugghātassa upakārabhūtā. Tato taṃ hoti aññathāti tato taṃ aññenākārena hoti. Aññathābhāvī bhavasatto loko bhavamevābhinandatīti aññathābhāvaṃ vipariṇāmaṃ upagamanena aññathābhāvī hutvāpi bhavesu satto laggo lagito palibuddho ayaṃ loko bhavaṃyeva abhinandati. Yāvatā, bhikkhave, khandhadhātuāyatananti, bhikkhave, yattakaṃ idaṃ khandhā ca dhātuyo ca āyatanāni cāti khandhadhātuāyatanaṃ. Tampi na maññatīti sabbampi na maññatīti heṭṭhā gahitameva saṃkaḍḍhitvā puna dasseti. Imasmiṃ sutte aṭṭhacattālīsāya ṭhānesu arahattaṃ pāpetvā vipassanā kathitā.
第十经——第二《适合断除经》的注释。巴利
10. Dutiyasamugghātasappāyasuttavaṇṇanā
32 第三十二(经)。在第十经里,通过“这是我的”等三句一组、三句一组的表述,指出了对爱、慢、见的执取,然后按三转的方式作了开示。不过,如果把这三部经依次合起来看,就说明了连同观在内的四种道。巴利
32. Dasame etaṃ mamātiādīhi tīhi tīhi padehi taṇhāmānadiṭṭhigāhe dassetvā tiparivaṭṭanayena desanā katā. Paṭipāṭiyā pana tīsupi imesu suttesu saha vipassanāya cattāropi maggā kathitāti.
第4章 生法品的注释巴利
4. Jātidhammavaggavaṇṇanā
33-42 33-42. 在生法品中,“生法”是指具有生起、产生的本性。“老法”是指具有衰老的本性。“病法”是指以病生起的因缘而具有病的本性。“死法”是指具有死亡的本性。“愁法”是指以愁生起的因缘而具有愁的本性。“杂染法”是指具有杂染的本性。“灭尽法”是指具有趋向灭尽的本性。“灭法”等也是同样的道理。巴利
33-42. Jātidhammavagge jātidhammanti jāyanadhammaṃ nibbattanasabhāvaṃ. Jarādhammanti jīraṇasabhāvaṃ. Byādhidhammanti byādhino uppattipaccayabhāvena byādhisabhāvaṃ. Maraṇadhammanti maraṇasabhāvaṃ . Sokadhammanti sokassa uppattipaccayabhāvena sokasabhāvaṃ. Saṃkilesikadhammanti saṃkilesikasabhāvaṃ. Khayadhammanti khayagamanasabhāvaṃ. Vayadhammādīsupi eseva nayoti.
一切无常品注释巴利
5. Sabbaaniccavaggavaṇṇanā
43-52 43-52. 在《无常品》中,讲到“应证知”这个词时,出现的是“知遍知”,但另外两种遍知也应知道是已经包含在内的。在“应遍知”“应断”等词中,直接出现的只是“度遍知”和“断遍知”,但另外两种同样应当知道是已经包含在内的。“应作证”是指应当亲自证得。“应证知遍知”这里虽然没有说到“断遍知”,但也应当知道它已经包含在内了。“压迫”是指被种种苦逼迫的意思。“困扰”是指被损害的意思。其余部分都很清楚。巴利
43-52. Aniccavagge abhiññeyyanti pade ñātapariññā āgatā, itarā pana dve gahitāyevāti veditabbā. Pariññeyyapahātabbapadesupi tīraṇapahānapariññāva āgatā, itarāpi pana dve gahitāyevāti veditabbā. Sacchikātabbanti paccakkhaṃ kātabbaṃ. Abhiññāpariññeyyanti idhāpi pahānapariññā avuttāpi gahitāyevāti veditabbā. Upaddutanti anekaggaṭṭhena. Upassaṭṭhanti upahataṭṭhena. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
《无明品》解说巴利
6. Avijjāvaggavaṇṇanā
53-62 53-62. 在《无明品》中,“无明”是指对四圣谛的不了解。“明”是指阿罗汉道的智慧。“以无常而了知、而见”——即使以苦、无我的方式去了知、去见,烦恼也一定会被断除;不过,这里是根据以无常为主题而说法时,所应教化的那个人的根性意乐而说的。一切处都是同样的道理。另外,这里“结”是指十种结。“漏”是指四种漏。“随眠”是指七种随眠。“为了遍知一切取”,是为了以三种遍知完全了知所有四种取。“为了遍尽”,是为了彻底断除舍弃。其余各处都清楚明了。巴利
53-62. Avijjāvagge avijjāti catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ. Vijjāti arahattamaggavijjā. Aniccato jānato passatoti dukkhānattavasenāpi jānato passato pahīyatiyeva, idaṃ pana aniccavasena kathite bujjhanakapuggalassa ajjhāsayena vuttaṃ. Eseva nayo sabbattha. Api cettha saṃyojanāti dasa saṃyojanāni. Āsavāti cattāro āsavā. Anusayāti satta anusayā. Sabbupādānapariññāyāti sabbesaṃ catunnampi upādānānaṃ tīhi pariññāhi parijānanatthāya. Pariyādānāyāti khepanatthāya. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
第七 弥迦阇罗品巴利
7. Migajālavaggo
《弥嘎加喇经》第一的注释巴利
1. Paṭhamamigajālasuttavaṇṇanā
63 63. 在《弥迦迦罗品》第一经中,“眼所识”是指能被眼识看见的。“耳所识”等也依此类推。“可爱的”:不管有没有被追求,只要成为可爱所缘,就是这个意思。“可喜的”:令人喜爱的。“满意的”:能使心增长的。“可意的形态”:属于可爱种类的事物。“与欲相应的”:以它为所缘而生起欲贪,因此与欲相伴;“诱骗的”:能诱骗人,意思是成为贪欲生起的原因。“喜”:指渴爱的喜。“结”:指束缚。“喜结相应”:被喜的束缚绑住。“阿兰若与林野”:指阿兰若和林野。其中,虽然阿毗达摩中直接说“出了门槛以外,这一切都是阿兰若”(《分别论》529),但应当知道,这里指的是为了成就森林支的坐卧具而说的“至少五百弓的坐卧具”(《律藏·波罗夷》654)。“林野”:指越过村落边界之后,人们不靠近的地方,那里既不耕作也不播种。对此也有这样的说法:巴利
63. Migajālavaggassa paṭhame cakkhuviññeyyāti cakkhuviññāṇena passitabbā. Sotaviññeyyādīsupi eseva nayo. Iṭṭhāti pariyiṭṭhā vā hontu mā vā, iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtāti attho. Kantāti kamanīyā. Manāpāti manavaḍḍhanakā. Piyarūpāti piyajātikā. Kāmūpasaṃhitāti ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjamānena kāmena upasaṃhitā rajanīyāti rañjanīyā, rāguppattikāraṇabhūtāti attho. Nandīti taṇhānandī. Saṃyogoti saṃyojanaṃ. Nandisaṃyojanasaṃyuttoti nandībandhanena baddho. Araññavanapatthānīti araññāni ca vanapatthāni ca. Tattha kiñcāpi abhidhamme nippariyāyena ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) vuttaṃ, tathāpi yaṃ taṃ ‘‘pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) araññakaṅganipphādakaṃ senāsanaṃ vuttaṃ, tadeva adhippetanti veditabbaṃ. Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ, yattha na kasīyati na vapīyati. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“林野”是那些偏远坐卧处的别名。“林野”是那些森林丛林的称呼,“林野”是那些令人恐惧之处的称呼,“林野”是那些令人毛骨悚然之处的称呼,“林野”是那些边远之处的称呼,“林野”是非人出没的坐卧处的别名。巴利
‘‘Vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vanapatthanti vanasaṇḍānametaṃ, vanapatthanti bhiṃsanakānametaṃ, vanapatthanti salomahaṃsānametaṃ, vanapatthanti pariyantānametaṃ, vanapatthanti amanussūpacārānaṃ senāsanānametaṃ adhivacana’’nti (vibha. 531).
在这里,除了“边地”这一种说法之外,应以其余的说法来理解“林野”。“边远的”,就是边地的、极其遥远的。“少有声音的”,是因为没有杵臼、舂杵、儿童等声音,所以少有声音。“少喧杂的”,是因为没有那些回荡的大音声,所以少喧杂。“无人风处的”,是指没有来往行人的身体气息。“适合人隐密的”,是适合人们做隐密之事。“适合隐居的”,是适合隐居。巴利
Ettha ca pariyantānanti imaṃ ekaṃ pariyāyaṃ ṭhapetvā sesapariyāyehi vanapatthāni veditabbāni. Pantānīti pariyantāni atidūrāni. Appasaddānīti udukkhalamusaladārakasaddādīnaṃ abhāvena appasaddāni. Appanigghosānīti tesaṃ tesaṃ ninnādamahānigghosassa abhāvena appanigghosāni. Vijanavātānīti sañcaraṇajanassa sarīravātavirahitāni. Manussarāhasseyyakānīti manussānaṃ rahokammassa anucchavikāni. Paṭisallānasāruppānīti nilīyanasāruppāni.
第二《弥嘎加喇经》的注释。巴利
2. Dutiyamigajālasuttavaṇṇanā
64 在第二经中,“由于欢喜的灭尽,所以有苦的灭尽”:意思是,因为渴爱之欢喜的灭尽,所以轮回之苦也就灭尽。巴利
64. Dutiye nandinirodhā dukkhanirodhoti taṇhānandiyā nirodhena vaṭṭadukkhassa nirodho.
以第一萨密帝经、魔问经等经为始的注释:第3至第5经。巴利
3-5. Paṭhamasamiddhimārapañhāsuttādivaṇṇanā
65-67 第三经中,“三弥提”这个名字,是因为身体圆满才得到的。据说那位长老的身体非常俊美、庄严,就像高高举起的花束,又像装饰过的花房,因为一切方面都圆满具足,所以圆满。因此就被称为“三弥提”。魔,是指问死亡。“魔的施设”,就是“魔”这个施设、名称、称号。那里有魔或魔的施设,意思是说:那里有死亡,或者有“死亡”这个名称。第四经的意思很明白,第五经也一样。巴利
65-67. Tatiye samiddhīti attabhāvassa samiddhatāya evaṃ laddhanāmo. Tassa kira therassa attabhāvo abhirūpo ahosi pāsādiko, ukkhittamālāpuṭo viya alaṅkatamālāgabbho viya ca sabbākārapāripūriyā samiddho. Tasmā samiddhitveva saṅkhaṃ gato. Māroti maraṇaṃ pucchati. Mārapaññattīti māroti paññatti nāmaṃ nāmadheyyaṃ. Atthi tattha māro vā mārapaññatti vāti tattha maraṇaṃ vā maraṇanti idaṃ nāmaṃ vā atthīti dasseti. Catutthaṃ uttānameva, tathā pañcamaṃ.
第六部《三弥提世间问经》的注释巴利
6. Samiddhilokapañhāsuttavaṇṇanā
68 第六经中说到“世间”:因为具有破坏、毁坏的意义,所以叫世间。就这样,从弥迦迦罗长老所请的那部经开始,这五部经里讲的,都只是流转与还灭。巴利
68. Chaṭṭhe lokoti lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko. Iti migajālattherassa āyācanasuttato paṭṭhāya pañcasupi suttesu vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.
第七 优波先那毒蛇经的注释巴利
7. Upasenaāsīvisasuttavaṇṇanā
69 第七经的注释:在名叫“清凉林”的那片坟场树林里。“蛇首窟”:因为形状像蛇的颈部,所以得到这个名字。“优波先那”:是法将(舍利弗尊者)的弟弟优波先那长老。毒蛇掉下来了:据说长老吃完饭、做完该做的事,拿着大袈裟,在石窟的阴凉处坐下,微风吹拂,就在双层僧衣上做针线活。那时,石窟顶上正好有两条小毒蛇在玩耍。其中一条掉了下来,落在长老的肩膀上。那条蛇毒性很强,从掉落的地方开始,毒液就像灯芯被火焰吞噬一样蔓延到长老全身。长老看到毒液这样蔓延——虽然从掉落处开始就按一定范围扩散——便以自己的神通力决意:“不要让这个身体在石窟里毁坏。”然后对比丘们说:“趁这个身体还在这里、还没散坏,你们把它抬到外面去。”意思是:在它还没散坏的时候,把它抬到外面去。“异离”:就是变得不同。“诸根的转变”:就是眼、耳等诸根失去常态。就在那里散坏:抬到外面放好后,就在那张床上散坏了。巴利
69. Sattame sītavaneti evaṃnāmake susānavane. Sappasoṇḍikapabbhāreti sappaphaṇasadisatāya evaṃladdhanāme pabbhāre. Upasenassāti dhammasenāpatino kaniṭṭhabhātikaupasenattherassa. Āsīviso patito hotīti thero kira katabhattakicco mahācīvaraṃ gahetvā leṇacchāyāya mandamandena vātapānavātena bījiyamāno nisīditvā dupaṭṭanivāsane sūcikammaṃ karoti. Tasmiṃ khaṇe leṇacchadane dve āsīvisapotakā kīḷanti. Tesu eko patitvā therassa aṃsakūṭe avatthāsi. So ca phuṭṭhaviso hoti. Tasmā patitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya therassa kāye dīpasikhā viya vaṭṭiṃ pariyādiyamānamevassa visaṃ otiṇṇaṃ. Thero visassa tathāgamanaṃ disvā kiñcāpi taṃ patitamattameva yathāparicchedena gataṃ, attano pana iddhibalena ‘‘ayaṃ attabhāvo leṇe mā vinassatū’’ti adhiṭṭhahitvā bhikkhū āmantesi. Purāyaṃ kāyo idheva vikiratīti yāva na vikirati, tāva naṃ bahiddhā nīharathāti attho. Aññathattanti aññathābhāvaṃ. Indriyānaṃ vā vipariṇāmanti cakkhusotādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ pakativijahanabhāvaṃ. Tattheva vikirīti bahi nīharitvā ṭhapitaṭṭhāne mañcakasmiṃyeva vikiri.
第八 优波婆那现见经的注释巴利
8. Upavāṇasandiṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
70 第八经中,觉知色的人:当他确定青、黄等种种所缘时,就是在觉知色,因此称为觉知色的人。觉知色贪的人:因为烦恼还存在,他就是在觉知色贪,因此称为觉知色贪的人。现见等词的意思,和《清净道论》中所说的完全一样。不覺知色贪的人:因为烦恼已经不存在,他不再觉知色贪,因此称为不覺知色贪的人。这部经里讲的是有学和无学圣者的省察。巴利
70. Aṭṭhame rūpappaṭisaṃvedīti nīlapītādibhedaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vavatthāpento rūpaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karoti, tasmā rūpappaṭisaṃvedī nāma hoti. Rūparāgappaṭisaṃvedīti kilesassa atthibhāveneva pana rūparāgaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karoti nāma, tasmā rūparāgappaṭisaṃvedīti vuccati. Sandiṭṭhikotiādīni visuddhimagge vuttatthāneva. Noca rūparāgappaṭisaṃvedīti kilesassa natthibhāveneva na rūparāgaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karoti nāma, tasmā ‘‘no ca rūparāgappaṭisaṃvedī’’ti vuccati. Imasmiṃ sutte sekhāsekhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā kathitā.
第九 第一六触处经的注释巴利
9. Paṭhamachaphassāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
71 71. 在第九经中,“触处”是指产生触的处所。“未住”是指没有住下来。“远离”是指遥远。那位比丘说:“尊者,我在这里已经消失了,名叫灭亡。”世尊心想:“这位比丘说‘我在这教法中名叫已亡’,他是不是在别的界业处、遍业处等方面有精勤修行呢?”世尊看不到他有那样的精勤,就又思惟:“到底哪种业处适合他呢?”随后看到只有“处业处”适合他,于是为他说法时问道:“比丘,你对此怎么想?”等等。“善哉”是对他回答的随喜赞叹。“这就是苦的尽头”:这就是轮回苦的尽头和边际,也就是涅槃。巴利
71. Navame phassāyatanānanti phassākarānaṃ. Avusitanti avuṭṭhaṃ. Ārakāti dūre. Etthāhaṃ, bhante, anassasanti, bhante, ahaṃ ettha anassasiṃ, naṭṭho nāma ahanti vadati. Bhagavā – ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu ‘ahaṃ nāma imasmiṃ sāsane naṭṭho’ti vadati, kinnu khvassa aññesu dhātukammaṭṭhāna-kasiṇakammaṭṭhānādīsu abhiyogo atthī’’ti cintetvā, tampi apassanto – ‘‘kataraṃ nu kho kammaṭṭhānaṃ imassa sappāyaṃ bhavissatī’’ti cintesi. Tato ‘‘āyatanakammaṭṭhānameva sappāya’’nti disvā taṃ kathento taṃ kiṃ maññasi bhikkhūtiādimāha. Sādhūti tassa byākaraṇe sampahaṃsanaṃ. Esevanto dukkhassāti ayameva vaṭṭadukkhassanto paricchedo, nibbānanti attho.
第十经《第二六触处经》的注释巴利
10. Dutiyachaphassāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
72 72. 在第十经中,“我已消失”即我已灭尽,我已不存在,这就是它的意思。“为未来不再有生”中,所谓“未来不再有生”就是涅槃;意思是:为了涅槃而舍弃,就会成就涅槃。巴利
72. Dasame anassasanti nassasiṃ, naṭṭho nāmamhi icceva attho. Āyatiṃ apunabbhavāyāti ettha āyatiṃ apunabbhavo nāma nibbānaṃ, nibbānatthāya pahīnaṃ bhavissatīti attho.
第十一经《第三六触处经》的注释巴利
11. Tatiyachaphassāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
73 第十一经中,“anassasanti”是指灭去,“panassasanti”是指彻底灭去。其余内容应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
73. Ekādasame anassasanti naṭṭho, panassasanti atinaṭṭho. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.
1-5. 第一病经等的注释巴利
1-5. Paṭhamagilānasuttādivaṇṇanā
74-78 74-78. 在《病品》第一经中,“amukasmiṃ”就是“在某个地方”。这正是此处采用的读法。“appaññāto”就是“不为人知”“不出名”。其实,即使是刚出家不久的人,也有些是为人所知的,比如罗睺罗长老和善意沙弥;但这位比丘既是刚出家不久,又不为人知。这里剩下的内容,按照前面已经说过的方式理解即可。接下来的四经也是如此。巴利
74-78. Gilānavaggassa paṭhame amukasminti asukasmiṃ. Ayameva vā pāṭho. Appaññātoti aññāto apākaṭo. Navopi hi koci paññāto hoti rāhulatthero viya sumanasāmaṇero viya ca, ayaṃ pana navo ceva apaññāto ca. Sesamettha vuttanayamevāti. Tathā ito paresu catūsu.
第六经《第一断无明经》的注释巴利
6. Paṭhamaavijjāpahānasuttavaṇṇanā
79 在第六经中,“以无常了知”:即使是以苦、无我的方式来了知,也一样能断除;不过这里是在开示了无常相之后,依照觉悟者的意乐而说的。巴利
79. Chaṭṭhe aniccato jānatoti dukkhānattavasena jānatopi pahīyatiyeva, idaṃ pana aniccalakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā vutte bujjhanakassa ajjhāsayena vuttaṃ.
第七部《第二无明断经》的注释巴利
7. Dutiyaavijjāpahānasuttavaṇṇanā
80 在第七经里,“一切法”是指三地的一切法。“不足以执取”是说,不应该用执取和邪执取的方式去抓取。“一切相”是指一切诸行的相。“从其他方面看”是说,就像还没有遍知执取的人那样去看,然后就从那之外的角度去看。确实,还没有遍知执取的人会把一切相都看成是我;而已经遍知执取的人则把它看成无我,不看成是我。所以在这部经里,讲的只是无我相。巴利
80. Sattame sabbe dhammāti sabbe tebhūmakadhammā. Nālaṃ abhinivesāyāti abhinivesaparāmāsaggāhena gaṇhituṃ na yuttā. Sabbanimittānīti sabbāni saṅkhāranimittāni. Aññato passatīti yathā apariññātābhiniveso jano passati, tato aññato passati. Apariññātābhiniveso hi jano sabbanimittānipi attato passati. Pariññātābhiniveso pana anattato passati, no attatoti evaṃ imasmiṃ sutte anattalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ.
第8经《众多比丘经》的注释巴利
8. Sambahulabhikkhusuttavaṇṇanā
81 第八处这里,“idha no”中的“no”只是一个语气词,其余内容都很容易理解。只需知道,仅在此处讲的是苦的特征。巴利
81. Aṭṭhame idha noti ettha no-kāro nipātamattameva. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Kevalaṃ idha dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.
第9经《世间问经》的注释巴利
9. Lokapañhāsuttavaṇṇanā
82 第九经中,“lujjati”(坏灭)就是瓦解、破坏。这里讲的是无常相。巴利
82. Navame lujjatīti palujjati bhijjati. Idha aniccalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ.
第10经 颇求那问经的注释巴利
10. Phaggunapañhāsuttavaṇṇanā
83 在第十经里,已断戏论是指因为渴爱的戏论已断,所以叫已断戏论。已断去路是指因为渴爱的去路确实已断,所以叫已断去路。他问“我问什么?”是在问:我问的是过去诸佛所护持的眼、耳等。或者也可以这样说:即使道已修习,如果未来的眼、耳等轮回还会增长,那我就问这件事。他就是这样发问的。巴利
83. Dasame chinnapapañceti taṇhāpapañcassa chinnattā chinnapapañce. Chinnavaṭumeti taṇhāvaṭumasseva chinnattā chinnavaṭume. Kiṃ pucchāmīti pucchati? Atikkantabuddhehi pariharitāni cakkhusotādīni pucchāmīti pucchati. Atha vā sace magge bhāvitepi anāgate cakkhusotādivaṭṭaṃ vaḍḍheyya, taṃ pucchāmīti pucchatīti.
《败坏法经》的注释巴利
1. Palokadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
84 84. 在阐那品的第一部经里,“坏灭法”是指会坏灭的本性。这样一来,这里就只说了无常相。巴利
84. Channavaggassa paṭhame palokadhammanti bhijjanakasabhāvaṃ. Evamettha aniccalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ.
2. 《空世间经》的注释巴利
2. Suññatalokasuttavaṇṇanā
85 在第二部经里,“我所拥有的”是指属于自己的用具。这样一来,这里其实只讲到了无我的特征。巴利
85. Dutiye attaniyenāti attano santakena parikkhārena. Evamettha anattalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ.
3. 《略说法经》的注释巴利
3. Saṃkhittadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
86 第三经应当依照《蕴品》中《阿难教诫经》(《相应部》3.83)所说的方法来理解。巴利
86. Tatiyaṃ khandhiyavagge ānandovāde (saṃ. ni. 3.83) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
第4篇 阐那经的注释巴利
4. Channasuttavaṇṇanā
87 87. 在第四经中,“车匿”:这是一位名叫车匿的长老,不是那位出家离去的长老。“独处”:指从果等至中出来。“探病者”:就是照顾病人的人。照顾病人是佛陀所赞叹、佛陀所称赞的,所以这样说。“应给头巾”:头巾就是缠在头上的布,也应该给这个。“刀”:指夺命的刀。“我不期望”:就是我不想要。“已承事”:就是已经服侍了。“以可意者”:指以令心欢喜的身业等。在这里,七位有学称为“侍奉者”,阿罗汉称为“承事者”,世尊称为“所受承事者”。巴利
87. Catutthe channoti evaṃnāmako thero, na abhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhantathero. Paṭisallānāti phalasamāpattito. Gilānapucchakāti gilānupaṭṭhākā. Gilānupaṭṭhānaṃ nāma buddhapasatthaṃ buddhavaṇṇitaṃ, tasmā evamāha. Sīsaveṭhaṃ dadeyyāti sīse veṭhanaṃ sīsaveṭhaṃ, tañca dadeyya. Satthanti jīvitahārakasatthaṃ. Nāvakaṅkhāmīti na icchāmi. Pariciṇṇoti paricarito. Manāpenāti manavaḍḍhanakena kāyakammādinā. Ettha ca satta sekhā paricaranti nāma, arahā paricārī nāma, bhagavā pariciṇṇo nāma.
贤友,这正是弟子所应做的;贤友,对弟子来说,这才是合适的。无可指责,就是不再生起、不再结生。贤友舍利弗,请提问,我听了之后就会知道——这叫作弟子的邀请。像“这是我的”这类说法,是就渴爱、慢、见这三种执取而说的。见灭尽,就是了知坏灭与消逝。我观察“这不是我的,这不是我,这不是我的自我”,就是观察无常、苦、无我。在这些地方,阐那长老把舍利弗长老所问的问题归入阿罗汉果来解说。但舍利弗长老虽然知道他是凡夫,也没有说他是凡夫或漏已尽者,只是保持沉默。而准陀长老心想“我要让他知道自己是凡夫”,就给了他教诫。巴利
Etañhi, āvuso, sāvakassa patirūpanti, āvuso, sāvakassa nāma etaṃ anucchavikaṃ. Anupavajjanti appavattikaṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ. Pucchāvuso sāriputta, sutvā vedissāmāti ayaṃ sāvakapavāraṇā nāma. Etaṃmamātiādīni taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāhavasena vuttāni. Nirodhaṃ disvāti khayavayaṃ ñatvā. Netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attāti samanupassāmīti aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti samanupassāmi. Ettakesu ṭhānesu channatthero sāriputtattherena pucchitaṃ pañhaṃ arahatte pakkhipitvā kathesi. Sāriputtatthero pana tassa puthujjanabhāvaṃ ñatvāpi taṃ ‘‘puthujjano’’ti vā ‘‘khīṇāsavo’’ti vā avatvā tuṇhīyeva ahosi. Cundatthero panassa puthujjanabhāvaṃ saññāpessāmīti cintetvā ovādaṃ adāsi.
这里,“因此”是说:因为忍受不了临终的感受,他说“我要拿刀来”,所以这位具寿是凡夫;由此也点明“因此,你也要对这一点作意”。或者,因为你说“看到六处的灭尽之后,我不再以三种执取来看待眼等”,所以,具寿,你也应当对那位世尊的教法在这一点上作意——这样说,正是在指出他仍是凡夫。“恒常持”就是一切时。“有依者”就是被渴爱、慢、见所依止的人。“动摇”就是挣扎扰动。就像现在,这位具寿忍受不了生起的感受,因为没有断除执取,还抓着“我在感受,这是我的感受”,所以现在就挣扎扰动起来。他也正是用这一点对他说:“你就是凡夫。”巴利
Tattha tasmāti yasmā māraṇantikaṃ vedanaṃ adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto satthaṃ āharāmīti vadati, tasmā puthujjano āyasmā, tena idampi manasikarohīti dīpeti. Yasmā vā channaṃ āyatanānaṃ nirodhaṃ disvā cakkhādīni tiṇṇaṃ gāhānaṃ vasena na samanupassāmīti vadasi. Tasmā idampi tassa bhagavato sāsanaṃ āyasmatā manasikātabbantipi puthujjanabhāvameva dīpento vadati. Niccakappanti niccakālaṃ. Nissitassāti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi nissitassa. Calitanti vipphanditaṃ hoti. Yathayidaṃ āyasmato uppannaṃ vedanaṃ adhivāsetuṃ asakkontassa ‘‘ahaṃ vedayāmi, mama vedanā’’ti appahīnaggāhassa idāni vipphanditaṃ hoti, imināpi naṃ ‘‘puthujjanova tva’’nti vadati.
“轻安”是指身轻安和心轻安,也就是烦恼的轻安,这就是它的意思。“无倾向”是指渴爱的无倾向。“不存在”是指:对“有”的希求和执著现起都不存在。“没有来去”是指:以结生来说的“来”不存在,以死亡来说的“去”也不存在。“死没与再生”是指:以死亡来说的死没,以再生来说的再生。“不在此处,不在彼处,也不在两者之间”是指:不在此世间,不在他世间,也不在两者之中。“这就是苦的终结”是指:轮回之苦和烦恼之苦,它的终点、它的边界、它的彻底止息,就在这里。这里的意思正是如此。至于那些抓住“两者之间”这个说法而主张有“中有”的人,他们的说法没有意义。因为“中有”的存在,在阿毗达摩中已经被明确否定了。而“之间”这个词,是在说明另一种解释。所以这里的意思是:“不在此处,不在彼处”,另一种解释就是“不在两者之间”。巴利
Passaddhīti kāyacittapassaddhi, kilesapassaddhi nāma hotīti attho. Natiyāti taṇhānatiyā. Asatīti bhavatthāya ālayanikantipariyuṭṭhāne asati. Āgatigati na hotīti paṭisandhivasena āgati nāma, cutivasena gamanaṃ nāma na hoti. Cutūpapātoti cavanavasena cuti, upapajjanavasena upapāto. Nevidha na huraṃ na ubhayamantarenāti na idhaloke na paraloke na ubhayattha hoti. Esevanto dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhakilesadukkhassa ayameva anto ayaṃ paricchedo parivaṭumabhāvo hoti. Ayameva hi ettha attho. Ye pana ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti vacanaṃ gahetvā antarābhavaṃ icchanti, tesaṃ vacanaṃ niratthakaṃ. Antarābhavassa hi bhāvo abhidhamme paṭikkhittoyeva. ‘‘Antarenā’’ti vacanaṃ pana vikappantaradīpanaṃ. Tasmā ayamettha attho – neva idha na huraṃ, aparo vikappo na ubhayanti.
他拿起刀,也就是那把夺命的刀,拿起来后割断了自己的喉咙。就在那一刻,死亡的恐惧袭上他心头,趣相显现出来。他意识到自己还是凡夫,内心生起警醒,于是开始修观,观察诸行,证得了阿罗汉果,成为等首者,然后般涅槃了。“当面记说为无可非难”——虽然这是长老还在凡夫位时得到的记说,但正是凭着这个记说,他毫无障碍地般涅槃了。因此,世尊就拿这个记说来宣说。巴利
Satthaṃ āharesīti jīvitahārakasatthaṃ āhari, āharitvā kaṇṭhanāḷaṃ chindi. Athassa tasmiṃ khaṇe maraṇabhayaṃ okkami, gatinimittaṃ upaṭṭhāsi. So attano puthujjanabhāvaṃ ñatvā, saṃviggacitto vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā, saṅkhāre pariggaṇhanto arahattaṃ patvā, samasīsī hutvā parinibbuto. Sammukhāyeva anupavajjatā byākatāti kiñcāpi idaṃ therassa puthujjanakāle byākaraṇaṃ hoti; etena pana byākaraṇena anantarāyamassa parinibbānaṃ ahosi. Tasmā bhagavā tadeva byākaraṇaṃ gahetvā kathesi.
“可亲近之家”是指应当去拜访的家庭。长老借此问道:“尊者,在这样有男施主和女施主存在的情况下,那位比丘会在您的教法中般涅槃吗?”这是在前行修行阶段,指出与家庭交往的过失。于是世尊为了说明他并未与那些家庭交往,便说了“舍利弗,这些……”等等。据说正是在这一点上,长老与家庭没有交往的事实变得很明显。其余各处都清楚易懂。巴利
Upavajjakulānīti upasaṅkamitabbakulāni. Iminā thero, ‘‘bhante, evaṃ upaṭṭhākesu ca upaṭṭhāyikāsu ca vijjamānāsu so bhikkhu tumhākaṃ sāsane parinibbāyissatī’’ti pubbabhāgapaṭipattiyaṃ kulasaṃsaggadosaṃ dassento pucchati. Athassa bhagavā kulesu saṃsaggābhāvaṃ dīpento honti hete sāriputtātiādimāha. Imasmiṃ kira ṭhāne therassa kulesu asaṃsaṭṭhabhāvo pākaṭo ahosi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva.
5-6. 《富楼那经》等的注释巴利
5-6. Puṇṇasuttādivaṇṇanā
88-89 88-89. 在第五项中,“tañca”指的是那个眼和那个色。“喜贪集起则苦集起”的意思是,由于渴爱的汇集,五取蕴之苦也就汇集起来。这样,在六个根门中,通过“喜贪集起则苦集起”这句话,依二谛展示了流转的顶点。在第二种方式中,通过“灭与道”,依二谛展示了还灭的顶点。“以此,你,富楼那”是一个单独的连结。如此,先以流转与还灭的方式把说法引导到阿拉汉果,现在为了让富楼那长老在七个场合发出狮子吼,于是开始说“以此你……”等等。巴利
88-89. Pañcame tañceti taṃ cakkhuñceva rūpañca. Nandisamudayā dukkhasamudayoti taṇhāya samodhānena pañcakkhandhadukkhassa samodhānaṃ hoti. Iti chasu dvāresu ‘‘nandisamudayā dukkhasamudayo’’ti iminā dvinnaṃ saccānaṃ vasena vaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassesi. Dutiyanaye nirodho maggoti dvinnaṃ saccānaṃ vasena vivaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassesi. Iminā tvaṃ puṇṇāti pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Evaṃ tāva vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena desanaṃ arahatte pakkhipitvā idāni puṇṇattheraṃ sattasu ṭhānesu sīhanādaṃ nadāpetuṃ iminā tvantiādimāha.
凶恶是指心怀嗔怒、造下罪过。粗恶是指言语粗暴刺人,也就是他们用十种骂人的事由来辱骂。责骂是指他们威胁说:“你算是什么沙门?我们要这样那样收拾你。”在此处如此,是指在我这里将会这样发生。以杖,是指用四肘长的杖、金合欢木杖或槌杵。以刀,是指单刃刀之类的刀具。寻找持刀者,是指寻觅能夺人性命的持刀之人。长老这句话,是针对在第三波罗夷事中,比丘们听了不净的教说之后厌患自身、因而寻找持刀者一事而说的。在以调伏与寂止这一句中,调伏是根律仪等的名称。巴利
Caṇḍāti duṭṭhā kibbisā. Pharusāti kakkhaḷā akkosissantīti dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosissanti. Paribhāsissantīti ‘‘kiṃ samaṇo nāma tvaṃ, idañcidañca te karissāmā’’ti tajjessanti. Evametthāti evaṃ mayhaṃ ettha bhavissati. Daṇḍenāti catuhatthadaṇḍena vā khadiradaṇḍena vā ghaṭikamuggarena vā. Satthenāti ekatodhārādinā satthena. Satthahārakaṃ pariyesantīti jīvitahārakasatthaṃ pariyesanti. Idaṃ thero tatiyapārājikavatthusmiṃ asubhakathaṃ sutvā attabhāvena jigucchantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ satthahārakapariyesanaṃ sandhāyāha. Damūpasamenāti ettha damoti indriyasaṃvarādīnaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ.
以真理调伏,具足自制。
已到达吠陀的终极,已经圆满梵行。巴利
‘‘Saccena danto damasā upeto, Vedantagū vusitabrahmacariyo’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.195; su. ni. 467) –
在这里,根律仪确实被称为“调伏”。在“若有比真实、调伏、舍离更殊胜者,则由忍耐于此处得见”这句中,慧被称为“调伏”。在“以布施、调伏、自制、说真实语”这句中,布萨羯磨被称为“调伏”。但在这部经里,忍耐应当被理解为“调伏”。“寂止”就是它的同义词。巴利
Ettha hi indriyasaṃvaro damoti vutto. ‘‘Yadi saccā damā cāgā, khantyā bhiyyodha vijjatī’’ti (su. ni. 191; saṃ. ni. 1.246) ettha paññā damoti vuttā. ‘‘Dānena damena saṃyamena saccavajjenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.165; ma. ni. 2.226) ettha uposathakammaṃ damoti vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana sutte khanti damoti veditabbo. Upasamoti tasseva vevacanaṃ.
那么,这位具寿富楼那又是谁呢?他为什么想去那里呢?他本来就是苏那巴兰答的居民,不过在舍卫城察觉到住处不合适,所以就想离开那里去别处。巴利
Atha kho āyasmā puṇṇoti ko panesa puṇṇo, kasmā ca panettha gantukāmo ahosīti? Sunāparantavāsiko eva esa, sāvatthiyaṃ pana asappāyavihāraṃ sallakkhetvā tattha gantukāmo ahosi.
关于这件事,有一个渐次展开的因缘故事:据说,在苏那巴兰答地区的一个商人村里,住着两兄弟。他们当中,有时候是哥哥带着五百辆车,到各地乡间去,把货物运回来;有时候是弟弟去。而这一次,弟弟被留在家中,哥哥带着五百辆车,在各地乡间经商游历,一路辗转来到舍卫城。他把商队安顿在离祇园不太远的地方,吃过早饭以后,在随从们的围绕下,坐在一个舒适的地方。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anuppubbikathā – sunāparantaraṭṭhe kira ekasmiṃ vāṇijagāme ete dve bhātaro. Tesu kadāci jeṭṭho pañca sakaṭasatāni gahetvā janapadaṃ gantvā bhaṇḍaṃ āharati, kadāci kaniṭṭho. Imasmiṃ pana samaye kaniṭṭhaṃ ghare ṭhapetvā, jeṭṭhabhātiko pañca sakaṭasatāni gahetvā, janapadacārikaṃ caranto anupubbena sāvatthiṃ patvā, jetavanassa nātidūre sakaṭasatthaṃ nivesetvā bhuttapātarāso parijanaparivuto phāsukaṭṭhāne nisīdi.
那时,舍卫城的居民吃过早饭后,决意持守布萨日的学处,换上洁净的上衣,手里拿着香、花等供物,一心朝向佛、朝向法、朝向僧,心意归向、倾向、投向那边。他们从南门出城,前往祇园。他看见这些人,就问一个人:“他们要去哪里?”那人说:“贤者,您不知道吗?世间已经出现了佛、法、僧这三样珍宝。这些大众都是要去导师面前听法的。”一听到“佛”这个字,这话就像穿透皮肤、肌肉,一直触到骨髓一样,他整个人愣在那里。他在随从的簇拥下,跟那群人一起去了精舍,站在听导师用甜美声音说法的大众边上。听完法后,他生起了出家的心。这时如来知道时机到了,就遣散了大众。他走到导师面前,顶礼之后,邀请世尊第二天接受供养。第二天,他搭好棚子,铺好座位,对以佛陀为首的僧团做了盛大的布施。吃完早饭后,他决意持守布萨日的学处,叫来管家,把情况一一交代清楚:“这些财物已经布施出去了,这些财物还没有布施出去。”他把所有财产都交托出去,说:“这些财产都给我弟弟。”然后在导师面前出家,以业处为依止。巴利
Tena ca samayena sāvatthivāsino bhuttapātarāsā uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya suddhuttarāsaṅgā gandhapupphādihatthā yena buddho, yena dhammo, yena saṅgho, tanninnā tappoṇā tappabbhārā hutvā, dakkhiṇadvārena nikkhamitvā jetavanaṃ gacchanti. So te disvā ‘‘kahaṃ ime gacchantī’’ti ekaṃ manussaṃ pucchi. Kiṃ tvaṃ, ayyo, na jānāsi? Loke buddhadhammasaṅgharatanāni nāma uppannāni, icceso mahājano satthu santikaṃ dhammakathaṃ sotuṃ gacchatīti. Tassa ‘‘buddho’’ti vacanaṃ chavicammādīni chinditvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsi. So attano parijanaparivuto tāya parisāya saddhiṃ vihāraṃ gantvā, satthu madhurassarena dhammaṃ desentassa parisapariyante ṭhito, dhammaṃ sutvā pabbajjāya cittaṃ uppādesi. Atha tathāgatena kālaṃ viditvā parisāya uyyojitāya satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā, vanditvā, svātanāya nimantetvā, dutiyadivase maṇḍapaṃ kāretvā, āsanāni paññāpetvā, buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvā, bhuttapātarāso uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya bhaṇḍāgārikaṃ pakkosāpetvā, ‘‘ettakaṃ dhanaṃ vissajjitaṃ, ettakaṃ dhanaṃ na vissajjita’’nti sabbaṃ ācikkhitvā, ‘‘imaṃ sāpateyyaṃ mayhaṃ kaniṭṭhassa dehī’’ti sabbaṃ niyyātetvā, satthu santike pabbajitvā, kammaṭṭhānaparāyaṇo ahosi.
那时,他作意业处时,业处却无法显现。于是他心想:“这个地方对我并不合适,不如我到导师面前领受业处,然后回到自己的国家去。”于是,他在上午进城托钵,傍晚从独处禅修中起来后,前往世尊那里,请世尊为他讲说业处,发出七声狮子吼之后,便离开了。因此经中说:“那时,具寿富楼那……居住。”巴利
Athassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ na upaṭṭhāti. Tato cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ janapado mayhaṃ asappāyo, yaṃnūnāhaṃ satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sakaraṭṭhameva gaccheyya’’nti. Atha pubbaṇhasamaye piṇḍāya caritvā, sāyanhe paṭisallānā vuṭṭhahitvā, bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā, kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathāpetvā, satta sīhanāde naditvā, pakkāmi. Tena vuttaṃ, ‘‘atha kho āyasmā puṇṇo…pe… viharatī’’ti.
那么,他住在哪里呢?他住在四个地方。首先,他进入苏那巴兰答地区国,到了一个叫阿布哈塔山的地方,就进商人村去乞食。那时,他的弟弟认出了他,供养了食物,然后请求说:“尊者,请不要去别处,就住在这里吧。”让他答应之后,就安排他住在那里。巴利
Kattha panāyaṃ vihāsīti? Catūsu ṭhānesu vihāsi. Sunāparantaraṭṭhaṃ tāva pavisitvā ca abbuhatthapabbataṃ nāma patvā vāṇijagāmaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Atha naṃ kaniṭṭhabhātā sañjānitvā bhikkhaṃ datvā, ‘‘bhante, aññattha agantvā idheva vasathā’’ti paṭiññaṃ kāretvā tattheva vasāpesi.
之后,他去了一个叫海山寺的地方。那里有一条用磁石围成的经行道,没有人能在上面行走。海浪涌过来,打在磁石上,发出巨大的声响。长老心想:“愿这里成为修习业处的人安住舒适的地方。”于是决意让大海安静下来。巴利
Tato samuddagirivihāraṃ nāma agamāsi. Tattha ayakantapāsāṇehi paricchinditvā katacaṅkamo atthi, koci taṃ caṅkamituṃ samattho nāma natthi. Tattha samuddavīciyo āgantvā ayakantapāsāṇesu paharitvā mahāsaddaṃ karonti. Thero ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontānaṃ phāsuvihāro hotū’’ti samuddaṃ nissaddaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhāsi.
之后,他去了一个叫“舅父山”的地方。那里也是鸟群聚集,日夜不停地叫,声音连成一片。长老觉得“这个地方住着不舒服”,就又去了一个叫“花苞园寺”的寺院。那里离商人村不太远也不太近,来往方便,僻静而少喧闹。长老觉得“这个地方住着舒服”,就在那里安排了夜间住处、白天住处和经行道等,然后入雨安居。就这样,他在四个地方住过。巴利
Tato mātulagiriṃ nāma agamāsi. Tatthapi sakuṇasaṅgho ussanno rattiñca divā ca saddo ekābaddhova ahosi. Thero ‘‘idaṃ ṭhānaṃ na phāsuka’’nti tato makulakārāmavihāraṃ nāma gato. So vāṇijagāmassa nātidūro naccāsanno gamanāgamanasampanno vivitto appasaddo. Thero ‘‘imaṃ ṭhānaṃ phāsuka’’nti tattha rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānacaṅkamanādīni kāretvā vassaṃ upagacchi. Evaṃ catūsu ṭhānesu vihāsi.
有一天,就在那个雨安居期间,五百个商人想着“我们要去海外”,把货物装上了船。登船那天,长老的弟弟先供养了长老,又在长老面前受了学处,顶礼之后说:“尊者,大海实在不可信赖,一路上危险重重,请您惦记着我们。”说完就上了船。船以极快的速度行驶,到了一座小岛。人们说:“我们吃早饭吧。”就上了那座岛。可那座岛上别的什么都没有,只有一片栴檀林。巴利
Athekadivasaṃ tasmiṃyeva antovasse pañca vāṇijasatāni ‘‘parasamuddaṃ gacchāmā’’ti nāvāya bhaṇḍaṃ pakkhipiṃsu. Nāvārohanadivase therassa kaniṭṭhabhātā theraṃ bhojetvā, therassa santike sikkhāpadāni gahetvā, vanditvā, ‘‘bhante, samuddo nāma asaddheyyo anekantarāyo, amhe āvajjeyyāthā’’ti vatvā nāvaṃ āruhi. Nāvā uttamajavena gacchamānā aññataraṃ dīpakaṃ pāpuṇi. Manussā ‘‘pātarāsaṃ karissāmā’’ti dīpake uttiṇṇā. Tasmiṃ pana dīpake aññaṃ kiñci natthi, candanavanameva ahosi.
那时,有一个人用斧头砍了砍树,认出这是红栴檀,就说:“贤者们,我们是为了求财才去远洋的,再也没有比这更大的收获了——四指宽的一小段就值十万。我们把该扔的货物扔掉,装满栴檀吧。”他们就照做了。住在栴檀林里的非人很生气,心想:“这些人毁了我们的栴檀林,我们把他们杀了吧。”但又想:“如果在这里杀掉他们,会留下一堆尸体,不如让他们的船在大海中间沉掉。”于是,商人们上了船,刚开出去一会儿,非人就掀起了灾变,还现出各种恐怖的形象。商人们吓坏了,各自向自己信奉的神明礼拜祈求。长老的弟弟小富楼那居士心里念着“愿我哥哥做我的依靠”,一边向长老礼敬,一边站在那里。巴利
Atheko vāsiyā rukkhaṃ ākoṭetvā lohitacandanabhāvaṃ ñatvā āha – ‘‘bho, mayaṃ lābhatthāya parasamuddaṃ gacchāma, ito ca uttari lābho nāma natthi, caturaṅgulamattā ghaṭikā satasahassaṃ agghati. Hāretabbayuttakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ hāretvā candanassa pūressāmā’’ti te tathā kariṃsu . Candanavane adhivatthā amanussā kujjhitvā, ‘‘imehi amhākaṃ candanavanaṃ nāsitaṃ ghātessāma ne’’ti cintetvā – ‘‘idheva ghātitesu sabbaṃ ekakuṇapaṃ bhavissati, samuddamajjhe nesaṃ nāvaṃ osīdessāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Atha nesaṃ nāvaṃ āruyha muhuttaṃ gatakāleyeva uppātikaṃ uṭṭhapetvā sayampi te amanussā bhayānakāni rūpāni dassayiṃsu. Bhītā manussā attano attano devatānaṃ namassanti. Therassa kaniṭṭho cūḷapuṇṇakuṭumbiko ‘‘mayhaṃ bhātā avassayo hotū’’ti therassa namassamāno aṭṭhāsi.
据说长老就在那一刹那作意,知道他们遭遇了灾祸,便腾空而起,面对他们站立。那些非人一看见长老,就说“富楼那长老来了”,随即退去,灾祸也平息了。长老安慰他们说“别害怕”,然后问:“你们想去哪里?”他们回答:“尊者,我们只想回自己的家乡。”长老踏上船板,决意:“让这船开往他们想去的地方。”商人们回到家乡后,把这件事告诉了妻子儿女,又说:“来吧,我们皈依长老。”于是五百个商人连同五百个妻子一起皈依了三宝,并表明自己成为近事男、近事女。之后他们把船上的货物卸下来,分出一份给长老,说:“尊者,这是您的一份。”长老说:“我不需要单独的一份。不过,你们见过世尊吗?”他们回答:“没见过,尊者。”长老说:“那么,就用这一份为世尊建一座圆堂吧。这样你们就能见到世尊了。”他们说:“好的,尊者。”便用那一份财物,再加上各自拿出的份额,开始动手建造圆堂。巴利
Theropi kira tasmiṃyeva khaṇe āvajjetvā, tesaṃ byasanuppattiṃ ñatvā, vehāsaṃ uppatitvā, abhimukho aṭṭhāsi. Amanussā theraṃ disvāva ‘‘ayyo puṇṇatthero etī’’ti apakkamiṃsu, uppātikaṃ sannisīdi. Thero ‘‘mā bhāyathā’’ti te assāsetvā ‘‘kahaṃ gantukāmatthā’’ti pucchi. Bhante, amhākaṃ sakaṭṭhānameva gacchāmāti. Thero nāvaṅgaṇe akkamitvā ‘‘etesaṃ icchitaṭṭhānaṃ gacchatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Vāṇijā sakaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā, taṃ pavattiṃ puttadārassa ārocetvā, ‘‘etha theraṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmā’’ti pañcasatāpi attano pañcahi mātugāmasatehi saddhiṃ tīsu saraṇesu patiṭṭhāya upāsakattaṃ paṭivedesuṃ. Tato nāvāya bhaṇḍaṃ otāretvā therassa ekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā, ‘‘ayaṃ, bhante, tumhākaṃ koṭṭhāso’’ti āhaṃsu. Thero mayhaṃ visuṃ koṭṭhāsakiccaṃ natthi. Satthā pana tumhehi diṭṭhapubboti. Na diṭṭhapubbo, bhanteti. Tena hi iminā satthu maṇḍalamāḷaṃ karotha. Evaṃ satthāraṃ passissathāti. Te sādhu, bhanteti. Tena ca koṭṭhāsena attano ca koṭṭhāsehi maṇḍalamāḷaṃ kātuṃ ārabhiṃsu.
据说世尊从圆堂动工那时起,就已经开始享用它了。夜里巡逻的人看见光亮,心里想:“这里有大威力的天神。”近事男们把圆堂和比丘僧团的住处建好,备齐了布施的物资,就向长老报告:“尊者,我们该做的事都做完了,请您去邀请世尊吧。”长老在傍晚时分以神通力去到舍卫城,向世尊请求:“世尊,商人村的居民很想见到您,请您慈悯他们。”世尊默然答应了。长老就回到了自己原来的住处。巴利
Satthāpi kira taṃ āraddhakālato paṭṭhāya paribhogaṃ akāsi. Ārakkhamanussā rattiṃ obhāsaṃ disvā, ‘‘mahesakkhā devatā atthī’’ti saññaṃ kariṃsu. Upāsakā maṇḍalamāḷañca bhikkhusaṅghassa ca senāsanāni niṭṭhāpetvā dānasambhāraṃ sajjetvā, ‘‘kataṃ, bhante, amhehi attano kiccaṃ, satthāraṃ pakkosathā’’ti therassa ārocesuṃ. Thero sāyanhasamaye iddhiyā sāvatthiṃ gantvā, ‘‘bhante, vāṇijagāmavāsino tumhe daṭṭhukāmā , tesaṃ anukampaṃ karothā’’ti bhagavantaṃ yāci. Bhagavā adhivāsesi. Thero sakaṭṭhānameva paccāgato.
世尊也吩咐阿难长老:“阿难,明天我们到苏那巴兰答的商人村去乞食,你给四百九十九位比丘分发筹。”长老说:“善哉,尊者。”他把这件事告诉了比丘僧团,然后说:“能在空中行走的比丘请取筹。”那天,军头丹长老第一个取了筹。商人村的居民听说“明天导师要来”,就在村子中间搭起棚子,准备好了布施的场所。世尊清晨料理好身体,进入香室,入果定而坐。帝释天的黄色毛毯石座变热了。他心想“这是怎么回事”,观察之后,看到世尊要去苏那巴兰答,便召来毗首羯磨,说:“孩子,今天世尊要走大约三千由旬去乞食。你化出五百座尖顶屋,安置在祇园门楼上,准备好出行的事。”毗首羯磨就照办了。世尊的尖顶屋有四个门,两位上首弟子的各有两个门,其余的各有一个门。世尊从香室出来,进入那些按次序安放的尖顶屋中最前面的那座尖顶屋。以两位上首弟子为首,四百九十九位比丘也都进入了尖顶屋。有一座尖顶屋空着。五百座尖顶屋升到了空中。巴利
Bhagavāpi ānandattheraṃ āmantesi, ‘‘ānanda, sve sunāparante vāṇijagāme piṇḍāya carissāma, tvaṃ ekūnapañcasatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ salākaṃ dehī’’ti. Thero ‘‘sādhu, bhante’’ti bhikkhusaṅghassa tamatthaṃ ārocetvā, ‘‘ākāsacārī bhikkhū salākaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti āha. Taṃdivasaṃ kuṇḍadhānatthero paṭhamaṃ salākaṃ aggahesi. Vāṇijagāmavāsinopi ‘‘sve kira satthā āgamissatī’’ti gāmamajjhe maṇḍapaṃ katvā dānaggaṃ sajjayiṃsu. Bhagavā pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā, gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā, phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā, nisīdi. Sakkassa paṇḍukambalasilāsanaṃ uṇhaṃ ahosi. So ‘‘kiṃ ida’’nti āvajjetvā satthu sunāparantagamanaṃ disvā, vissakammaṃ āmantesi, ‘‘tāta, ajja bhagavā tiṃsamattāni yojanasatāni piṇḍacāraṃ gamissati. Pañca kūṭāgārasatāni māpetvā jetavanadvārakoṭṭhakamatthake gamanasajjāni katvā ṭhapehī’’ti. So tathā akāsi. Bhagavato kūṭāgāraṃ catumukhaṃ ahosi, dvinnaṃ aggasāvakānaṃ dvimukhāni, sesāni ekamukhāni, satthā gandhakuṭito nikkhamitvā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitakūṭāgāresu dhurakūṭāgāraṃ pāvisi. Dve aggasāvake ādiṃ katvā ekūnapañcabhikkhusatānipi kūṭāgāragatāni ahesuṃ. Ekaṃ tucchaṃ kūṭāgāraṃ ahosi, pañcapi kūṭāgārasatāni ākāse uppattiṃsu.
导师到了名叫真实缚山的地方,把尖顶屋安置在空中。那座山上住着一个叫真实缚的邪见苦行者,他教导大众接受邪见,获得了利养和名声。但他内心里,就像瓶中的灯焰一样,阿罗汉果的亲依止缘正在燃烧。导师看到后,心想“我要为他说法”,就前去说法。开示结束时,苦行者证得了阿罗汉果,神通也随着道而生起。他成为善来比丘,拿着神通所化的钵和衣,进入了那间空着的尖顶屋。巴利
Satthā saccabandhapabbataṃ nāma patvā kūṭāgāraṃ ākāse ṭhapesi. Tasmiṃ pabbate saccabandho nāma micchādiṭṭhikatāpaso mahājanaṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ uggaṇhāpento lābhaggayasaggappatto hutvā vasati, abbhantare cassa antocāṭiyaṃ padīpo viya arahattaphalassa upanissayo jalati. Taṃ disvā ‘‘dhammamassa kathessāmī’’ti gantvā dhammaṃ desesi. Tāpaso desanāpariyosāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Maggenevassa abhiññā āgatā. So ehibhikkhu hutvā iddhimayapattacīvaradharo tucchakūṭāgāraṃ pāvisi.
世尊和住在尖顶屋里的五百位比丘一起前往商人村。他让那些尖顶屋隐没不见,然后进入商人村。商人们向以佛陀为首的僧团作了盛大的布施,之后把导师请到摩古拉园。导师走进圆堂。大众趁着导师还在消化食物、缓解饭后的困倦,各自吃完早餐,受持布萨戒,带着许多香和花,为了听法回到园中。导师宣说了法。大众从束缚中解脱出来,于是响起了巨大的赞叹佛陀的喧哗声。巴利
Bhagavā kūṭāgāragatehi pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ vāṇijagāmaṃ gantvā, kūṭāgārāni adissamānakāni katvā, vāṇijagāmaṃ pāvisi. Vāṇijā buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvā satthāraṃ makulakārāmaṃ nayiṃsu. Satthā maṇḍalamāḷaṃ pāvisi. Mahājano yāva satthā bhattadarathaṃ paṭippassambheti, tāva pātarāsaṃ katvā uposathaṅgāni samādāya bahuṃ gandhañca pupphañca ādāya dhammassavanatthāya ārāmaṃ paccāgamāsi. Satthā dhammaṃ desesi. Mahājanassa bandhanamokkho jāto, mahantaṃ buddhakolāhalaṃ ahosi.
导师为了摄受大众,就在那里住了七天,但黎明仍是在大香室里度过的。七天说法结束时,有八万四千众生通达了法。在那里住满七天后,他到商人村去托钵,然后对满慈长老说“你就住在这里吧”,让他留下,自己则前往中间一条叫难摩陀的河,到了那河的岸边。龙王难摩陀前来迎接导师,把导师请进龙宫,对三宝作了供养。导师为他说法后,从龙宫出来。龙王请求说:“尊者,请给我一个可以供养的对象。”世尊便在难摩陀河畔示现了一个足印塔。波浪涌来时,它被淹没;波浪退去时,它又显现。它得到了盛大的供养。导师从那里离开,到了真实缚山,对真实缚说:“你曾把许多人引入邪道。你就住在这里,让他们舍弃那些见解,把他们安立在涅槃之道上。”他也请求了一个可以供养的对象。世尊在坚硬的石板上,像在湿泥团上按印一样,示现了一个足印塔。然后他就回到了祇园。正是针对这件事,才说“就在那个雨安居期间”等等。巴利
Satthā mahājanassa saṅgahatthāya sattāhaṃ tattheva vasi, aruṇaṃ pana mahāgandhakuṭiyaṃyeva uṭṭhapesi. Sattāhampi dhammadesanāpariyosāne caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Tattha sattāhaṃ vasitvā, vāṇijagāme piṇḍāya caritvā, ‘‘tvaṃ idheva vasāhī’’ti puṇṇattheraṃ nivattetvā antare nammadānadī nāma atthi, tassā tīraṃ agamāsi. Nammadā nāgarājā satthu paccuggamanaṃ katvā, nāgabhavanaṃ pavesetvā, tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ sakkāraṃ akāsi. Satthā tassa dhammaṃ kathetvā nāgabhavanā nikkhami. So ‘‘mayhaṃ, bhante, paricaritabbaṃ dethā’’ti yāci. Bhagavā nammadānadītīre padacetiyaṃ dassesi. Taṃ vīcīsu āgatāsu pidhīyati, gatāsu vivarīyati. Mahāsakkārapattaṃ ahosi. Satthā tato nikkhamitvā saccabandhapabbataṃ gantvā saccabandhaṃ āha – ‘‘tayā mahājano apāyamagge otārito. Tvaṃ idheva vasitvā, etesaṃ laddhiṃ vissajjāpetvā, nibbānamagge patiṭṭhāpehī’’ti. Sopi paricaritabbaṃ yāci. Satthā ghanapiṭṭhipāsāṇe allamattikapiṇḍamhi lañchanaṃ viya padacetiyaṃ dassesi. Tato jetavanameva gato. Etamatthaṃ sandhāya teneva antaravassenātiādi vuttaṃ.
般涅槃的意思是:他以无余涅槃界而般涅槃。大众为长老的遗体做了七天的供养,聚集了许多香木,火化遗体后,收取舍利,建起了塔庙。众多比丘,指的是站在长老火葬处的比丘们。其余部分在各处都浅显易懂。第六品也浅显易懂。巴利
Parinibbāyīti anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi. Mahājano therassa satta divasāni sarīrapūjaṃ katvā, bahūni gandhakaṭṭhāni samodhānetvā, sarīraṃ jhāpetvā dhātuyo ādāya cetiyaṃ akāsi. Sambahulā bhikkhūti therassa āḷāhanaṭṭhāne ṭhitabhikkhū. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānameva.
第7-8节的注释:第一贪爱经等巴利
7-8. Paṭhamaejāsuttādivaṇṇanā
90-91 90-91. 在第七首偈颂中,“动”指的是渴爱。因为它有动摇的性质,所以称为“动”。这同一个东西,因为有恼害的性质,所以是病;因为有内在败坏的性质,所以是疮;因为有切割的性质,所以是箭。因此——因为这“动”既是病,又是疮,也是箭,所以说“因此”。“不应妄想眼”等句,解释方式如前所述,这里也只是把前面已经讲过的内容全部汇集起来一并说明。第八首偈颂也采用同样的解释方式。巴利
90-91. Sattame ejāti taṇhā. Sā hi calanaṭṭhena ejāti vuccati. Sāva ābādhanaṭṭhena rogo, anto dussanaṭṭhena gaṇḍo, nikantanaṭṭhena sallaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā ejā rogo ceva gaṇḍo ca sallañca, tasmā. Cakkhuṃ na maññeyyātiādi vuttanayameva, idhāpi sabbaṃ heṭṭhā gahitameva saṃkaḍḍhitvā dassitaṃ. Aṭṭhamaṃ vuttanayameva.
第9至10经:第一双经等的注释巴利
9-10. Paṭhamadvayasuttādivaṇṇanā
92-93 第九:“二”是指两个两个的部分。第十:“此即是二”意思是,这就是那两样。“动摇且不安”:因为依自己的本性无法安住,所以既动摇又不安。“所谓因、所谓缘”:眼识的依处和所缘,既是因也是缘。“怎么会是常呢?”:凭什么理由会是常呢?就像女奴所生的儿子生来就是奴隶,意思是必定是无常。“俱行”:一起运作。“集会”:一起聚集。“合会”:一起会合。这称为眼触:它是由这些名为俱行、集会、合会的缘而生起的,所以就用缘的名称——俱行、集会、合会来称呼它,即此称为眼触。巴利
92-93. Navame dvayanti dve dve koṭṭhāse. Dasame itthetaṃ dvayanti evametaṃ dvayaṃ. Calañceva byathañcāti attano sabhāvena asaṇṭhahanato calati ceva byathati ca. Yopi hetu yopi paccayoti cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthārammaṇaṃ hetu ceva paccayo ca. Kuto niccaṃ bhavissatīti kena kāraṇena niccaṃ bhavissati. Yathā pana dāsassa dāsiyā kucchismiṃ jāto putto parova dāso hoti, evaṃ aniccameva hotīti attho. Saṅgatīti sahagati. Sannipātoti ekato sannipatanaṃ. Samavāyoti ekato samāgamo. Ayaṃ vuccati cakkhusamphassoti iminā saṅgatisannipātasamavāyasaṅkhātena paccayena uppannattā paccayanāmeneva saṅgati sannipāto samavāyoti ayaṃ vuccati cakkhusamphasso.
它也有因:触的所依处、所缘,以及俱生的三蕴,这就是因。“触了”:这里用的是受格意义而作主格,意思是,被触所触的所缘境,受在感受,思在造作,想在识别。“触了”也可以指具有触的人,也就是说,被触触及所缘后,再由受等去感受、造作、识别。这样,在这部经里就说了三十种蕴。怎么算呢?先说眼门:所依处和所缘是色蕴;“触了在感受”是受蕴;“在造作”是行蕴;“在识别”是想蕴;“在了别”是识蕴。其余各门也是这样。在意门,所依的色必定是色蕴;如果所缘是色,所缘也是色蕴。这样就有六组五蕴,共三十种。简略地说,这六门中其实只有五蕴;当以“有缘”的方式详细说明五蕴是无常时,这部经是随顺应当觉悟者的根机意乐而说的。巴利
Sopi hetūti phassassa vatthu ārammaṇaṃ sahajātā tayo khandhāti ayaṃ hetu. Phuṭṭhoti upayogatthe paccattaṃ, phassena phuṭṭhameva gocaraṃ vedanā vedeti, cetanā ceteti, saññā sañjānātīti attho. Phuṭṭhoti vā phassasamaṅgīpuggalo , phassena phuṭṭhārammaṇameva vedanādīhi vedeti ceteti sañjānātītipi vuttaṃ hoti. Iti imasmiṃ sutte samatiṃsakkhandhā kathitā honti. Kathaṃ? Cakkhudvāre tāva vatthu ceva ārammaṇañca rūpakkhandho, phuṭṭho vedetīti vedanākkhandho, cetetīti saṅkhārakkhandho, sañjānātīti saññākkhandho, vijānātīti viññāṇakkhandhoti. Sesadvāresupi eseva nayo. Manodvārepi hi vatthurūpaṃ ekantato rūpakkhandho, rūpe pana ārammaṇe sati ārammaṇampi rūpakkhandhoti cha pañcakātiṃsa honti. Saṅkhepena panete chasupi dvāresu pañceva khandhāti sapaccaye pañcakkhandhe aniccāti vitthāretvā vuccamāne bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayena idaṃ suttaṃ desitanti.
未调伏者与未守护者的注释巴利
1. Adantaaguttavaṇṇanā
94 94. 在《六处品》的第一篇注释里,“未调伏”就是没有调伏。“未守护”就是没有守护。“无护”就是没有被保护。“未抑制”就是没有关闭。“它们带来苦”是指它们会招来地狱等种种极重的苦。“它们带来乐”是指它们会招来禅那、道、果等种种极大的乐。也有写成 adhivahā 的读法,意思是一样的。巴利
94. Saḷavaggassa paṭhame adantāti adamitā. Aguttāti agopitā. Arakkhitāti na rakkhitā. Asaṃvutāti apihitā. Dukkhādhivāhā hontīti nerayikādibhedaṃ adhikadukkhaṃ āvahanakā honti. Sukhādhivāhā hontīti jhānamaggaphalapabhedaṃ adhikasukhaṃ āvahanakā honti. Adhivahātipi pāṭho, esevattho.
“就是这六处”,意思是正好六个。“没有防护的人,就在那里受苦”:是说在那些处上没有防护、缺少约束,就会遭受痛苦。“而他们当中有人懂得了对那些处的防护”:是说他们得到了、证得了对那些处的防护和约束。“安住于无染”:意思是安住于没有染着、没有漏泄的状态。巴利
Saḷevāti cha eva. Asaṃvuto yattha dukkhaṃ nigacchatīti yesu āyatanesu saṃvaravirahito dukkhaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tesañca ye saṃvaraṇaṃ avedisunti ye tesaṃ āyatanānaṃ saṃvaraṃ vindiṃsu paṭilabhiṃsu. Viharantānavassutāti viharanti anavassutā atintā.
已经尝到过滋味、觉得甜美的,就是有滋味而且甘甜的。对于乐触和苦触这两种触,应当保持舍心;意思是说,在这里应当生起舍。或者另一种读法是“对乐苦两种触保持舍”,也就是由触所生的苦乐都应以舍对待;对乐不贪恋,对苦不抗拒,成为具有舍心的人。对任何人不偏袒也不对抗,就是跟任何人都不亲近也不敌对。巴利
Asāditañca sādunti assādavantañca madhurañca. Phassadvayaṃ sukhadukkhe upekkheti sukhaphassañca dukkhaphassañcāti idaṃ phassadvayaṃ upekkhe, upekkhāmevettha uppādeyyāti attho. Phassadvayaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ upekkhoti vā pāṭho, phassahetukaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ upekkho, sukhe anurodhaṃ dukkhe ca virodhaṃ anuppādento upekkhako bhaveyyātipi attho. Anānuruddhoaviruddho kenacīti kenaci saddhiṃ neva anuruddho na viruddho bhaveyya.
被称为“戏论想”,是因为它成了烦恼想。那些低劣的众生——凡夫们——不断戏论、执取,就这样在戏论中流转于轮回。有想者,就是具有想的众生。一切依于家的意所作,就是指完全依止于五欲之家、由心意所造的一切寻思。驱除,就是去除、舍弃之后。安住于出离之行,就是说一位坚定的比丘,以出离之行而安住、而行。巴利
Papañcasaññāti kilesasaññāya papañcasaññā nāma hutvā. Itarītarā narāti lāmakasattā papañcayantā upayantīti papañcayamānā vaṭṭaṃ upagacchanti. Saññinoti sasaññā sattā. Manomayaṃ gehasitañca sabbanti sabbameva pañcakāmaguṇagehanissitaṃ manomayaṃ vitakkaṃ. Panujjāti panuditvā nīharitvā. Nekkhammasitaṃ irīyatīti dabbajātiko bhikkhu nekkhammasitaṃ iriyena irīyati.
在六种所缘上,当它被真正修习好时,被乐触或苦触所接触者的心,对任何境都不动摇、不颤抖。你们应当成为超越生死的彼岸者,也就是到达生死彼岸——涅槃的人。巴利
Chassu yadāsubhāvitoti chasu ārammaṇesu yadā suṭṭhu bhāvito. Phuṭṭhassa cittaṃ na vikampatekvacīti sukhaphassena vā dukkhaphassena vā phuṭṭhassa kismiñci cittaṃ na kampati na vedhati. Bhavattha jātimaraṇassa pāragāti jātimaraṇānaṃ pāraṃ nibbānaṃ gamakā hotha.
《摩罗迦子经》的注释巴利
2. Mālukyaputtasuttavaṇṇanā
95 95. 在第二部经中,“摩罗迦子”是指摩罗迦婆罗门女的儿子。“于此”是指在你请求教诫的这件事上。世尊借此既贬斥了这位长老,也激励了他。怎么说的呢?据说这位长老年轻时在色等欲境中放逸度日,到了晚年才想住到林野去,于是来求取禅修业处。这时世尊心里想的是:“说到这个,对年轻人还有什么好说的?你们也会像摩罗迦子一样,年轻时放逸,到了晚年才进入林野去修沙门法。”世尊带着这个用意说这番话,就是在贬斥这位长老。巴利
95. Dutiye mālukyaputtoti mālukyabrāhmaṇiyā putto. Etthāti etasmiṃ tava ovādāyācane. Iminā theraṃ apasādetipi ussādetipi. Kathaṃ? Ayaṃ kira daharakāle rūpādīsu pamajjitvā pacchā mahallakakāle araññavāsaṃ patthento kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācati. Atha bhagavā ‘‘ettha dahare kiṃ vakkhāma? Mālukyaputto viya tumhepi taruṇakāle pamajjitvā mahallakakāle araññaṃ pavisitvā samaṇadhammaṃ kareyyāthā’’ti iminā adhippāyena bhaṇanto theraṃ apasādeti nāma.
不过,这位长老虽然年纪已经很大,还是想进森林去修沙门法。所以世尊说这番话,用意是在激励他:“在这里,对那些年轻人还有什么好说的呢?我们这位摩罗迦子,年纪都这么大了,还想进森林修沙门法,还来求禅修业处;可你们呢,年纪轻轻却不肯用功。”世尊这样说,就是在策励这位长老。巴利
Yasmā pana thero mahallakakālepi araññaṃ pavisitvā samaṇadhammaṃ kātukāmo, tasmā bhagavā ‘‘ettha dahare kiṃ vakkhāma? Ayaṃ amhākaṃ mālukyaputto mahallakakālepi araññaṃ pavisitvā samaṇadhammaṃ kattukāmo kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācati, tumhe nāma taruṇakālepi vīriyaṃ na karothā’’ti iminā adhippāyena bhaṇanto theraṃ ussādeti nāma.
“真是稀有啊”这句话,说的是“竟然有这样的人”。所谓“我虽然已经老了”,意思是“虽然我知道自己已经年迈”。他心里想的是:“如果我年纪大了,就算老了也还能修沙门法,请世尊为我说法。”他就是这样不把年老当成障碍,反而赞叹世尊的教导,于是说了这番话。巴利
Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma. Kiñcāpāhanti kiñcāpi ‘‘ahaṃ mahallako’’ti ñātaṃ. Yadi ahaṃ mahallako, mahallako samānopi sakkhissāmi samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ, desetu me, bhante, bhagavāti adhippāyena mahallakabhāvaṃ anuggaṇhanto ovādañca pasaṃsanto evamāha.
“未见、以前从未见过”:就是在此生没见过,在过去生也从未见过。“你也不见”:是说你现在也看不见。“你也不会生起‘我应当见’这样的想法”:这是在问——你连这样的作意都没有,那么对那个对象,你的欲贪等还会生起吗?巴利
Adiṭṭhā adiṭṭhapubbāti imasmiṃ attabhāve adiṭṭhā atītepi adiṭṭhapubbā. Na ca passasīti etarahipi na passasi. Na ca te hoti passeyyanti evaṃ samannāhāropi te yattha natthi, api nu te tattha chandādayo uppajjeyyunti pucchati.
在所见中只停留在所见:当眼识在色处看到色时,就只是所见而已。因为眼识对诸色,只是看到色本身,并不认知它是常还是无常等本质。因此,对于其余诸识,我也要让心在这里只停留在所见而已,这就是这句话的意思。或者也可以说,在所见中的“见”就是指眼识,意思是在诸色中认知色。mattā 是量度、标准的意思;所见成为量度,就是“所见而已”,这里指心,意思是我的心只以眼识为量度。这里说的是:就像眼识面对出现在眼前的色时,不贪、不瞋、不迷,同样,我要让速行心也远离贪等烦恼,只以眼识为量度,也就是说,我要把速行心安立在眼识的标准之内。或者也可以说,“所见”是指由眼识所看到的色;在所见中只停留在所见,是指就在那里生起的领受、推度、确定这三种心。就像它们不贪、不瞋、不迷那样,对于出现在眼前的色,我也要以同样的领受等为标准来生起速行心,不会让它在超出这个标准之后以贪染等方式生起。这就是这里的意思。对所闻、所觉也应同样理解。巴利
Diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattanti rūpāyatane cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissati. Cakkhuviññāṇañhi rūpe rūpamattameva passati, na niccādisabhāvaṃ, iti sesaviññāṇehipi me ettha diṭṭhamattameva cittaṃ bhavissatīti attho. Atha vā diṭṭhe diṭṭhaṃ nāma cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, rūpe rūpavijānananti attho. Mattāti pamāṇaṃ, diṭṭhaṃ mattā assāti diṭṭhamattaṃ, cittaṃ, cakkhuviññāṇamattameva me cittaṃ bhavissatīti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā āpāthagatarūpe cakkhuviññāṇaṃ na rajjati na dussati na muyhati, evaṃ rāgādivirahena cakkhuviññāṇamattameva javanaṃ bhavissati, cakkhuviññāṇapamāṇeneva javanaṃ ṭhapessāmīti. Atha vā diṭṭhaṃ nāma cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭharūpaṃ, diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ nāma tattheva uppannaṃ sampaṭicchanasantīraṇavoṭṭhabbanasaṅkhātaṃ cittattayaṃ. Yathā taṃ na rajjati, na dussati, na muyhati, evaṃ āpāthagate rūpe teneva sampaṭicchanādippamāṇena javanaṃ uppādessāmi, nāhaṃ taṃ pamāṇaṃ atikkamitvā rajjanādivasena uppajjituṃ dassāmīti ayamettha attho. Eseva nayo sutamutesu.
在“于所知处,唯是所知”这一句里,所谓“所知”,指的是被意门转向心所识知的所缘。对于那个所知,说“于所知处,唯是所知”,就是以转向心为衡量标准。就像转向心对所缘不生贪、不生瞋、不迷失一样,我也不让心以贪染等方式生起,而只把心安立在转向心的衡量标准上。这就是这里的含义。巴利
Viññāte viññātamattanti ettha pana viññātaṃ nāma manodvārāvajjanena viññātārammaṇaṃ, tasmiṃ viññāte viññātamattanti āvajjanapamāṇaṃ. Yathā āvajjanena na rajjati na dussati na muyhati, evaṃ rajjanādivasena uppajjituṃ adatvā āvajjanapamāṇeneva cittaṃ ṭhapessāmīti ayamettha attho.
“Yato”是指“当……的时候”,“tato”是指“那时”。“Na tena”是说:不会因为那份贪而染着,不会因为那份嗔而恼怒,也不会因为那份痴而昏昧。“Tato tvaṃ, mālukyaputta, na tattha”的意思是:摩罗迦子,当你不会因为那份贪、嗔、痴而染着、恼怒或昏昧时,那时你就不会在所见、所闻、所觉、所知的那些对象上被系缚、黏附、安住。至于“Nevidha……”等句,含义如前所说。巴利
Yatoti yadā. Tatoti tadā. Na tenāti tena rāgena vā ratto, dosena vā duṭṭho, mohena vā mūḷho na bhavissati. Tato tvaṃ mālukyaputta na tatthāti yadā tvaṃ tena rāgena vā dosamohehi vā ratto vā duṭṭho vā mūḷho vā na bhavissasi, tadā tvaṃ na tattha tasmiṃ diṭṭhe vā sutamutaviññāte vā paṭibaddho allīno patiṭṭhito nāma bhavissasi. Nevidhātiādi vuttatthameva.
正念忘失了,就是说正念消失了。而“执取那个”是指把那个所缘吞下去、紧紧抓住。“贪欲与烦扰”则是指贪欲和恼害。或者,也可以和“对他增长”这一句连在一起理解:贪欲和烦扰这两种法,会在他身上不断增长。巴利
Sati muṭṭhāti sati naṭṭhā. Tañca ajjhosāti taṃ ārammaṇaṃ gilitvā. Abhijjhā ca vihesā cāti abhijjhāya ca vihiṃsāya ca. Atha vā ‘‘tassa vaḍḍhantī’’ti padenāpi saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ, abhijjhā ca vihesā cāti imepi dve dhammā tassa vaḍḍhantīti attho.
他的心被贪欲和害意所恼害。“不断积集”指的是正在积集的人。对这样的人,涅槃可以说离他非常遥远。“嗅后”就是闻过之后。“食后”就是吃过、尝过、舔过之后。“触后”就是碰过之后。“具念”是指具备称为正念的念。“体验”是指体验与四道相应、生起的出世间感受。“被灭尽”就是走向灭尽。灭尽的是什么?是痛苦,也是烦恼这一类东西。“某一位”是指八十位大弟子当中的一位。就这样,在这部经里,也以偈阐述了轮回与解脱。巴利
Cittamassūpahaññatīti abhijjhāvihesāhi assa cittaṃ upahaññati. Ācinatoti ācinantassa. Ārā nibbāna vuccatīti evarūpassa puggalassa nibbānaṃ nāma dūre pavuccati. Ghatvāti ghāyitvā. Bhotvāti bhutvā sāyitvā lehitvā. Phussāti phusitvā. Paṭissatoti paṭissatisaṅkhātāya satiyā yutto. Sevato cāpi vedananti catumaggasampayuttaṃ nibbattitalokuttaravedanaṃ sevantassa. Khīyatīti khayaṃ gacchati. Kiṃ taṃ? Dukkhampi kilesajātampi. Aññataroti asītiyā mahāsāvakānaṃ abbhantaro eko. Iti imasmiṃ sutte gāthāhipi vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.
3. 《退失法经》的注释巴利
3. Parihānadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
96 96. 在第三退失法方面,“退失法”指具有退失的性质。“胜处”指已被征服的处所。“有念之思”中,“有念”意为忆念,也就是追逐不舍的意思。这些既是念又是思,所以叫“有念之思”。“应被结缚”指能系缚、是系缚的因缘。“如果比丘”指对如此生起的烦恼,或对那样的所缘,采取“忍受”的态度,即把它放进心里并安住其中;“不舍断”指不以断除欲贪的方式来断除它。这一段应当套用到所有相关的句子上。“这是世尊所说的胜处”,意思是:这是佛陀——世尊——所说的已被征服的处所。在这里,先提出法的问题,再由解析的人阐明这个法义。巴利
96. Tatiye parihānadhammanti parihānasabhāvaṃ. Abhibhāyatanānīti abhibhavitāni āyatanāni. Sarasaṅkappāti ettha sarantīti sarā, dhāvantīti attho. Sarā ca te saṅkappā ca sarasaṅkappā. Saṃyojaniyāti bandhaniyā bandhanassa paccayabhūtā. Tañce bhikkhūti taṃ evaṃ uppannaṃ kilesajātaṃ, taṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ. Adhivāsetīti citte āropetvā vāseti. Nappajahatīti chandarāgappahānena na pajahati. Evaṃ sabbapadehi yojetabbaṃ. Abhibhāyatanañhetaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatāti etaṃ buddhena bhagavatā abhibhavitaṃ āyatananti kathitaṃ. Idha dhammaṃ pucchitvā vibhajantena puggalena dhammo dassito.
第4经 放逸住者经的注释巴利
4. Pamādavihārīsuttavaṇṇanā
97 97. 在第四经中,“asaṃvuta”(未防护)的意思是:没有遮盖、没有关闭、没有覆盖地放着。“Byāsiñcati”(流散)就是 viāsiñcati,也就是被烦恼浸透而运作。“Pāmojja”(喜悦)指微弱的喜。“Pīti”(喜)指强烈的喜。“Passaddhi”(轻安)指内心躁动的平息。“Dhammā na pātubhavanti”(诸法不显现)是指止与观之法不生起。在这部经里,先问及补特伽罗,然后以分别之法开示补特伽罗。巴利
97. Catutthe asaṃvutassāti apihitassa na pidahitvā sañchāditvā ṭhapitassa. Byāsiñcatīti viāsiñcati, kilesatintaṃ hutvā vattati. Pāmojjanti dubbalapīti. Pītīti balavapīti. Passaddhīti darathapassaddhi. Dhammā na pātubhavantīti samathavipassanādhammā na uppajjanti. Imasmiṃ sutte puggalaṃ pucchitvā vibhajantena dhammena puggalo dassito.
第5经 防护经的注释巴利
5. Saṃvarasuttavaṇṇanā
98 98. 在第五经中,“诸比丘,怎样是无防护”这一句,应当理解为:就像先宣说应舍之路,对熟知道路的人说“你该放开左边,抓住右边”,这并不是按开示的先后次第来说,而是出于说法的善巧,先以说明应断之法的形式来宣说。在这里,问了法之后,就对法本身作了分别。巴利
98. Pañcame kathañca, bhikkhave, asaṃvaroti idaṃ maggakusalassa vāmaṃ muñcitvā dakkhiṇaṃ gaṇheyyāsīti paṭhamaṃ pahātabbamaggakkhānaṃ viya uddesakkamena avatvā desanākusalatāya paṭhamaṃ pahātabbadhammakkhānavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Idha dhammaṃ pucchitvā dhammova vibhatto.
第6经 定经的注释巴利
6. Samādhisuttavaṇṇanā
99 在第六经中,“定”指的是心一境性。这部经是看到这些比丘的心一境性正在退失,知道“如果他们获得心一境性,他们的业处将会增长”之后才说的。巴利
99. Chaṭṭhe samādhinti cittekaggataṃ. Idañhi suttaṃ cittekaggatāya parihāyamāne disvā, ‘‘imesaṃ cittekaggataṃ labhantānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gamissatī’’ti ñatvā kathitaṃ.
第7篇 独处经的注释巴利
7. Paṭisallānasuttavaṇṇanā
100 第七经里说的“独处”,是指身体上的远离。这部经是因为看到有些人在身体远离这方面退失了,知道“如果这些人能得到身体远离,他们的业处就会增长兴盛”,所以才宣说的。巴利
100. Sattame paṭisallānanti kāyavivekaṃ. Idañhi suttaṃ kāyavivekena parihāyamāne disvā, ‘‘imesaṃ kāyavivekaṃ labhantānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gamissatī’’ti ñatvā kathitaṃ.
第8至9经的注释:第一,关于“非你们所有”等经的解说巴利
8-9. Paṭhamanatumhākaṃsuttādivaṇṇanā
101-102 第八经是以譬喻环绕而说的,是为能觉悟的人而说;第九经则是纯粹以清净方式,依能觉悟者的意乐而说。不过,这两处的含义,都应该按照《蕴品》里讲过的方式来理解。巴利
101-102. Aṭṭhamaṃ upamāya parivāretvā kathite bujjhanakānaṃ, navamaṃ suddhikavaseneva bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vuttaṃ. Attho pana ubhayatthāpi khandhiyavagge vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
第10经《水经》的注释巴利
10. Udakasuttavaṇṇanā
103 第十经中,“Udako sudan”这里的“sudan”只是个虚词,“Udako”是他的名字。“Idaṃ jātu vedagū”这里的“idaṃ”也只是个虚词。或者,他这样说,是为了表达“请听我这句话”。“Jātu vedagū”的意思是:我毫无疑问就是极智者,也就是通过被称为“明”的智慧而到达应知之境,或者说已经达到、证得了“明”,意思就是“我是智者”。“Sabbajī”的意思是:他宣称“我毫无疑问已经战胜、克服了一切轮回,而安住”。“Apalikhataṃ gaṇḍamūlaṃ”即未挖断的苦根。“Palikhaṇin”:“已被我挖断”,表明他已挖掘而住。巴利
103. Dasame udako sudanti ettha sudanti nipātamattaṃ. Udakoti tassa nāmaṃ. Idaṃ jātu vedagūti ettha idanti nipātamattaṃ. Atha vā idaṃ mama vacanaṃ suṇāthāti dīpento evamāha. Jātu vedagūti ahaṃ ekaṃseneva vedagū, vedasaṅkhātena ñāṇena neyyesu gato, vedaṃ vā gato adhigato, paṇḍitohamasmīti attho. Sabbajīti ekaṃsena sabbavaṭṭaṃ jinitvā abhibhavitvā ṭhitosmīti vadati. Apalikhataṃ gaṇḍamūlanti apalikhataṃ dukkhamūlaṃ. Palikhaṇinti palikhataṃ mayā, khanitvā ṭhitosmīti dīpeti.
由父母所生:是从母亲和父亲所生的,由父母的精血生成。依靠米饭和粥来滋养增长:是靠米饭和粥来积聚、长大的。是无常、需要涂油、需要按摩、会坏灭、会消散之法:在这里,这个身体——因为存在之后终归消失,所以是无常之法;为了消除臭味等难闻的气味,用细腻的油膏涂抹,所以是需要涂油之法;为了消除身体各肢节的病痛,用轻柔的揉按来按压,所以是需要按摩之法;或者小时候让人躺在腿上,为了矫正因住胎而长得不正的各处肢体,通过拉伸、按压等方式来揉按,也是需要按摩之法。即使这样保养,它仍然是会坏灭、会消散之法,也就是会破碎、会离散。这就是它的本性。巴利
Mātāpettikasambhavassāti mātito ca pitito ca nibbattena mātāpettikena sukkasoṇitena sambhūtassa. Odanakummāsūpacayassāti odanena ceva kummāsena ca upacitassa vaḍḍhitassa. Aniccucchādanaparimaddanabhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammassāti ettha ayaṃ kāyo hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccadhammo , duggandhavighātatthāya tanuvilepanena ucchādanadhammo, aṅgapaccaṅgābādhavinodanatthāya khuddakasambāhanena parimaddanadhammo, daharakāle vā ūrūsu sayāpetvā gabbhavāsena dussaṇṭhitānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ aṅgānaṃ saṇṭhānasampādanatthaṃ añchanapīḷanādīnaṃ vasena parimaddanadhammo, evaṃ pariharitopi ca bhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammo bhijjati ceva vikirati ca, evaṃ sabhāvoti attho.
在这里,用“父母所生”“靠米饭和粥团积长”“需要揉搓”这些词句,说明身体的增长;用“无常”“会坏”“会消散”这些词句,说明身体的衰退。或者也可以说,前三句显示“生起”,后几句显示“灭去”。这样就说明了这四大种所成的身体有增长、衰退、产生和破坏。剩下的内容,意思都很浅显明白。巴利
Tattha mātāpettikasambhavaodanakummāsūpacayaparimaddanapadehi vaḍḍhi kathitā, aniccabhedanaviddhaṃsanapadehi parihāni. Purimehi vā tīhi samudayo, pacchimehi atthaṅgamoti. Evaṃ cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassa vaḍḍhiparihāninibbattibhedā dassitā. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti.
第11品 瑜伽安稳品巴利
11. Yogakkhemivaggo
《离轭安稳经》的注释巴利
1. Yogakkhemisuttavaṇṇanā
104 104. 在《离轭安稳品》的第一经里,“离轭安稳法门”是指从四种轭中解脱出来的因由。“法门”是指法的因由。“宣说了轭”是说讲述了道理。“因此”是为什么呢?是因为宣说了,还是因为断除了?是因为断除。因为仅仅靠宣说,并不能成为离轭安稳的人。巴利
104. Yogakkhemivaggassa paṭhame yogakkhemipariyāyanti catūhi yogehi khemino kāraṇabhūtaṃ. Dhammapariyāyanti dhammakāraṇaṃ. Akkhāsi yoganti yuttiṃ kathesi. Tasmāti kasmā? Kiṃ akkhātattā, udāhu pahīnattāti? Pahīnattā. Na hi akkhānena yogakkhemi nāma hoti.
2-10. 《执取经》等注释巴利
2-10. Upādāyasuttādivaṇṇanā
105-113 在第二部经里讲到了感受的乐与苦,但那是指果报层面的乐与苦。第三部经里说的“苦”,是指轮回的苦。第四部经里说的“世间”,是指行世间。从第五部经开始,如果有需要说明的地方,就按照《蕴品》里已经讲过的方式来处理。巴利
105-113. Dutiye vedanāsukhadukkhaṃ kathitaṃ, taṃ pana vipākasukhadukkhaṃ vaṭṭati. Tatiye dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhassa. Catutthe lokassāti saṅkhāralokassa. Pañcamādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ khandhiyavagge vuttanayameva.
第十二 世间欲乐品巴利
12. Lokakāmaguṇavaggo
第一《魔网经》等注释巴利
1-2. Paṭhamamārapāsasuttādivaṇṇanā
114-115 114-115. 关于世间欲乐品的第一经:“已到住处者”,意思是已经到达了居住的地方。“已落入魔罗掌控者”,意思是落入了三种魔罗的掌控。“魔罗的套索已套在他身上”,意思是魔罗的套索已经套上并伸进了他的脖子。第二经的意思很明白。巴利
114-115. Lokakāmaguṇavaggassa paṭhame āvāsagatoti vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gato. Mārassa vasaṃ gatoti tividhassāpi mārassa vasaṃ gato. Paṭimukka’ssa mārapāsoti assa gīvāya mārapāso paṭimukko pavesito. Dutiyaṃ uttānameva.
3. 《到世界尽头经》的注释巴利
3. Lokantagamanasuttavaṇṇanā
116 在第三经中,“世间”指轮围世间。“世间的边际”指行世间的边际。“进入精舍”:世尊这样想:“我进入精舍后,这些比丘会向阿难问起这个总说,而阿难会用我的全知智与之对照后为他们解说。那时我就称赞他;比丘们听到我的称赞后,会想:‘应当去亲近阿难,应当听他的话、信受他的话。’这会给他们带来长久的利益和安乐。”世尊这样想后,没有把自己简略所说的义理详细分别开来讲,就从座位上消失,出现在香室中。因此经文说“从座起身,进入精舍”。巴利
116. Tatiye lokassāti cakkavāḷalokassa. Lokassa antanti saṅkhāralokassa antaṃ. Vihāraṃ pāvisīti ‘‘mayi vihāraṃ paviṭṭhe ime bhikkhū, imaṃ uddesaṃ ānandaṃ pucchissanti, so ca tesaṃ mama sabbaññutaññāṇena saṃsanditvā kathessati. Tato naṃ thomessāmi, mama thomanaṃ sutvā bhikkhū ānandaṃ upasaṅkamitabbaṃ, vacanañcassa sotabbaṃ saddhātabbaṃ maññissanti, taṃ nesaṃ bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti cintetvā saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvāva nisinnāsane antarahito gandhakuṭiyaṃ pāturahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisī’’ti.
被导师称赞,就是受到导师的赞扬。“由智者”这个词在这里也是表示原因,用的是属格,意思是受到智者和同梵行者的恭敬。“他能”,就是有能力做到。“超越根部、超越树干”:芯材可能在根部,也可能在树干,这里说连那些都超越了。“如是具足者”,就是具备这样成就的人,意思是“像这样的”。“已超越”,就是已经超过。“知晓时即知晓”,是指他只知晓应当知晓的。“看见时即看见”,是指他只看见应当看见的。或者,就像有些人执取颠倒的事物,虽然知道却不知道,虽然看见却没看见,世尊完全不是这样。世尊知道时就是确实知道,看见时就是确实看见。他因为具有展现和引导的作用,所以称为“眼”;因为具有令人了知的作用,所以称为“智”;因为具有不颠倒的本性,或者由于宣说教理法,或者由于他用心思考后、用语言宣说出教法,所以称为“法”;因为具有最胜的意义,所以称为“梵”。或者说,因为他像眼睛一样能看见,所以称为“眼”。这些词句的意义应当这样理解。这位世尊,因为宣说正法,所以是“说者”;因为让正法持续运转,所以是“令转者”;因为他有能力把义理提取出来并反复展示,所以是“义的导出者”;因为他教导为了体证不死的修行方法,所以是“不死的施与者”。巴利
Satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇitoti satthārā ca pasattho. Viññūnanti idampi karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, paṇḍitehi sabrahmacārīhi ca sambhāvitoti attho. Pahotīti sakkoti. Atikkammeva mūlaṃ atikkammeva khandhanti sāro nāma mūle vā khandhe vā bhaveyya, tampi atikkamitvāti attho. Evaṃsampadamidanti evaṃsampattikaṃ, īdisanti attho. Atisitvāti atikkamitvā. Jānaṃ jānātīti jānitabbameva jānāti. Passaṃ passatīti passitabbameva passati. Yathā vā ekacco viparītaṃ gaṇhanto jānantopi na jānāti, passantopi na passati, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana jānanto jānāti, passanto passatiyeva. Svāyaṃ dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhena cakkhubhūto. Viditakaraṇaṭṭhena ñāṇabhūto. Aviparītasabhāvaṭṭhena pariyattidhammapavattanato vā hadayena cintetvā vācāya nicchāritadhammamayoti dhammabhūto. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūto. Atha vā cakkhu viya bhūtoti cakkhubhūto. Evametesu padesu attho veditabbo. Svāyaṃ dhammassa vattanato vattā. Pavattanato pavattā. Atthaṃ nīharitvā nīharitvā dassanasamatthatāya atthassa ninnetā. Amatādhigamāya paṭipattiṃ desetīti amatassa dātā.
不作难而让人再三请求,这也叫作难。如果一个人站在自己“有学无碍解智”的位置上,像从须弥山脚下拔沙子一样,把本来就不容易懂的法说得更加难懂,然后再讲,这也仍然叫作难。这里的意思是:请不要那样做,不要让我们再三请求,也不要把本来容易懂的法弄得难懂,请直接为我们讲。巴利
Agaruṃ karitvāti punappunaṃ yācāpentopi hi garuṃ karoti nāma. Attano sekkhapaṭisambhidāñāṇe ṭhatvā sinerupādato vālikaṃ uddharamāno viya dubbiññeyyaṃ katvā kathentopi garuṃ karotiyeva nāma. Evaṃ akatvā amhe punappunaṃ ayācāpetvā suviññeyyampi no katvā kathehīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“你们所……”(Yaṃ kho vo)就是“你们的……”(yaṃ kho tumhākaṃ)的意思。贤友,在世间中,以眼而有世间想、世间慢:于世间中就眼而言未断见的凡夫,会依众生世间而认知并思量“这是世间”,同样也会依轮围世间而认知并思量。他这种想或慢,除了在眼等十二处上生起之外,不会在别的地方生起。因此说:“贤友,在世间中,以眼而有世间想、世间慢。”而这个世间的边际,并不是靠行走就能了知、看见或到达的。不过应当知道:对于这个以眼等为分类的世间,以坏灭为义,如果没有到达那称为涅槃的边际,轮回之苦就不可能终结。巴利
Yaṃ kho voti yaṃ kho tumhākaṃ. Cakkhunā kho, āvuso, lokasmiṃ lokasaññī hoti lokamānīti cakkhuñhi loke appahīnadiṭṭhi puthujjano sattalokavasena lokoti sañjānāti ceva maññati ca, tathā cakkavāḷalokavasena. Na hi aññatra cakkhādīhi dvādasāyatanehi tassa sā saññā vā māno vā uppajjati. Tena vuttaṃ, ‘‘cakkhunā kho, āvuso, lokasmiṃ lokasaññī hoti lokamānī’’ti. Imassa ca lokassa gamanena anto nāma ñātuṃ vā daṭṭhuṃ vā pattuṃ vā na sakkā. Lujjanaṭṭhena pana tasseva cakkhādibhedassa lokassa nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ appatvā vaṭṭadukkhassa antakiriyā nāma natthīti veditabbā.
这样解答了问题之后,现在为了打发他们走,他说:“不要因为这个问题是声闻弟子说的就成为无疑惑者。这位世尊是持一切知智之秤而坐的。你们若愿意,就亲自去亲近他,让自己不再有疑惑。”接着他说“若渴望者……”等等。巴利
Evaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjetvā idāni ‘‘sāvakena pañho kathitoti mā nikkaṅkhā ahuvattha, ayaṃ bhagavā sabbaññutaññāṇatulaṃ gahetvā nisinno. Icchamānā tameva upasaṅkamitvā nikkaṅkhā hothā’’ti uyyojento ākaṅkhamānā panātiādimāha.
用这些方式,是指用这些原因,既包括轮围世界没有边际的原因,也包括行世间达到边际的原因。用这些语句,是指用这些字母的组合。用字母,是指用每一个单独的音节。巴利
Imehi ākārehīti imehi kāraṇehi cakkavāḷalokassa antābhāvakāraṇehi ceva saṅkhāralokassa antāpattikāraṇehi ca. Imehi padehīti imehi akkharasampiṇḍanehi. Byañjanehīti pāṭiyekkaakkharehi.
被称为“智者”,是因为具备智慧。以四种原因而成为智者:对界善巧、对处善巧、对缘起善巧、对因与非因善巧。“大慧者”:由于具备大慧,能够把握广大的义理、广大的法、广大的言辞表达、广大的辩才,所以称为大慧者。“正如阿难所解说”:意思是,就像阿难所解说的那样,这是针对那件事而说的。也就是说:如同阿难那样解说此事,我也要同样地解说。巴利
Paṇḍitoti paṇḍiccena samannāgato. Catūhi kāraṇehi paṇḍito dhātukusalo āyatanakusalo paccayākārakusalo kāraṇākāraṇakusaloti. Mahāpaññoti mahante atthe mahante dhamme mahantā niruttiyo mahantāni paṭibhānāni paṭiggaṇhanasamatthatāya mahāpaññāya samannāgato. Yathātaṃ ānandenāti yathā ānandena byākataṃ, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yathā ānandena taṃ byākataṃ, ahampi taṃ evameva byākareyyanti attho.
第4章 欲乐经的注释巴利
4. Kāmaguṇasuttavaṇṇanā
117 第四经中,“我所曾”的意思是“那些属于我的”。“曾为心所触”是指过去曾被心体验过的。“于此,若我心频频趣向”:这是说明,心在过去以宫殿、三种歌舞等种种圆满成就为体验对象的五种欲乐中,多次生起;若再频频趣向,便会再次生起。“或于现在”:这里是指在精勤修行时期,以六年中繁花盛开的林间鸟群等为对象,依所见所闻等种种令人愉悦的所缘,将其视为五欲,以此说明“在这样现在的欲乐中,心也可能频频生起”。“少分或于未来”:这是说明,在未来,“弥勒将成佛,名为商佉的国王,名为鸡头末的王都”等,以这样有限的方式,心在未来少分的五欲中也可能生起。“我以自身相应”:于彼处,我以自利为性行。“不放逸”:持续精勤,于五欲中不舍弃心。“念”:对所缘的摄持之念。“防护”:这不放逸与念,应当作心的防护,以此说明“我曾如此”,即为了防护,这两种法应当修习。巴利
117. Catutthe ye meti ye mama. Cetaso samphuṭṭhapubbāti cittena anubhūtapubbā. Tatra me cittaṃ bahulaṃ gacchamānaṃ gaccheyyāti tesu pāsādattayatividhanāṭakādibhedasampattivasena anubhūtapubbesu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu bahūsu vāresu uppajjamānaṃ uppajjeyyāti dīpeti. Paccuppannesu vāti idha padhānacariyakāle chabbassāni supupphitavanasaṇḍajātānaṃ dijagaṇādīnaṃ vasena diṭṭhasutādibhedaṃ manoramārammaṇaṃ kāmaguṇaṃ katvā dassento ‘‘evarūpesu paccuppannesu vā bahulaṃ uppajjeyyā’’ti dasseti. Appaṃ vā anāgatesūti anāgate ‘‘metteyyo nāma buddho bhavissati, saṅkho nāma rājā, ketumatī nāma rājadhānī’’tiādivasena (dī. ni. 3.106) parittakameva anāgatesu kāmaguṇesu uppajjeyyāti dasseti. Tatra me attarūpenāti tatra mayā attano hitakāmajātikena. Appamādoti sātaccakiriyā pañcasu kāmaguṇesu cittassa avossaggo. Satīti ārammaṇapariggahitasati. Ārakkhoti ayaṃ appamādo ca sati ca cetaso ārakkho karaṇīyo, evaṃ me ahosīti dasseti, ārakkhatthāya ime dve dhammā kātabbāti vuttaṃ hoti.
因此,比丘们,应当了知那个处。因为为了守护心,必须修习不放逸和正念;而当那个处已经被了知之后,就不需要再以不放逸或正念去做什么了。所以应当了知那个处,意思是应当了知那个原因。六处灭:六处的灭尽称为涅槃,这句话就是针对涅槃而说的。因为在涅槃中,眼等诸处确实灭尽,色想等也灭尽。其余内容按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, se āyatane veditabbeti yasmā cetaso ārakkhatthāya appamādo ca sati ca kātabbā, yasmā tasmiṃ āyatane vidite appamādena vā satiyā vā kātabbaṃ natthi, tasmā se āyatane veditabbe, taṃ kāraṇaṃ jānitabbanti attho. Saḷāyatananirodhanti saḷāyatananirodho vuccati nibbānaṃ, taṃ sandhāya bhāsitanti attho. Nibbānasmiñhi cakkhuādīni ceva nirujjhanti rūpasaññādayo ca nirujjhantīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
5-6. 帝释问经等的注释巴利
5-6. Sakkapañhasuttādivaṇṇanā
118-119 118-119. 第五经中,“就在现前之法中”:就是指在现在这个生命体当中。“般涅槃”:是通过烦恼的般涅槃而般涅槃。“那识依止于它”:是指依止渴爱而生的业识。“那取”:就是那个执取,意思是与渴爱的执取一同生起的识。第六经则是浅显易懂的。巴利
118-119. Pañcame diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Parinibbāyantīti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyanti. Tannissitaṃ viññāṇaṃ hotīti taṇhānissitaṃ kammaviññāṇaṃ hoti . Tadupādānanti taṃgahaṇaṃ, taṇhāgahaṇena sahagataṃ viññāṇaṃ hotīti attho. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānameva.
舍利弗同住比丘经的注释巴利
7. Sāriputtasaddhivihārikasuttavaṇṇanā
120 在第七个中,将会努力意思是将会奋力,不让他达到瑜伽的障碍。巴利
120. Sattame santānessatīti ghaṭessati, yogavicchedamassa pāpuṇituṃ na dassati.
5. 教诫罗睺罗经注巴利
8. Rāhulovādasuttavaṇṇanā
121 在第八经中,“能令解脱成熟”是指能使解脱成熟,所以叫“能令解脱成熟”。“诸法”指十五种法,应当理解为它们能令信根等得以清净。对此已经说过:巴利
121. Aṭṭhame vimuttiparipācaniyāti vimuttiṃ paripācentīti vimuttiparipācaniyā. Dhammāti pannarasa dhammā, te saddhindriyādīnaṃ visuddhikaraṇavasena veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
远离没有信心的人,亲近、结交、侍奉有信心的人,观察能引发净信的经典,通过这三种方式,信根得到净化。远离懈怠的人,亲近、结交、侍奉已发起精进的人,观察正勤,通过这三种方式,精进根得到净化。远离失念的人,亲近、结交、侍奉正念现前的人,观察念处,通过这三种方式,念根得到净化。远离未得定的人,亲近、结交、侍奉已得定的人,观察禅那与解脱,通过这三种方式,定根得到净化。远离智慧低劣的人,亲近、结交、侍奉有智慧的人,观察甚深智行,通过这三种方式,慧根得到净化。如此,远离这五种人,亲近、结交、侍奉这五种人,观察这五种经典,通过这十五种方式,这五根便得到净化。巴利
‘‘Assaddhe puggale parivajjayato, saddhe puggale sevato bhajato payirupāsato, pasādanīye suttante paccavekkhato, imehi tīhākārehi saddhindriyaṃ visujjhati. Kusīte puggale parivajjayato, āraddhavīriye puggale sevato bhajato payirupāsato, sammappadhāne paccavekkhato, imehi tīhākārehi vīriyindriyaṃ visujjhati. Muṭṭhassatī puggale parivajjayato, upaṭṭhitassatī puggale sevato bhajato payirupāsato , satipaṭṭhāne paccavekkhato, imehi tīhākārehi satindriyaṃ visujjhati. Asamāhite puggale parivajjayato, samāhite puggale sevato bhajato payirupāsato, jhānavimokkhe paccavekkhato, imehi tīhākārehi samādhindriyaṃ visujjhati. Duppaññe puggale parivajjayato, paññavante puggale sevato bhajato payirupāsato, gambhīrañāṇacariyaṃ paccavekkhato, imehi tīhākārehi paññindriyaṃ visujjhati. Iti ime pañca puggale parivajjayato, pañca puggale sevato bhajato payirupāsato , pañca suttante paccavekkhato, imehi pannarasahi ākārehi imāni pañcindriyāni visujjhantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.184).
还有另外十五种法能帮助解脱成熟:以信为首的五根;无常想、于无常中苦想、于苦中无我想、断想、离贪想——这五种想属于趣向厌离的部分;以及世尊为弥醯长老所说的善知识等五种法(《自说经》31)。那么,世尊是在什么时候生起这个念头呢?是在破晓时分观察世间的时候。巴利
Aparepi pannarasa dhammā vimuttiparipācaniyā – saddhāpañcamāni indriyāni, aniccasaññā, anicce dukkhasaññā, dukkhe anattasaññā, pahānasaññā, virāgasaññāti imā pañca nibbedhabhāgiyā saññā, meghiyattherassa kathitā kalyāṇamittatādayo pañca dhammāti (udā. 31). Kāya pana velāya bhagavato etadahosīti? Paccūsasamaye lokaṃ volokentassa.
“无数千位天神”这句话,是当具寿罗睺罗在莲花上佛的足下、身为龙王波罗利陀的时期发起誓愿时,与他一同发起誓愿的天神当中,有些是住在地上的天神,有些是住在空中的天神,有些是四大王天的天神,有些投生在欲界天,有些投生在梵天。而在这一天,所有这些天神都聚集在同一个地方,也就是安陀林,因此说“无数千位天神”。这里的“法眼”,应当理解为这部经中说的四道与四果。因为在那些天神当中,有的证得入流果,有的证得一来果,有的证得不还果,有的成为漏尽者。而这些天神的数量,是无法计算的。其余内容在各处都很清楚。巴利
Anekāni devatāsahassānīti āyasmatā rāhulena padumuttarassa bhagavato pādamūle pālitanāgarājakāle patthanaṃ paṭṭhapentena saddhiṃ patthanaṃ paṭṭhapitadevatāsu pana kāci bhūmaṭṭhakā devatā, kāci antalikkhaṭṭhakā, kāci cātumahārājikā, kāci devaloke, kāci brahmaloke nibbattā. Imasmiṃ pana divase sabbāpi tā ekaṭṭhāne andhavanasmiṃyeva sannipatitā, tā sandhāyāha – ‘‘anekāni devatāsahassānī’’ti. Dhammacakkhunti imasmiṃ sutte cattāro ca maggā cattāri ca phalāni dhammacakkhunti veditabbāni. Tattha hi kāci devatā sotāpannā ahesuṃ, kāci sakadāgāmī, anāgāmī, khīṇāsavā. Tāsañca pana devatānaṃ ettakāti gaṇanavasena paricchedo natthi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva.
第9至10经,即《结所系法经》等的注释。巴利
9-10. Saṃyojaniyadhammasuttādivaṇṇanā
122-123 第九经和第十经,是在以可爱所缘来讲说时,依照能够觉悟者的能力而说的。巴利
122-123. Navamadasamāni iṭṭhārammaṇavasena kathiyamāne bujjhanakānaṃ vasena vuttānīti.
第十三 居士品巴利
13. Gahapativaggo
1-3. 《毗舍离经》等的注释巴利
1-3. Vesālīsuttādivaṇṇanā
124-126 124-126. 在《居士品》的第一经里,“郁伽”是指专门布施精美物品的人当中排第一的那位郁伽,世尊把他列为最上首,这样说:“比丘们,在我的声闻弟子中,专门布施精美物品的人里,郁伽居士排第一。”其余两经和第三经里说的内容,也和这里一样。巴利
124-126. Gahapativaggassa paṭhame uggoti paṇītadāyakānaṃ aggauggo, so bhagavatā ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ paṇītadāyakānaṃ yadidaṃ uggo gahapatī’’ti evaṃ etadagge ṭhapito. Sesametesu ceva dvīsu, tatiye ca vuttatthameva.
4-5. 《婆罗堕阇经》等的注释巴利
4-5. Bhāradvājasuttādivaṇṇanā
127-128 第四种里,为了乞食而到处寻找、四处求讨,因此出家的人,就叫“宾头罗”。据说他本来是个把家产败光的婆罗门。后来他看到比丘僧团得到很多供养和恭敬,就为了乞食而出家。他拿一个大陶钵到处走,用满满一钵喝粥,用满满一钵吃薄饼,用满满一钵吃饭。比丘们把他食量很大的事告诉了导师,导师不允许他用钵袋。他就把钵倒扣着放在床座下面。可是放的时候也磨着地推过去,拿的时候也磨着地拽出来。走来走去之间,钵被磨坏了,最后变得只能装一勺饭那么多。大家又把这事告诉导师,导师这才允许他用钵袋。这位长老后来修习根修习,证得了最高的果位——阿罗汉果。就这样,因为他为了乞食而出家,所以叫“宾头罗”;又因为他的族姓是“婆罗堕阇”,把这两个合在一起,就叫“宾头罗婆罗堕阇”。巴利
127-128. Catutthe piṇḍaṃ ulamāno pariyesamāno pabbajitoti piṇḍolo. So kira parijiṇṇabhogo brāhmaṇo ahosi. Atha bhikkhusaṅghassa lābhasakkāraṃ disvā piṇḍatthāya nikkhamitvā pabbajito. So mahantaṃ kapallapattaṃ gahetvā carati, tena kapallapūraṃ yāguṃ pivati, kapallapūre pūve khādati, kapallapūraṃ bhattaṃ bhuñjati. Athassa mahagghasabhāvaṃ satthu ārocayiṃsu. Satthā tassa pattatthavikaṃ nānujāni. Heṭṭhāmañce pattaṃ nikkujjitvā ṭhapeti. So ṭhapentopi ghaṃsantova paṇāmetvā ṭhapeti, gaṇhantopi ghaṃsantova ākaḍḍhitvā gaṇhāti. Taṃ gacchante kāle dhaṃsanena parikkhīṇaṃ nāḷikodanamattameva gaṇhanakaṃ jātaṃ. Tato satthu ārocesuṃ, athassa satthā pattatthavikaṃ anujāni. Thero aparena samayena indriyabhāvanaṃ bhāvetvā aggaphale arahatte patiṭṭhāsi. Iti so piṇḍatthāya pabbajitattā piṇḍolo, gottena pana bhāradvājoti ubhayaṃ ekato katvā piṇḍolabhāradvājoti vuccati.
“上前”的意思是:他被地位极高的大臣们簇拥着走上前去。据说有一天,长老在舍卫城乞食,吃完饭,正值酷暑,他心想:“我找个凉快的地方午休吧。”于是从空中飞到恒河岸边。那里有优填王的一座园林,名叫“井苑”。长老进去后,在一棵树下坐下午休,清凉的水风吹拂着他。巴利
Upasaṅkamīti uggatuggatehi mahāamaccehi parivuto upasaṅkami. Thero kira ekadivasaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakicco nidāghasamaye sītaṭhāne divāvihāraṃ nisīdissāmīti ākāsena gantvā gaṅgātīre udenassa rañño udapānaṃ nāma uyyānaṃ atthi, tattha pavisitvā aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṃ nisīdi sītena udakavātena bījiyamāno.
优填王连续喝了七天烈酒,到第七天,他让人把园林收拾好,带着大批随从进了园子,在吉祥石板上铺好卧具,躺了下来。他身边有个侍女坐着给他按摩双脚。国王渐渐睡着了。见他睡熟,那些舞女心想:“我们本来是为了给他表演歌舞才来的,现在他都睡着了,这时候也不该弄出大动静。”于是各自放下乐器,散到园子里去了。她们在园中到处吃着各种果子,摘花戴在身上,四处游逛,看见长老后,互相提醒说:“别出声!”然后上前顶礼,坐到一边。长老就以“应当断除嫉妒,应当舍弃悭吝”等话头,为她们讲了与她们根机相应的佛法。巴利
Udenopi kho nāma rājā sattāhaṃ mahāpānaṃ pivitvā sattame divase uyyānaṃ paṭijaggāpetvā mahājanaparivāro uyyānaṃ gantvā maṅgalasilāpaṭṭe atthatāya seyyāya nipajji. Tassa ekā paricārikā pāde sambāhamānā nisinnā. Rājā kamena niddaṃ okkami. Tasmiṃ niddaṃ okkante nāṭakitthiyo ‘‘yassatthāya mayaṃ gītādīni payojeyyāma, so niddaṃ upagato, na ca niddākāle mahāsaddaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti attano attano tūriyāni ṭhapetvā uyyānaṃ pakkantā. Tā tattha tattha phalāphalāni khādamānā pupphāni piḷandhamānā vicarantiyo theraṃ disvā ‘‘mā saddaṃ karitthā’’ti aññamaññaṃ nivārayamānā vanditvā nisīdiṃsu. Thero ‘‘issā pahātabbā, maccheraṃ vinodetabba’’ntiādinā nayena tāsaṃ anurūpaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathesi.
那个正坐着给国王按摩双脚的女人,动了动国王的脚,把他弄醒了。国王问:“她们都去哪儿了?”她回答说:“您管她们干什么?她们都围着一个沙门坐在那儿呢。”国王大怒,像被扔进火炉里的盐一样噼里啪啦地炸响,跳起来说:“我要让红蚂蚁咬死他!”他一边走,一边看见一棵无忧树上有红蚂蚁窝,就伸手去拽那根树枝,却没抓稳。蚂蚁窝断了,整个掉在国王头上,他全身就像撒满了稻壳,又像被火把烧着一样。长老知道国王起了恶念,就以神通腾空而起。那些女人也站起来走到国王身边,假装帮他擦身体,一边捡起掉在地上的蚂蚁往他身上扔,一边全都用话刺他:“这算什么事啊!别的国王见到出家人都会礼拜、问法,这位国王倒好,竟然想把蚂蚁窝砸到人家头上!”巴利
Sāpi kho rañño pāde sambāhamānā nisinnā itthī pāde cāletvā rājānaṃ pabodhesi. So ‘‘kahaṃ tā gatā’’ti pucchi. Kiṃ tāsaṃ tumhehi? Tā ekaṃ samaṇaṃ parivāretvā nisinnāti. Rājā kuddho uddhane pakkhittaloṇaṃ viya taṭataṭāyamāno uṭṭhahitvā ‘‘tambakipillikāhi naṃ khādāpessāmī’’ti gacchanto ekasmiṃ asokarukkhe tambakipillikānaṃ puṭaṃ disvā hatthenākaḍḍhitvā sākhaṃ gaṇhituṃ nāsakkhi. Kipillikapuṭo chijjitvā rañño sīse pati, sakalasarīraṃ sālithusehi parikiṇṇaṃ viya daṇḍadīpikāhi ḍayhamānaṃ viya ca ahosi. Thero rañño paduṭṭhabhāvaṃ ñatvā iddhiyā ākāsaṃ pakkhandi. Tāpi itthiyo uṭṭhāya rañño santikaṃ gantvā sarīraṃ puñchantiyo viya bhūmiyaṃ patitapatitā kipillikāyo gahetvā sarīre khipamānā sabbā mukhasattīhi vijjhiṃsu – ‘‘kiṃ nāmetaṃ, aññe rājāno pabbajite disvā vandanti, pañhaṃ pucchanti, ayaṃ pana rājā kipillikapuṭaṃ sīse bhinditukāmo jāto’’ti.
国王看到是自己的过错,就把守园人叫来问道:“这个出家人是谁?他别的日子也来这里吗?”守园人回答:“是的,大王。”国王说:“他来的那天,你要来告诉我。”长老没过多久又来了,坐在树下。守园人看见后,心想:“这可是我得到的一份大礼!”于是赶紧跑去报告国王。国王立刻起身,命人停下螺号、鼓等一切声响,带着地位极高的大臣们一起去了园林。因此说“他走近前去”。巴利
Rājā attano aparādhaṃ disvā uyyānapālaṃ pakkosāpetvā pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ esa pabbajito? Aññesupi divasesu idha āgacchatī’’ti? Āma, devāti. Idha tvaṃ āgatadivase mayhaṃ āroceyyāsīti. Theropi katipāheneva puna āgantvā rukkhamūle nisīdi. Uyyānapālo disvā – ‘‘mahanto me ayaṃ paṇṇākāro’’ti vegena gantvā rañño ārocesi. Rājā uṭṭhahitvā saṅkhapaṇavādisaddaṃ nivāretvā uggatuggatehi amaccehi saddhiṃ uyyānaṃ agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘upasaṅkamī’’ti.
“不曾沉迷欲乐的人”是指:在诸欲中从未有过欲乐嬉戏,也就是从未享受过欲乐的意思。“又使人走上长途”是指让人踏上世代相续之路,使人在漫长岁月中不断延续。“对如母者等”是指对相当于母亲那样的女性。因为在世间,母亲、姐妹、女儿这三类被称为三种应受尊重的对象。长老这样说,是为了表明:心被这应受尊重的对象系缚时,就无法解脱。那时,长老见他的心不能借这个问题深入,为了让他的心系住,便依不净作意开示了世尊所说的三十二身分业处。巴利
Anikīḷitāvino kāmesūti yā kāmesu kāmakīḷā, taṃ akīḷitapubbā, aparibhuttakāmāti attho. Addhānañca āpādentīti paveṇiṃ paṭipādenti, dīgharattaṃ anubandhāpenti. Mātumattīsūti mātupamāṇāsu. Lokasmiñhi mātā bhaginī dhītāti idaṃ tividhaṃ garukārammaṇaṃ nāma , iti garukārammaṇe upanibandhaṃ cittaṃ vimocetuṃ na labhatīti dassento evamāha. Athassa tena pañhena cittaṃ anotarantaṃ disvā bhagavatā paṭikūlamanasikāravasena cittūpanibandhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi.
“未修习身”是指没有修习五门的身。对这些人来说,修不净业处很难,也就是说,他们修习不净业处很困难。长老这样看到他的心即使靠这个也没能深入,就讲了根律仪戒。因为心安住在根律仪上时,烦恼就没办法扰乱它。国王听了之后,心就投了进去,说:“真是稀奇啊,婆罗堕阇尊者!”等等。巴利
Abhāvitakāyāti abhāvitapañcadvārikakāyā. Tesaṃ taṃ dukkaraṃ hotīti tesaṃ taṃ asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetuṃ dukkaraṃ hoti. Itissa imināpi cittaṃ anotarantaṃ disvā indriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ kathesi . Indriyasaṃvarasmiñhi upanibandhacittaṃ viheṭhetuṃ na labhati. Rājā taṃ sutvā tattha otiṇṇacitto acchariyaṃ, bho bhāradvājātiādimāha.
在“以不防护的身”等句里,玩弄手脚、转动脖子,就叫不防护身;说各种粗恶的话,就叫不防护语;生起欲寻等念头,就叫不防护心。在“以已防护的身”等句里,意思应当反过来理解。巴利
Arakkhiteneva kāyenātiādīsu hatthapāde kīḷāpento gīvaṃ parivattento kāyaṃ na rakkhati nāma, nānappakāraṃ duṭṭhullaṃ kathento vacanaṃ na rakkhati nāma, kāmavitakkādayo vitakkento cittaṃ na rakkhati nāma. Rakkhiteneva kāyenātiādīsu vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo.
那时,贪法极其强烈地压制我,意思是:那时贪欲越过了我,把我完全控制住。以现起的念,是指已经很好地安立在身体上的念。那时我不像那样,意思是:那时贪欲不再像以前那样越过我、生起。困扰这个词也有生起的意思。这样,在这部经里说了三种身。怎么说的呢?在即此身这句里,说的是业生身;在已修习身这句里,说的是五门身;在由防护身这句里,说的是动转身,也就是身表;第五经的注释是显而易见的。巴利
Ativiya maṃ tasmiṃ samaye lobhadhammā parisahantīti maṃ tasmiṃ samaye atikkamitvā lobho adhibhavatīti attho. Upaṭṭhitāya satiyāti kāyagatāya satiyā supaṭṭhitāya. Na maṃ tathā tasmiṃ samayeti tasmiṃ samaye maṃ yathā pubbe, na tathā lobho atikkamitvā uppajjatīti attho. Parisahantīti padassa uppajjantītipi atthoyeva. Iti imasmiṃ sutte tayo kāyā kathitā. Kathaṃ ? ‘‘Imameva kāya’’nti ettha hi karajakāyo kathito, ‘‘bhāvitakāyo’’ti ettha pañcadvārikakāyo, ‘‘rakkhiteneva kāyenā’’ti ettha copanakāyo, kāyaviññattīti attho. Pañcamaṃ uttānameva.
瞿师罗经的注释巴利
6. Ghositasuttavaṇṇanā
129 第六经里,“悦意的色”是说有悦意的色存在;“眼识”是说有眼识存在;“能生乐受的触”是指与眼识相应、作为亲依止缘、在速行时成为乐受之因的那个触;“乐受”是指依靠这个触、由速行的力量而生起的乐受。其余几句也应这样理解。巴利
129. Chaṭṭhe rūpā ca manāpāti rūpā ca manāpā saṃvijjanti. Cakkhuviññāṇañcāti cakkhuviññāṇañca saṃvijjati. Sukhavedaniyaṃ phassanti cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttaṃ upanissayavasena javanakāle sukhavedanāya paccayabhūtaṃ phassaṃ. Sukhā vedanāti ekaṃ phassaṃ paṭicca javanavasena sukhavedanā uppajjati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
这样,在这部经里就讲了二十三种界。怎么讲的呢?这里,眼净色是眼界,它的所缘是色界,眼识是识界,与眼识界俱生的三个蕴是法界,这样在五个门里,各按四种来算,就是二十种。在意门里,“意界”指的是转向心;所缘和心所依处是法界;依止心所依处的意识界。这样一共就是二十三种。世尊就是这样按二十三种界来说明了界的差别。巴利
Iti imasmiṃ sutte tevīsati dhātuyo kathitā. Kathaṃ? Ettha hi cakkhupasādo cakkhudhātu, tassa ārammaṇaṃ rūpadhātu, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ viññāṇadhātu, cakkhuviññāṇadhātuyā sahajātā tayo khandhā dhammadhātu, evaṃ pañcasu dvāresu catunnaṃ catunnaṃ vasena vīsati. Manodvāre ‘‘manodhātū’’ti āvajjanacittaṃ gahitaṃ, ārammaṇañceva hadayavatthu ca dhammadhātu, vatthunissitaṃ manoviññāṇadhātūti evaṃ tevīsati honti. Evaṃ tevīsatiyā dhātūnaṃ vasena dhātunānattaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavatāti dasseti.
7-8. 诃梨提迦尼经等的注释巴利
7-8. Hāliddikānisuttādivaṇṇanā
130-131 130-131. 在第七经中,“了知‘悦意即可爱’”:他对自己所见到的悦意色,了知“这就是可爱,这就是悦意的”。关于“依眼识与能生乐受的触”——就是依眼识,以及依作为乐受之缘的触(无论是以亲依止缘、无间缘、等无间缘还是相应缘的方式),依那能生乐受的触而生起乐受。这个道理在一切处都适用。因此,在这两部经中,应当知道:唯作意识界执行的是转向作用,或者它其实就是意界,只是以“意界”之名来说。第八经则是浅显易懂的。巴利
130-131. Sattame manāpaṃ itthetanti pajānātīti yaṃ anena manāpaṃ rūpaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ itthetanti evametaṃ manāpameva tanti pajānāti. Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ sukhavedaniyañca phassaṃ paṭiccāti cakkhuviññāṇañceva, yo ca upanissayakoṭiyā vā anantarakoṭiyā vā samanantarakoṭiyā vā sampayuttakoṭiyā vā sukhavedanāya paccayo phasso, taṃ sukhavedaniyaṃ phassañca paṭicca uppajjati sukhavedanāti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Iti imesu dvīsu suttesu kiriyāmanoviññāṇadhātu āvajjanakiccā, manodhātuyeva vā samānā manodhātunāmena vuttāti veditabbā. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānameva.
《露遮经》的注释巴利
9. Lohiccasuttavaṇṇanā
132 第九经中,“玛咖喇咖答”:一个叫玛咖喇咖答的城市。“在阿兰若小屋”:指在森林里建的一间独处小屋,不是在精舍旁边的小屋。“学童们”:即使那里有年长的人,因为他们还是以学童的身份待着,所以即使年纪大了也仍然叫学童。“他们前往”:早上学完技艺后,傍晚时说“我们去给老师捡柴火”,就进入森林四处走动,来到了那间小屋那里。“小屋的四周”:就是那间小屋的四面八方。“跳跃嬉戏”:互相搭着背,跳来跳去,到处走动玩耍。巴利
132. Navame makkarakateti evaṃnāmake nagare araññakuṭikāyanti araññe katāya pāṭiyekkāya kuṭiyaṃ, na vihārapaccantakuṭiyaṃ. Māṇavakāti yepi tattha mahallakā, te mahallakakālepi antevāsikatāya māṇavakātveva vuttā. Tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti pāto sippaṃ uggaṇhitvā sāyaṃ ‘‘ācariyassa kaṭṭhāni āharissāmā’’ti araññaṃ pavisitvā vicarantā yena sā kuṭikā, tenupasaṅkamiṃsu. Parito parito kuṭikāyāti tassā kuṭikāya samantato samantato. Seleyyakānīti aññamaññassa piṭṭhiṃ gahetvā laṅghitvā ito cito caṅkamanakīḷanāni.
在“剃头者”等称呼中,本来应该说“剃头的啊剃头的,沙门啊沙门”,但这些人出于轻蔑,就说“剃头佬、小沙门”。“Ibbhā”指家主们。“Kaṇhā”就是黑,意思是黝黑。“Bandhupādāpaccā”这里,“bandhu”指的是梵天,因为婆罗门称梵天为祖父。“足的子孙”就是“足下子孙”,意思是从梵天的脊足所生。据说他们有这样的主张:“婆罗门从梵天口中生出,刹帝利从胸口生出,吠舍从肚脐生出,首陀罗从膝盖生出,沙门从脊足生出。”“Bharatakā”指家主们。家主们因为养活国家,所以被称为“bharatā”(供养者),但这些人带着轻蔑说成“bharatakā”(小供养者)。巴利
Muṇḍakātiādīsu muṇḍe muṇḍāti, samaṇe ca samaṇāti vattuṃ vaṭṭeyya, ime pana hīḷentā ‘‘muṇḍakā samaṇakā’’ti āhaṃsu. Ibbhāti gahapatikā. Kaṇhāti kaṇhā, kāḷakāti attho. Bandhupādāpaccāti ettha bandhūti brahmā adhippeto. Tañhi brāhmaṇā pitāmahoti voharanti. Pādānaṃ apaccā pādāpaccā, brahmuno piṭṭhipādato jātāti adhippāyo. Tesaṃ kira ayaṃ laddhi ‘‘brāhmaṇā brahmuno mukhato nikkhantā, khattiyā urato, vessā nābhito, suddā jāṇuto, samaṇā piṭṭhipādato’’ti. Bharatakānanti kuṭimbikānaṃ. Kuṭimbikā hi yasmā raṭṭhaṃ bharanti, tasmā bharatāti vuccanti. Ime pana paribhavaṃ katvā vadamānā ‘‘bharatakāna’’nti āhaṃsu.
他心里想:“这些年轻人在这座精舍里玩得实在太疯了——夜里清扫过的庭院,铺着像银片一样均匀细散的沙子,那么好看。他们把柴捆扎起来互相扔着玩,把沙子扬得到处都是,手拉着手绕着小叶屋转圈,一遍又一遍地喊:‘这些是供养家主们的!这些是供养家主们的!’他们根本不知道精舍里有比丘在。我要让他们看到有比丘在这里。”想完之后,他从叶屋走了出来。巴利
Vihārā nikkhamitvāti ‘‘rattiṭṭhakāparicchanne rajatapaṭṭasannibhasamavippakiṇṇavālike ramaṇīye pariveṇe kaṭṭhakalāpe bandhitvā khipamānā vālikaṃ āluḷetvā, hatthena hatthaṃ ādāya paṇṇakuṭiṃ pariyāyantā ‘ime imesaṃ bharatakānaṃ sakkatā, ime imesaṃ bharatakānaṃ sakkatā’ti punappunaṃ viravantā ativiya ime māṇavakā kīḷaṃ karonti, vihāre bhikkhūnaṃ atthibhāvampi na jānanti, dassessāmi nesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ atthibhāva’’nti cintetvā paṇṇakuṭito nikkhami.
戒为最上、戒为最初:在讲说具德者的功德时,无德者没有功德这件事自然就会显露出来,所以他讲说古婆罗门的功德时,说了这番话。其中,戒为最上指以戒为尊长;对他们来说,戒是最高的,不是出身和种姓。那些忆念古代的,指忆念古代婆罗门法的人。降伏了嗔怒,指战胜嗔怒之后,他们的根门善加守护、善加防护。乐于法和禅那,指乐于十善业道之法以及八等至的禅那。巴利
Sīluttamā pubbatarā ahesunti guṇavantānaṃ guṇe kathite nigguṇānaṃ guṇābhāvo pākaṭova bhavissatīti porāṇakabrāhmaṇānaṃ guṇe kathento evamāha. Tattha sīluttamāti sīlajeṭṭhakā. Sīlañhi tesaṃ uttamaṃ, na jātigottaṃ. Ye purāṇaṃ sarantīti ye porāṇakaṃ brāhmaṇadhammaṃ saranti. Abhibhuyya kodhanti kodhaṃ abhibhavitvā tesaṃ dvārāni suguttāni surakkhitāni ahesuṃ. Dhamme ca jhāne ca ratāti dasavidhe kusalakammapathadhamme aṭṭhasamāpattijhānesu ca ratā.
这样讲了古人的功德之后,为了压伏如今婆罗门的骄慢,说了“这些人偏离之后,我们诵习……”等话。其中,“偏离”是指从这些功德上退开。“我们诵习”是说我们在念诵、在背诵,仅仅凭这一点就以为“我们就是婆罗门”,这些婆罗门因为这种出身而陶醉,行为不正,做出种种不正当的身业等,这就是这段话的意思。“多执杖”是指各自拿着种种杖,也就是手里握着各种不同的杖。“对有贪与无贪者”就是对有贪的人和离贪的人。“不护根门者的一切都徒劳”:这是在说明,对不守护根门的人来说,所有誓愿和戒行都成了徒劳。就像什么呢?就像一个人在梦里得到的财富一样——正如人在梦中得到摩尼珠、珍珠等各种财富,醒来后什么也看不到,那些财富全是空的;同样,这些人的誓愿也是徒劳无果的。巴利
Evaṃ porāṇānaṃ guṇaṃ kathetvā athetarahi brāhmaṇānaṃ mānaṃ nimmaddento ime ca vokkamma japāmasetiādimāha. Tattha vokkammāti etehi guṇehi apakkamitvā. Japāmaseti mayaṃ japāma sajjhāyāmāti ettakeneva brāhmaṇamhāti maññamānā brāhmaṇā mayanti iminā gottena mattā hutvā visamaṃ caranti, visamāni kāyakammādīni karontīti attho. Puthuattadaṇḍāti puthu attā daṇḍā etehīti puthuattadaṇḍā, gahitanānāvidhadaṇḍāti attho. Sataṇhātaṇhesūti sataṇhanittaṇhesu. Aguttadvārassa bhavanti moghāti asaṃvutadvārassa sabbepi vatasamādānā moghā bhavantīti dīpeti. Yathā kinti? Supineva laddhaṃ purisassa vittanti yathā supine purisassa laddhaṃ maṇimuttādinānāvidhaṃ vittaṃ moghaṃ hoti, pabujjhitvā kiñci na passati, evaṃ moghā bhavantīti attho.
不食者是指按一日、两日等天数不进食的人。卧地者是指睡在铺着绿草的地面上,还有清晨沐浴和三吠陀——也就是清早进入水中沐浴,以及念诵三吠陀。粗鹿皮、发髻、泥垢是指触感粗糙的鹿皮、束起的发髻和泥垢;泥垢就是牙垢。咒语、戒禁、苦行是指咒语,以及称为羊戒、牛戒的戒条和称为羊行、牛行的禁戒。这里说的是现今婆罗门的苦行。诡诈、曲杖与吝啬是指像隐藏的水井一样掩盖过失的诡诈、曲杖与吝啬;曲杖就是从优昙跋罗叶、贝卢树等任一种树取材制成的曲杖。洗漱水是指用水洗漱。这些是婆罗门的装束显示这些是婆罗门的资具物品装束。作微小修习是指已作的微小修习。或者这正是原文,意思是为增长资具微小之物而作。巴利
Anāsakāti ekāhadvīhādivasena anāhārakā. Thaṇḍilasāyikā cāti haritakusasanthate bhūmibhāge sayanaṃ, pāto sinānañcatayo ca vedāti pātova udakaṃ pavisitvā nhānañceva tayo ca vedā. Kharājinaṃ jaṭā paṅkoti kharasamphassaṃ ajinacammañceva jaṭākalāpo ca paṅko ca, paṅko nāma dantamalaṃ. Mantā sīlabbataṃ tapoti mantā ca ajasīlagosīlasaṅkhātaṃ sīlaṃ ajavatagovatasaṅkhātaṃ vatañca. Ayaṃ idāni brāhmaṇānaṃ tapoti vadati. Kuhanā vaṅkadaṇḍā cāti paṭicchannakūpo viya paṭicchannadosaṃ kohaññañceva vaṅkadaṇḍo, ca udumbarapalāsabeḷuvarukkhānaṃ aññatarato gahitaṃ vaṅkadaṇḍañcāti attho. Udakācamanāni cāti udakena mukhaparimajjanāni. Vaṇṇā ete brāhmaṇānanti ete brāhmaṇānaṃ parikkhārabhaṇḍakavaṇṇāti dasseti. Kata kiñcikkhabhāvanāti katā kiñcikkhabhāvanā. Ayameva vā pāṭho, āmisakiñcikkhassa vaḍḍhanatthāya katanti attho.
如来现在这样先压下了婆罗门的骄慢,接着又讲起古代婆罗门的德行,于是说出“心也善定”等话。其中,“善定”是说那些婆罗门的心依靠近行定和安止定而变得善定。“无硬结”就是柔软、不僵硬。“那是通往梵天的道路”,是说那是通往最胜之处的道路;而你们又凭什么算是婆罗门呢?为了说明这一点,他这样说道。巴利
Evaṃ etarahi brāhmaṇānaṃ mānaṃ nimmadditvā puna porāṇakabrāhmaṇānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathento cittañca susamāhitantiādimāha. Tattha susamāhitanti tesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ cittaṃ upacārappanāsamādhīhi susamāhitaṃ ahosīti dasseti. Akhilanti mudu athaddhaṃ. So maggo brahmapattiyāti so seṭṭhapattiyā maggo, tumhe pana kiṃ brāhmaṇā nāmāti dīpento evamāha.
他们是否来到了这里呢?就是问:他们是否确实来到了这里。执取是指被烦恼的力量所驱使而倾心、贪著。心怀恶意是指被嗔恨的力量所驱使,心变得腐坏。心量狭小是因为念没有现前,以染污的心而成为心量狭小。心解脱是指果定。慧解脱是指果慧。心无量是因为念已现前,以远离烦恼的心而成为心无量。巴利
Āgamaṃsu nu khvidhāti āgamaṃsu nu kho idha. Adhimuccatīti kilesavasena adhimutto giddho hoti. Byāpajjatīti byāpādavasena pūticittaṃ hoti. Parittacetasoti anupaṭṭhitasatitāya saṃkilesacittena parittacitto. Cetovimuttinti phalasamādhiṃ. Paññāvimuttinti phalapaññaṃ. Appamāṇacetasoti upaṭṭhitasatitāya nikkilesacittena appamāṇacitto.
10. 《韦拉哈遮尼经》的注释巴利
10. Verahaccānisuttavaṇṇanā
133 第十经:在迦曼达城——就是那座同名的城市。“当”是表示催促的语气词。其余部分容易理解。巴利
133. Dasame kāmaṇḍāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Yaggheti codanatthe nipāto. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
第十四 天臂品巴利
14. Devadahavaggo
《天臂经》的注释巴利
1. Devadahasuttavaṇṇanā
134 134. 在《天臂品》的第一经中,“天臂”是一个以中性名词命名的城镇。“悦意”是指让心欢喜,意思是合意。“不悦意”就是不合意。巴利
134. Devadahavaggassa paṭhame devadahanti napuṃsakaliṅgena laddhanāmo nigamo. Manoramāti manaṃ ramayantā, manāpāti attho. Amanoramāti amanāpā.
2. 《时机经》注释巴利
2. Khaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
135 在第二部经里说的“名为六触处”,并不是说另外单独存在一种叫“六触处”的地狱。其实在全部三十一座大地狱里,都有六门触处的施设。这里只是针对无间大地狱来说的。这里说的“天”,也只是指三十三天城。不过在欲界天界里,没有任何一处是缺少六触处施设的。这说明了什么呢?在地狱里,因为纯粹被苦所充满;在天界里,因为纯粹被乐所充满,沉迷于嬉戏娱乐而生起放逸,所以没法修习道与梵行。而人间则是苦乐交杂,恶趣和天界都能在这里看到。这里正是修习道与梵行的业地,而你们已经得到了它。所以,你们得到的这些人的五蕴,就是你们的收获;你们得到的这个人的身份,就是你们已经获得了修习梵行的时机和时刻。古人也确实这样说过:巴利
135. Dutiye chaphassāyatanikā nāmāti visuṃ chaphassāyatanikā nāma nirayā natthi. Sabbesupi hi ekatiṃsamahānirayesu chadvāraphassāyatanapaññatti hotiyeva. Idaṃ pana avīcimahānirayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Saggāti idhāpi tāvatiṃsapurameva adhippetaṃ. Kāmāvacaradevaloke pana ekasmimpi chaphassāyatanapaññattiyā abhāvo nāma natthi. Iminā kiṃ dīpeti? Niraye ekantadukkhasamappitabhāvena, devaloke ca ekantasukhasamappitattā ekantakhiḍḍārativasena uppannapamādena maggabrahmacariyavāsaṃ vasituṃ na sakkā. Manussaloko pana vokiṇṇasukhadukkho, idheva apāyopi saggopi paññāyati. Ayaṃ maggabrahmacariyassa kammabhūmi nāma, sā tumhehi laddhā. Tasmā ye vo ime mānussakā khandhā laddhā, te vo lābhā. Yañca vo idaṃ manussattaṃ laddhaṃ, paṭiladdho vo brahmacariyavāsassa khaṇo samayoti. Vuttampi hetaṃ porāṇehi –
这个业地就在这里,也就是此处的道之修习,
在这里,有许多能让人生起警醒的因由。
在那些能让人生起紧迫感、令人警醒的各种事情上,
生起悚惧之后,就要如理作意。巴利
‘‘Ayaṃ kammabhūmi idha maggabhāvanā, Ṭhānāni saṃvejaniyā bahū idha; Saṃvegasaṃvejaniyesu vatthusu, Saṃvegajātova payuñca yoniso’’ti.
3. 第一 色欢喜经 的注释巴利
3. Paṭhamarūpārāmasuttavaṇṇanā
136 在第三经的注释里,“喜色者”是指对诸色欢喜、喜悦。“苦”是指痛苦。“乐”是指以涅槃之乐为乐。“全”是指全部、完全。“说有者,即谓有那么多”是说:有多少存在,就称为有那么多。“这些是他们”里的“vo”只是一个语助词。这是与之相反的:为一切世间所见——意思是:智者们的这种见,与一切世间相反、相违。因为世间认为五蕴是常、是乐、是我、是净,而智者则认为它们是无常、是苦、是无我、是不净。“说为乐”是说它为乐,“知为乐”是知道它为乐。所有这些,都是就涅槃而说的。巴利
136. Tatiye rūpasammuditāti rūpe sammuditā pamoditā. Dukkhāti dukkhitā. Sukhoti nibbānasukhena sukhito. Kevalāti sakalā. Yāvatatthīti vuccatīti yattakā atthīti vuccati. Ete voti ettha vo-kāro nipātamattaṃ. Paccanīkamidaṃ hoti, sabbalokena passatanti yaṃ idaṃ passantānaṃ paṇḍitānaṃ dassanaṃ, taṃ sabbalokena paccanīkaṃ hoti viruddhaṃ. Loko hi pañcakkhandhe niccā sukhā attā subhāti maññati, paṇḍitā aniccā dukkhā anattā asubhāti. Sukhato āhūti sukhanti kathenti. Sukhato vidūti sukhanti jānanti. Sabbametaṃ nibbānameva sandhāya vuttaṃ.
在这里迷失,是指在涅槃上迷失。无智慧,就是指愚人。因为所有九十六种外道都自以为“我们会证得涅槃”,可他们连“涅槃是什么”都不知道。被遮蔽,是指被烦恼盖遮蔽、包裹。不见者的黑暗,是指对看不见的人来说,那就是黑暗。为什么会这样?因为对看不见涅槃、也看不见涅槃之见的愚人来说,涅槃和涅槃之见,就像被乌云遮住的月亮,又像被盖子扣住的盆钵,永远都是黑暗和暗冥。巴利
Sammūḷhetthāti ettha nibbāne sammūḷhā. Aviddasūti bālā. Sabbepi hi channavutipāsaṇḍino ‘‘nibbānaṃ pāpuṇissāmā’’ti saññino honti, te pana ‘‘nibbānaṃ nāma ida’’ntipi na jānanti. Nivutānanti kilesanīvaraṇena nivutānaṃ pariyonaddhānaṃ. Andhakāro apassatanti apassantānaṃ andhakāro hoti. Kiṃ taṃ evaṃ hoti? Nibbānaṃ vā nibbānadassanaṃ vā apassantānañhi bālānaṃ nibbānampi nibbānadassanampi kāḷameghaavacchāditaṃ viya candamaṇḍalaṃ kaṭāhena paṭikujjitapatto viya ca niccakālaṃ tamo ceva andhakāro ca sampajjati.
对于善士,它是敞开的,就像光明对于能看见的人一样。也就是说,对于善士——那些以智慧之见看见涅槃的善士们——涅槃就像光明一样敞开着。涅槃就在眼前,却不知道,就像对法迷失方向的不善巧者一样:涅槃其实很近——或者从自己身上的头发、体毛等某个部位去界定,紧接着就能证得;或者从自己诸蕴的灭尽之道来说,也是应当证得的。涅槃虽然如此近在眼前,但那些走在道上的人,对道与非道之法、或对四谛之法不善巧,所以不知道。巴利
Satañca vivaṭaṃ hoti, āloko passatāmivāti satañca sappurisānaṃ paññādassanena passantānaṃ nibbānaṃ āloko viya vivaṭaṃ hoti. Santike na vijānanti, magā dhammassa akovidāti yaṃ attano sarīre kese vā lomādīsu vā aññatarakoṭṭhāsaṃ paricchinditvā anantarameva adhigantabbato attano vā khandhānaṃ nirodhamaggato santike nibbānaṃ. Taṃ evaṃ santike samānampi maggabhūtā janā maggāmaggadhammassa catusaccadhammassa vā akovidā na jānanti.
未达魔罗领域的人:指还没有进入三界轮回——也就是魔罗住处——的人。除了圣者们,还有谁:除了圣者以外,还有谁能了知涅槃的境界?正知而般涅槃:以阿拉汉的智慧正确了知之后,紧接着就成为漏尽者,以烦恼般涅槃而般涅槃。或者,正确了知之后成为漏尽者,最后以蕴般涅槃而般涅槃。巴利
Māradheyyānupannehīti tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ mārassa nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ anupannehi. Konu aññatra ariyebhīti ṭhapetvā ariye ko nu añño nibbānapadaṃ jānituṃ arahati. Sammadaññāya parinibbantīti arahattapaññāya sammā jānitvā anantarameva anāsavā hutvā kilesaparinibbānena parinibbanti. Atha vā sammadaññāya anāsavā hutvā ante khandhaparinibbānena parinibbāyanti.
4-12. 第二部《色欢喜经》等的注释巴利
4-12. Dutiyarūpārāmasuttādivaṇṇanā
137-145 第四经是把它作成纯粹形式而宣说时,随着能觉悟者的意乐而说的。第五经等则是随着以各种方式觉悟者的意乐而说的。至于它们的含义,本来就是很明显的。巴利
137-145. Catutthaṃ suddhikaṃ katvā desiyamāne bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayena vuttaṃ. Pañcamādīni tathā tathā bujjhantānaṃ ajjhāsayena vuttāni. Attho pana tesaṃ pākaṭoyevāti.
第十五 新旧品巴利
15. Navapurāṇavaggo
《业灭经》的注释巴利
1. Kammanirodhasuttavaṇṇanā
146 146. 在新古品的第一部经里,“新与古”指的是新的和旧的。比丘们,眼是旧业——并不是眼是旧的,只有业才是旧的;但因为眼是从业生起的,所以按照缘的名称这样来说。“造作的”是指由各种缘和合而成。“思所造作的”是指由思策划而成。“应看作受处”是指应被看作受的依处。“由灭而触证解脱”是指通过这三种业的灭而触证解脱。“这被称为”是指这个作为那种解脱所缘的灭,被称为业灭。这样,在这部经里就讲了前分观。巴利
146. Navapurāṇavaggassa paṭhame navapurāṇānīti navāni ca purāṇāni ca. Cakkhu, bhikkhave, purāṇakammanti na cakkhu purāṇaṃ, kammameva purāṇaṃ, kammato pana nibbattattā paccayanāmena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Abhisaṅkhatanti paccayehi abhisamāgantvā kataṃ. Abhisañcetayitanti cetanāya pakappitaṃ. Vedaniyaṃ daṭṭhabbanti vedanāya vatthūti passitabbaṃ. Nirodhā vimuttiṃ phusatīti imassa tividhassa kammassa nirodhena vimuttiṃ phusati. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ tassā vimuttiyā ārammaṇabhūto nirodho kammanirodhoti vuccati. Iti imasmiṃ sutte pubbabhāgavipassanā kathitā.
第二至第五经的注释,讲的是《无常经》《涅槃的适宜经》等。巴利
2-5. Aniccanibbānasappāyasuttādivaṇṇanā
147-150 在第二部经里,“适合涅槃”指的是对涅槃有帮助、能促成涅槃的修行方法。第三部经等也是同样的道理。按顺序来说,这四部经中都结合观禅讲了四种道。巴利
147-150. Dutiye nibbānasappāyanti nibbānassa sappāyaṃ upakārapaṭipadaṃ. Tatiyādīsupi eseva nayo. Paṭipāṭiyā pana catūsupi etesu suttesu saha vipassanāya cattāro maggā kathitā.
第6到第7经的《弟子经》等注释巴利
6-7. Antevāsikasuttādivaṇṇanā
151-152 第六经中,“无弟子”是指没有那些内心潜藏的烦恼。“无老师”是指没有那些会实际表现出来的烦恼。所谓“在他内心安住”,就是这些东西安住在他里面。它们对他起作用,就是压制他、完全压服他,或者教导他。比如“你要这样去做医生的工作,这样去做信使的工作”,以这种教导为本质的作用,就成了他的老师;因为有这些老师,他就被称为“有老师”。这里剩下的内容,应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。第七经也和下面所说的方法一样。巴利
151-152. Chaṭṭhe anantevāsikanti anto vasanakakilesavirahitaṃ. Anācariyakanti ācaraṇakakilesavirahitaṃ . Antassa vasantīti anto assa vasanti. Te naṃ samudācarantīti te etaṃ adhibhavanti ajjhottharanti sikkhāpenti vā. ‘‘Evaṃ vejjakammaṃ karohi, evaṃ dūtakamma’’nti iti sikkhāpanasaṅkhātena samudācaraṇatthenassa te ācariyā nāma honti, tehi ācariyehi sācariyakoti vuccati. Sesamettha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Sattamaṃ heṭṭhā kathitanayameva.
第八经《有因缘经》的注释巴利
8. Atthinukhopariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
153 在第八种方式里,“由于那因缘”是指依靠那个原因。“别离了信”是指没有信、把信抛开。这里说的“信”并不是现量亲证的信,而是指听到别人说“据说是这样、据说是那样”之后生起的信受状态,这句话就是针对这种信说的。在“喜好”等词里,使人生起喜好、使人接受、然后执取“这就是意义”,这种执取的状态叫“喜好”;“据说会这样”的传闻叫“传闻”;坐下来思考某个道理时,那个道理在心中显现,对如此显现的道理执取“这就是意义”,这叫“理思”,也就是对原因的思索。思考道理时生起邪见,执取“这就是意义”,这种状态叫“见审忍”。“当记说究竟智”是指抛开这五种情况后,记说阿罗汉果。在这部经里,讲的是有学和无学者的省察。巴利
153. Aṭṭhame yaṃ pariyāyaṃ āgammāti yaṃ kāraṇaṃ āgamma. Aññatreva saddhāyāti vinā saddhāya saddhaṃ apanetvā. Ettha ca saddhāti na paccakkhā saddhā. Yo pana parassa evaṃ kira evaṃ kirāti kathentassa sutvā uppanno saddahanākāro, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ruciādīsupi rucāpetvā khamāpetvā atthetanti gahaṇākāro ruci nāma, evaṃ kira bhavissatīti anussavanaṃ anussavo, nisīditvā ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ cintentassa kāraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāti, evaṃ upaṭṭhitassa atthetanti gahaṇaṃ ākāraparivitakko nāma, kāraṇavitakkoti attho. Kāraṇaṃ cintentassa pāpikā laddhi uppajjati, taṃ atthesāti gahaṇākāro diṭṭhinijjhānakkhanti nāma. Aññaṃ byākareyyāti imāni pañca ṭhānāni muñcitvā arahattaṃ byākareyya. Imasmiṃ sutte sekhāsekhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā kathitā.
第9至10经:根具足经等的释义巴利
9-10. Indriyasampannasuttādivaṇṇanā
154-155 154-155. 第九经里说的“根具足”,就是指诸根圆满。其中,有人通过反复观照六根而证得阿罗汉果,因为他具备那些无漏的根,所以叫根具足;或者,有人在反复观照眼等六根时,生起了信等诸根,因为他具备这些根,所以叫根具足。世尊就是针对这个,以“于眼根……”等方式详细展开开示,最后说:“比丘,到此为止就是根具足。”第十经的内容,和上面所说的方法相同。巴利
154-155. Navame indriyasampannoti paripuṇṇindriyo. Tattha yena cha indriyāni sammasitvā arahattaṃ pattaṃ, so tehi nibbisevanehi indriyehi samannāgatattā, cakkhādīni vā cha indriyāni sammasantassa uppannehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgatattā paripuṇṇindriyo nāma hoti, taṃ sandhāya bhagavā cakkhundriye cetiādinā nayena desanaṃ vitthāretvā ettāvatā kho bhikkhu indriyasampanno hotīti āha. Dasamaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayamevāti.
第十六品 喜尽品巴利
16. Nandikkhayavaggo
1-4. 内喜灭尽经等的释义巴利
1-4. Ajjhattanandikkhayasuttādivaṇṇanā
156-159 156-159. 在喜尽品的第一部经里,“由喜尽而贪尽,由贪尽而喜尽”这句话,是因为喜和贪在意义上是一回事,所以才这么说。“善解脱”是指通过阿罗汉果的解脱而彻底解脱。其余部分,在这一部经以及第二部经等当中,意思都很明白。巴利
156-159. Nandikkhayavaggassa paṭhame nandikkhayā rāgakkhayo, rāgakkhayā nandikkhayoti nandiyā ca rāgassa ca atthato ekattā vuttaṃ. Suvimuttanti arahattaphalavimuttivasena suṭṭhu vimuttaṃ. Sesamettha dutiyādīsu ca uttānameva.
5-6. 耆婆芒果林定经等的释义巴利
5-6. Jīvakambavanasamādhisuttādivaṇṇanā
160-161 第五经是为缺乏定的人说的,第六经是为缺乏独处的人说的。因为知道那些获得心一境性和身远离的人,他们的业处将会增长,所以才这样说。其中,“okkhāyati”(即paccakkhāyati)的意思是:被了知,变得明显。就这样,在这两部经里,连同观一起,说了四道。巴利
160-161. Pañcamaṃ samādhivikalānaṃ, chaṭṭhaṃ paṭisallānavikalānaṃ cittekaggatañca kāyavivekañca labhantānaṃ etesaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gamissatīti ñatvā kathitaṃ. Tattha okkhāyatīti (paccakkhāyati) paññāyati pākaṭaṃ hoti. Iti dvīsupi etesu saha vipassanāya cattāro maggā kathitā.
7-9. 拘絺罗无常经等的注释巴利
7-9. Koṭṭhikaaniccasuttādivaṇṇanā
162-164 在第七部等三部经里,只讲了长老的解脱成熟之法。巴利
162-164. Sattamādīsu tīsu therassa vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammāva kathitā.
10-12. 《邪见断除经》等经的注释巴利
10-12. Micchādiṭṭhipahānasuttādivaṇṇanā
165-167 第165到167段这三部经,是分别按照不同人的意乐来讲的。它们的含义,应当依照前面已经说过的方式来理解。巴利
165-167. Dasamādīni tīṇi pāṭiyekkena puggalajjhāsayavasena vuttāni. Tesaṃ attho vuttanayeneva veditabboti.
17. 六十略说品巴利
17. Saṭṭhipeyyālavaggo
《内无常意欲经》等经的注释巴利
1-60. Ajjhattaaniccachandasuttādivaṇṇanā
168-227 168-227. 紧接着的是名为“六十重颂”的部分,它的含义很浅显。不过,其中所说的六十部经,是依照“欲应当被断除”这样,针对能够依每一句而觉悟的人的意乐所说的。因此,所有这些经都是按各个不同个人的意乐而分别讲述的。而且在这里,每一部经的结尾都说到,各有三千六百位比丘证得了阿罗汉果。巴利
168-227. Tadanantaro saṭṭhipeyyālo nāma hoti, so uttānatthova. Yāni panettha saṭṭhi suttāni vuttāni, tāni ‘‘chando pahātabbo’’ti evaṃ tassa tasseva padassa vasena bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vuttāni. Iti sabbāni tāni pāṭiyekkena puggalajjhāsayavasena kathitāni. Ekekasuttapariyosāne cettha saṭṭhi saṭṭhi bhikkhū arahattaṃ pattāti.
第十八 大海品巴利
18. Samuddavaggo
第一大海经的注释巴利
1. Paṭhamasamuddasuttavaṇṇanā
228 228. 在《海品》第一经里说“诸比丘,人的眼就是大海”,这是从“难以填满”的意思来说,或者从“沉没、汇入”的意思来说,大海就是眼。因为从大地直到阿迦尼吒梵天界,青等所缘不断汇入眼中,却无法使它变得圆满满足,所以从“难以填满”的意思来说,眼就是大海。而且眼在种种青等所缘中沉没、汇入,不加防护地流注进去,就成了生起烦恼的原因,带着过失而流转,所以从“沉没、汇入”的意思来说,眼也是大海。所谓“它的色流”,应当理解为:就像大海有无量波浪之流一样,这眼海在青等各类所缘汇入时,也有不可计量的色流。所谓“能忍受那色流的人”,就是说能忍受汇入眼海中的色流:对悦意的色不生贪,对不悦意的色不生嗔,对未以舍心观察的不生痴,像这样不让贪等烦恼生起,以舍心而忍受。巴利
228. Samuddavaggassa paṭhame cakkhu, bhikkhave, purisassa samuddoti yadi duppūraṇaṭṭhena yadi vā samuddanaṭṭhena samuddo, cakkhumeva samuddo. Tassa hi pathavito yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā nīlādiārammaṇaṃ samosarantaṃ paripuṇṇabhāvaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ duppūraṇaṭṭhenapi samuddo. Cakkhu ca tesu tesu nīlādīsu ārammaṇesu samuddati, asaṃvutaṃ hutvā osaramānaṃ kilesuppattiyā kāraṇabhāvena sadosagamanena gacchatīti samuddanaṭṭhenapi samuddo. Tassa rūpamayo vegoti samuddassa appamāṇo ūmimayo vego viya tassāpi cakkhusamuddassa samosarantassa nīlādibhedassa ārammaṇassa vasena appameyyo rūpamayo vego veditabbo. Yo taṃ rūpamayaṃ vegaṃ sahatīti yo taṃ cakkhusamudde samosaṭaṃ rūpamayaṃ vegaṃ, manāpe rūpe rāgaṃ, amanāpe dosaṃ, asamapekkhite mohanti evaṃ rāgādikilese anuppādento upekkhakabhāvena sahati.
在有浪等说法中,因为烦恼的波浪而说“有浪”,因为烦恼的漩涡而说“有漩涡”,因为烦恼的鳄鱼而说“有鳄鱼”,因为烦恼的罗刹而说“有罗刹”。又因为愤怒和绝望而说“有浪”,正如经文所说:“比丘们,‘浪的怖畏’就是愤怒和绝望的代名词。”(《如是语》109;《中部》2.162;《增支部》4.122)因为五种欲乐而说“有漩涡”,正如经文所说:“比丘们,‘漩涡的执取’就是五种欲乐的代名词。”(《相应部》4.241)因为女人而说“有鳄鱼”“有罗刹”,正如经文所说:“比丘们,‘鳄鱼罗刹’就是女人的代名词。”(《如是语》109)其余诸段亦同此理。“越度有怖畏难渡之海”:是以波浪怖畏而越度极难克服之险。“已达世间边”:已到达诸行所成世间之尽头;“名为到彼岸者”:被称为已至涅槃之人。巴利
Saūmintiādīsu kilesaūmīhi saūmiṃ. Kilesāvaṭṭehi sāvaṭṭaṃ. Kilesagāhehi sagāhaṃ. Kilesarakkhasehi sarakkhasaṃ. Kodhūpāyāsassa ca vasena saūmiṃ. Vutañhetaṃ ‘‘ūmibhayanti kho, bhikkhave, kodhūpāyāsassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 109; ma. ni. 2.162; a. ni. 4.122). Kāmaguṇavasena sāvaṭṭaṃ. Vutañhetaṃ ‘‘āvaṭṭaggāhoti kho, bhikkhave, pañcannetaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.241). Mātugāmavasena sagāhaṃ sarakkhasaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘gāharakkhasoti kho, bhikkhave, mātugāmassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (itivu. 109). Sesavāresupi eseva nayo. Sabhayaṃ duttaraṃ accatarīti ūmibhayena sabhayaṃ duratikkamaṃ atikkami. Lokantagūti saṅkhāralokassa antaṃ gato. Pāragatoti vuccatīti nibbānaṃ gatoti kathīyati.
2-3. 第二大海经等的注释巴利
2-3. Dutiyasamuddasuttādivaṇṇanā
229-230 229-230. 第二经中,“海”是因为汇入之义而称为海,是因为染污之义、浸湿之义而说。“大部分”是指除了圣弟子以外的人。“已浸没”就是已经湿透、浸透、沉没。“如乱丝、如打结”等文,前面已经详细解释过了。“已舍死者”是指舍离三种死而安住。“无依”是指对三种依无所执著。“为不再有”是为了证得涅槃。“令死王迷惑”是说死王不知道他的去处,他就这样令死王迷惑之后离去。第三经的解释也依照上面所说的方式。巴利
229-230. Dutiye samuddoti samuddanaṭṭhena samuddo, kiledanaṭṭhena temanaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yebhuyyenāti ṭhapetvā ariyasāvake. Samunnāti kilinnā tintā nimuggā. Tantākulakajātātiādi heṭṭhā vitthāritameva. Maccujahoti tayo maccū jahitvā ṭhito. Nirupadhīti tīhi upadhīhi anupadhi. Apunabbhavāyāti nibbānatthāya. Amohayī maccurājanti yathā tassa gatiṃ na jānāti, evaṃ maccurājānaṃ mohetvā gato. Tatiyaṃ vuttanayameva.
乳树譬喻经等的注释巴利
4-6. Khīrarukkhopamasuttādivaṇṇanā
231-233 第四经里,以“未断除”的意义而说“存在”,因此他说“它是未断除的”。“小”:即使像山那么大的色,只要是不可意、不诱人的,就叫做“小”,这说明这样的色也能占据他的心。那更何况是极强的呢?如果是可意的所缘、诱人的事物占据了他的心,在这里还有什么可说的?而且在这里,即使是指甲盖大小的珠宝、珍珠等诱人的事物,也应当知道它就是极强的所缘。“年轻的”等三个词,也只是彼此的同义词。“会击破”:就是会打击或会打碎。第五经里,“那两者”:就是那两者。第六经是直白易懂的。巴利
231-233. Catutthe appahīnaṭṭhena atthi, tenevāha so appahīnoti. Parittāti, pabbatamattampi rūpaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ arajanīyaṃ parittaṃ nāma hoti, evarūpāpissa rūpā cittaṃ pariyādiyantīti dasseti. Ko pana vādo adhimattānanti iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ panassa rajanīyaṃ vatthu cittaṃ pariyādiyatīti ettha kā kathā? Ettha ca nakhapiṭṭhipamāṇampi maṇimuttādi rajanīyaṃ vatthu adhimattārammaṇamevāti veditabbaṃ. Daharotiādīni tīṇipi aññamaññavevacanāneva. Ābhindeyyāti pahareyya padāleyya vā. Pañcame tadubhayanti taṃ ubhayaṃ. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānameva.
第七经《优陀夷经》的注释巴利
7. Udāyīsuttavaṇṇanā
234 在第七经中,“以种种方式”是指以种种理由。“如此趣向”就是指这个。在这部经里,是通过无常来说明无我相的。巴利
234. Sattame anekapariyāyenāti anekehi kāraṇehi. Itipāyanti itipi ayaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte aniccena anattalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ.
第8经《燃烧经》的注释巴利
8. Ādittapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
235 235. 在第八经中,“以随形好执取相”,意思是“手漂亮、脚漂亮”,像这样以随形好的方式执取相。因为“执取相”是整体地抓取,“执取随形好”是分别地抓取。执取相就像鳄鱼,把一切都整个抓住;执取随形好则像水蛭,会分别抓取手、脚等各个部分。不过,这两种执取即使在同一个速行过程中也能发生,在不同速行过程中就更不必说了。巴利
235. Aṭṭhame anubyañjanaso nimittaggāhoti ‘‘hatthā sobhanā pādā sobhanā’’ti evaṃ anubyañjanavasena nimittaggāho. Nimittaggāhoti hi saṃsandetvā gahaṇaṃ, anubyañjanaggāhoti vibhattigahaṇaṃ. Nimittaggāho kumbhīlasadiso sabbameva gaṇhāti, anubyañjanaggāho rattapāsadiso vibhajitvā hatthapādādīsu taṃ taṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ. Ime pana dve gāhā ekajavanavārepi labbhanti, nānājavanavāre vattabbameva natthi.
被相的滋味所束缚:就是被对相的贪味捆住、绑住。识:指业识。如果他在那个时候命终:其实没有任何众生是以染污的心命终的,因为一切众生的命终都只靠有分识发生。这里是为了显示烦恼的可怕,才那样说;或者是按时机来说的。比如在眼门,当所缘出现在面前时,带着贪的心、带着嗔的心或带着痴的心尝受了所缘的滋味之后,就沉入有分;住在有分里之后,便命终。对于在那个时候命终的人,只能预期两种趣向,这句话就是按那个时机来说的。巴利
Nimittassādagathitanti nimittassādena ganthitaṃ baddhaṃ. Viññāṇanti kammaviññāṇaṃ. Tasmiṃ ce samaye kālaṃ kareyyāti na koci saṃkiliṭṭhena cittena kālaṃ karonto nāma atthi. Sabbasattānañhi bhavaṅgeneva kālakiriyā hoti. Kilesabhayaṃ pana dassento evamāha. Samayavasena vā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Cakkhudvārasmiñhi āpāthagate ārammaṇe rattacittaṃ vā duṭṭhacittaṃ vā mūḷhacittaṃ vā ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati, bhavaṅge ṭhatvā kālakiriyaṃ karoti. Tasmiṃ samaye kālaṃ karontassa dveva gatiyo pāṭikaṅkhā, imassa samayassa vasenetaṃ vuttaṃ.
比丘们,我说这个过患,是因为我亲眼看见这要在地狱里承受无数百千年的苦,才这样说——就像有人想用烧得通红的铁棒去烫自己的眼睛。按照这个道理,各处的意思都应该这样理解。“以铁锥”:就是用铁矛。“已被锤平”:是指用铁锥穿透两个耳孔之后,为了钉入地面而反复锤打,所以叫已被锤平。巴利
Imaṃ khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, ādīnavanti imaṃ anekāni vassasatasahassāni niraye anubhavitabbaṃ dukkhaṃ sampassamāno evaṃ vadāmi tattāya ayosalākāya akkhīni añjāpetukāmoti. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo. Ayosaṅkunāti ayasūlena. Sampalimaṭṭhanti dvepi kaṇṇacchiddāni vinivijjhitvā pathaviyaṃ ākoṭanavasena sampalimaṭṭhaṃ.
第三轮里,“已被遍钉”是指:把指甲刀插进去,往上一挑,借着撕扯把它割断、让它倒下,这就叫已被遍钉。第四轮里,“已被遍钉”是指:割断绑缚的根部,让它倒下,这就叫已被遍钉。第五轮里,“已被遍钉”是指:用锋利的刀把身体的触觉器官挑起来,让它倒下,这就叫已被遍钉。这里说的“刀”,应当知道是指有大柄的刀。“睡眠”是指躺下来进入睡梦。‘被具有如此性质的寻思之力所控制,会去破僧’这句话,是在显示寻思能把人带到破僧这种恶业的地步。这里剩下的内容,浅显易懂。巴利
Tatiyavāre sampalimaṭṭhanti nakhacchedanaṃ pavesetvā ukkhipitvā sahadhunaṭṭhena chinditvā pātanavasena sampalimaṭṭhaṃ. Catutthavāre sampalimaṭṭhanti bandhanamūlaṃ chetvā pātanavasena sampalimaṭṭhaṃ. Pañcamavāre sampalimaṭṭhanti tikhiṇāya sattiyā kāyapasādaṃ uppāṭetvā patanavasena sampalimaṭṭhaṃ. Sattiyāti ettha mahatī daṇḍakavāsi veditabbā. Sottanti nipajjitvā niddokkamanaṃ. Yathārūpānaṃ vitakkānaṃ vasaṃ gato saṅghaṃ bhindeyyāti iminā vitakkānaṃ yāva saṅghabhedā pāpakammāvahanatā dassitā. Sesamettha uttānameva.
第9到第10经:第一手足譬喻经等的注释巴利
9-10. Paṭhamahatthapādopamasuttādivaṇṇanā
236-237 236-237. 第九经里说“诸比丘,手存在时”,意思是当手存在的时候。第十经里说“不存在”,这是根据能觉悟者的意乐来说的。在这两部经里,都只显示了果报上的苦与乐,借此说明了轮回与还灭。巴利
236-237. Navame hatthesu, bhikkhave, satīti hatthesu vijjamānesu. Dasame na hotīti vuccamāne bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vuttaṃ. Dvīsupi cetesu vipākasukhadukkhameva dassetvā vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti.
19. 毒蛇品巴利
19. Āsīvisavaggo
《毒蛇譬喻经》的注释巴利
1. Āsīvisopamasuttavaṇṇanā
238 238. 在《蛇品》第一经中,“世尊告诉比丘们”:这是指世尊对那些修一行、二行、三行、四行、五行的修行者——他们行持相同、精勤相应——以及所有以苦相为业处的修行者,在他们围绕而坐时,世尊告诉这些比丘们。这部经确实是随顺个人的意乐而说的。在诸人中,也是针对那些广分别知者、散居各方、以苦相为业处的比丘们,他们在礼拜时间前来,围绕导师坐下,因此说了此经。即便如此,这部经实际上也是四种人的助缘:略开知者、广分别知者、引导者、句义最胜者。其中,略开知者只要此经的论母一被安立,就能证得阿罗汉果;广分别知者通过论母的详细解说而证得;引导者则通过反复读诵此经、各处请教、如理作意、亲近善知识、承事善知识、服侍善知识,而证得阿罗汉果;对于句义最胜者,此经在未来将成为其习气种子。如此,世尊了知此经对一切人都有利益后,便以极大的精进力——犹如举起须弥山,犹如展开虚空,又犹如摇撼轮围山一般——开始宣讲这部《毒蛇譬喻经》,说道:“诸比丘!”巴利
238. Āsīvisavaggassa paṭhame bhikkhū āmantesīti ekacārikadvicārikaticārikacatucārikapañcacārike sabhāgavuttino kārake yuttapayutte sabbepi dukkhalakkhaṇakammaṭṭhānike parivāretvā nisinne yogāvacare bhikkhū āmantesi. Idañhi suttaṃ puggalajjhāsayena vuttaṃ. Puggalesupi vipañcitaññūnaṃ disāvāsikānaṃ dukkhalakkhaṇakammaṭṭhānikānaṃ upaṭṭhānavelāya āgantvā satthāraṃ parivāretvā nisinnānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi ugghaṭitaññūādīnaṃ catunnampi puggalānaṃ paccayabhūtamevetaṃ. Ugghaṭitaññū puggalo hi imassa suttassa mātikānikkhepeneva arahattaṃ pāpuṇissati, vipañcitaññū mātikāya vitthārabhājanena, neyyapuggalo imameva suttaṃ sajjhāyanto paripucchanto yoniso manasikaronto kalyāṇamitte sevanto bhajanto payirupāsanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇissati. Padaparamassetaṃ suttaṃ anāgate vāsanā bhavissatīti evaṃ sabbesampi upakārabhāvaṃ ñatvā bhagavā sineruṃ ukkhipanto viya ākāsaṃ vitthārento viya cakkavāḷapabbataṃ kampento viya ca mahantena ussāhena seyyathāpi, bhikkhaveti imaṃ āsīvisopamasuttaṃ ārabhi.
这里说的“四种毒蛇”,就是木口蛇、脓口蛇、火口蛇、刀口蛇这四种。其中,被木口蛇咬到的人,整个身体会像干木头一样僵硬,关节和骨节处尤其严重,就像被铁钉死死钉住一样。被脓口蛇咬到的人,身体会像熟透烂掉的菠萝蜜一样变成脓烂状态,往外流渗,就像把水倒进滤网里一样。被火口蛇咬到的人,整个身体会被烧尽,像一把灰、一把糠壳那样四散飞落。被刀口蛇咬到的人,整个身体会裂开,就像被雷劈中的地方,又像被猛兽大口撕咬过的伤口,关节和伤口都裂开。这样,按照毒性的不同,分成了这四种毒蛇。巴利
Tattha cattāro āsīvisāti kaṭṭhamukho, pūtimukho, aggimukho, satthamukhoti ime cattāro. Tesu kaṭṭhamukhena daṭṭhassa sakalasarīraṃ sukkhakaṭṭhaṃ viya thaddhaṃ hoti, sandhipabbesu adhimattaṃ ayasūlasamappitaṃ viya tiṭṭhati. Pūtimukhena daṭṭhassa pakkapūtipanasaṃ viya vipubbakabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā paggharati , caṅgavāre pakkhittaudakaṃ viya hoti. Aggimukhena daṭṭhassa sakalasarīraṃ jhāyitvā bhasmamuṭṭhi viya thusamuṭṭhi viya ca vippakirīyati. Sattamukhena daṭṭhassa sakalasarīraṃ bhijjati, asanipātaṭṭhānaṃ viya mahānikhādanena khatasandhimukhaṃ viya ca hoti. Evaṃ visavasena vibhattā cattāro āsīvisā.
不过,这些蛇按毒力发作方式的差别,共有十六种。木口蛇的毒有四种:咬毒、见毒、触毒、风毒。因此,无论是被它咬到、被它看见、被它碰到,还是被它的毒风所吹,身体都会像前面说的那样僵硬。其余几种蛇也照这样类推。这样,按毒力发作方式的差别,就有十六种。巴利
Visavegavikārena panete soḷasa honti. Kaṭṭhamukho hi daṭṭhaviso, diṭṭhaviso, phuṭṭhaviso, vātavisoti catubbidho hoti. Tena hi daṭṭhampi diṭṭhampi phuṭṭhampi tassa vātena pahaṭampi sarīraṃ vuttappakārena thaddhaṃ hoti. Sesesupi eseva nayoti. Evaṃ visavegavikāravasena soḷasa honti.
再者,依照补特伽罗的施设方式,就有六十四种。怎么分呢?先拿木口蛇来说,咬毒可以分为四种:毒已发但不算剧毒、是剧毒但毒未发、既毒已发又是剧毒、既非毒已发也非剧毒。其中,如果毒像燃烧的草炬之火那样迅速上窜,侵入眼睛、占据肩部、占据头部之后停在那里,就像宝珠蛇等的毒那样,这种情况就达到可说的程度;但如果念咒翻转之后,向耳中吹气,或用棍棒一击,毒就降下,只停留在被咬的地方,这叫作“毒已发但不算剧毒”。如果毒缓慢上升,而且所到之处就像冷水一样,如同水蛇等的毒,即使过了十二年,也会在耳背、肩背等处表现为肿疮、疖子之类,而念咒翻转等法做起来时,毒也不会迅速降下,这叫作“是剧毒但毒未发”。如果毒迅速上升,却不能迅速降下,如同净蛇等的毒,这叫作“既毒已发又是剧毒”。如果毒本身很弱,即使要让它降下也很容易就降下,如同青蛇、法尼蛇等的毒,这叫作“既非毒已发也非剧毒”。用这个方法,木口蛇的咬毒等,以及脓口蛇等的咬毒等,也都应当这样理解。如此,依照补特伽罗的施设方式,就是六十四种。巴利
Puna puggalapaṇṇattivasena catusaṭṭhi honti. Kathaṃ? Kaṭṭhamukhesu tāva daṭṭhaviso ca āgataviso no ghoraviso, ghoraviso no āgataviso, āgataviso ceva ghoraviso ca, nevāgataviso na ghoravisoti catubbidho hoti. Tattha yassa visaṃ sampajjalitatiṇukkāya aggi viya sīghaṃ abhiruhitvā akkhīni gahetvā khandhaṃ gahetvā sīsaṃ gahetvā ṭhitanti vattabbataṃ āpajjati maṇisappādīnaṃ visaṃ viya, mantaṃ pana parivattetvā kaṇṇavātaṃ datvā daṇḍakena pahaṭamatte otaritvā daṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ āgataviso no ghoraviso nāma. Yassa pana visaṃ saṇikaṃ abhiruhati, āruḷhāruḷhaṭṭhāne pana ayaṃ sītaudakaṃ viya hoti udakasappādīnaṃ visaṃ viya, dvādasavassaccayenāpi kaṇṇapiṭṭhikhandhapiṭṭhikādīsu gaṇḍapiḷakādivasena paññāyati, mantaparivattanādīsu ca kayiramānāsu sīghaṃ na otarati, ayaṃ ghoraviso no āgataviso nāma. Yassa pana visaṃ sīghaṃ abhiruhati, na sīghaṃ otarati aneḷakasappādīnaṃ visaṃ viya, ayaṃ āgataviso ceva ghoraviso ca. Yassa pana visaṃ mandaṃ hoti, otāriyamānampi sukheneva otarati nīlasappadhammanisappādīnaṃ visaṃ viya, ayaṃ nevāgataviso na ghoraviso nāma. Iminā upāyena kaṭṭhamukhe daṭṭhavisādayo pūtimukhādīsu ca daṭṭhavisādayo veditabbāti. Evaṃ puggalapaṇṇattivasena catusaṭṭhi.
在这些当中,按照“卵生龙”等(《相应部》3.342-344)的说法,依生处把每一种分成四类,就成了二百五十六种。再按水生、陆生翻倍,就成了五百一十二种。再按能随意变形、不能随意变形翻倍,就成了一千零二十四种。不过,如果从所行道的反方向逐步缩减,就只归结为木口蛇等四种。世尊就是针对这四种而说:“诸比丘,譬如四种毒蛇。”因为这是从类别上来摄取的。巴利
Tesu ‘‘aṇḍajā nāgā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.342-344) yonivasena ekekaṃ catudhā vibhajitvā chapaṇṇāsādhikāni dve satāni honti. Te jalajāthalajāti dviguṇitā dvādasādhikāni pañcasatāni honti, te kāmarūpaakāmarūpānaṃ vasena dviguṇitā catuvīsādhikasahassasaṅkhā honti. Puna gatamaggassa paṭilomato saṃkhippamānā kaṭṭhamukhādivasena cattārova hontīti. Te sandhāya bhagavā ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, cattāro āsīvisā’’ti āha. Kulavasena hi ete gahitā.
在这里,“毒蛇”既指“被注入毒的”,也指“所食成毒的”,还指“毒像剑一样的”。
“被注入毒的”,是说毒好像被灌注到全身一样存留在体内,并且能注入别人和自己身上,这就是它的意思。
“所食成毒的”,是说它们无论吃什么、受用什么,那一样都会变成毒,所以毒是它们所食之物,因此叫“毒蛇”。
“毒像剑一样的”,是说它们的毒像剑一样锋利,能够切断致命要害,因此叫“毒蛇”。这里的词义应当这样理解。
“具大威力”,是说具有炽盛的威力,具有强大的威力。
“剧毒”,是说具有难以摧伏的毒。巴利
Tattha āsīvisāti āsittavisātipi āsīvisā, asitavisātipi āsīvisā, asisadisavisātipi āsīvisā. Āsittavisāti sakalakāye āsiñcitvā viya ṭhapitavisā, parassa ca attano sarīre ca āsiñcanavisāti attho. Asitavisāti yaṃ yaṃ etehi asitaṃ hoti paribhuttaṃ, taṃ taṃ visameva sampajjati, tasmā asitaṃ visaṃ hoti etesanti āsīvisā. Asisadisavisāti asiviya tikhiṇaṃ paramammacchedanasamatthaṃ visaṃ etesanti āsīvisāti evamettha vacanattho veditabbo. Uggatejāti uggatatejā balavatejā. Ghoravisāti dunnimmaddanavisā.
“应当这样说”,是为了让他去照料毒蛇才这样说的。因为国王们让人把毒蛇抓来后,会这样养着它们:心想“我们要让那样的盗贼被这些蛇咬死”,或者“围城的时候,我们就把这些蛇扔向敌军”,或者“当我们打不过敌军时,就吃好饭、上妙床,让这些蛇咬自己,不落到敌人手里,按自己的心意死去”。对于那些不想让盗贼马上死、而是希望“让他这样长久受苦之后再死”的人,就对那个人这样说:“喂,男子!这四条毒蛇……”巴利
Evaṃ vadeyyunti paṭijaggāpanatthaṃ evaṃ vadeyyuṃ. Rājāno hi āsīvise gāhāpetvā – ‘‘tathārūpe core vā etehi ḍaṃsāpetvā māressāma, nagarūparodhakāle parasenāya vā taṃ khipissāma, parabalaṃ nimmaddetuṃ asakkontā subhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā varasayanaṃ āruyha etehi attānaṃ ḍaṃsāpetvā sattūnaṃ vasaṃ anāgacchantā attano ruciyā marissāmā’’ti āsīvise jaggāpenti. Te yaṃ coraṃ sahasāva māretuṃ na icchanti, ‘‘evamete dīgharattaṃ dukkhappatto hutvā marissantī’’ti icchantā taṃ purisaṃ evaṃ vadanti ime te ambho purisa cattāro āsīvisāti.
这里,“时时”就是一次又一次、按时按刻。“应当让它们盘伏”就是应当让它们躺下。“或某一条或另一条”是指在木口蛇等当中随便哪一条。“喂,男子,你该做什么,就去做吧!”这句话应当理解为那个帮忙办事的人说的话。据说,他们这样把毒蛇安置到那人身上后,就对关在四个笼子里的毒蛇通报说:“这是你们的侍者。”于是,一条蛇爬出来,顺着那男子的右脚往上爬,从右手腕开始缠住右手,在右耳孔根部竖起蛇头,发出“嘶嘶”声后盘伏下来。另一条顺着左脚往上爬,也同样缠住左手,在左耳孔根部竖起蛇头,发出“嘶嘶”声后盘伏下来。第三条爬出来,从正面往上爬,缠住腹部,在喉口根部竖起蛇头,发出“嘶嘶”声后盘伏下来。第四条从背后往上爬,缠住脖子,把蛇头放在头顶上,发出“嘶嘶”声后盘伏下来。巴利
Tattha kālena kālanti kāle kāle. Saṃvesetabbāti nipajjāpetabbā. Aññataro vā aññataro vāti kaṭṭhamukhādīsu yo koci. Yaṃ te ambho purisa karaṇīyaṃ, taṃ karohīti idaṃ atthacarakassa vacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tassa kira purisassa evaṃ āsīvise paṭipādetvā ‘ayaṃ vo upaṭṭhāko’ti catūsu peḷāsu ṭhapitānaṃ āsīvisānaṃ ārocenti. Atheko nikkhamitvā āgamma tassa purisassa dakkhiṇapādānusārena abhiruhitvā dakkhiṇahatthaṃ maṇibandhato paṭṭhāya veṭhetvā dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotamūle phaṇaṃ katvā susūti karonto nipajji. Aparo vāmapādānusārena abhiruhitvā tatheva vāmahatthaṃ veṭhetvā vāmakaṇṇasotamūle phaṇaṃ katvā susūti karonto nipajji, tatiyo nikkhamitvā abhimukhaṃ abhiruhitvā kucchiṃ veṭhetvā galavāṭakamūle phaṇaṃ katvā susūti karonto nipajji, catuttho piṭṭhibhāgena abhiruhitvā gīvaṃ veṭhetvā uparimuddhani phaṇaṃ ṭhapetvā susūti karonto nipajji.
就这样,当四条毒蛇在他身体各部位上生起时,有一个为那个男子办事的人看见了他,问道:“喂,男子,你得到了什么?”那人回答说:“先生,这些是国王赐给我的种种装饰品:有的像戴在手上的手镯,有的像戴在臂上的臂环,有的像缠在肚子上的裹腹布,有的像挂在耳朵上的耳饰,有的像戴在脖子上的珍珠项链,有的像戴在头上的头饰。”那人听了之后说:“喂,你这个愚痴的瞎子,别以为‘国王高兴了,才赐给我这些装饰品’。你是冒犯了国王的盗贼,而这四条毒蛇极难伺候、极难照料。一条想站起来的时候,另一条想洗澡;一条想洗澡的时候,另一条想吃东西;一条想吃东西的时候,另一条想躺下。它们当中谁的要求得不到满足,就会当场咬死你。”“可是,先生,既然这样,有没有什么能安全脱身的办法呢?”“有。看出国王的部下们四散开来,逃跑就是安全的办法。”这样说完之后,他应该对他说:“你该做什么,就去做吧。”巴利
Evaṃ catūsu āsīvisesu sarīraṭṭhakesuyeva jātesu eko tassa purisassa atthacarakapuriso taṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ te, bho purisa, laddha’’nti, pucchi. Tato tena ‘‘ime me, bho, hatthesu hatthakaṭakaṃ viya bāhāsu keyūraṃ viya kucchimhi kucchiveṭhanasāṭako viya kaṇṇesu kaṇṇacūḷikā viya gale muttāvaliyo viya sīse sīsapasādhanaṃ viya keci alaṅkāravisesā raññā dinnā’’ti vutte so āha – ‘‘bho andhabāla, mā evaṃ maññittha ‘raññā me tuṭṭhenetaṃ pasādhanaṃ dinna’nti. Tvaṃ rañño āgucārī coro, ime ca cattāro āsīvisā durupaṭṭhāhā duppaṭijaggiyā, ekasmiṃ uṭṭhātukāme eko nhāyitukāmo hoti, ekasmiṃ nhāyitukāme eko bhuñjitukāmo, ekasmiṃ bhuñjitukāme eko nipajjitukāmo. Tesu yasseva icchā na pūrati, so tattheva ḍaṃsitvā māretī’’ti. Atthi pana, bho, evaṃ sante koci sotthimaggoti? Āma, rājapurisānaṃ vikkhittabhāvaṃ ñatvā palāyanaṃ sotthibhāvoti vatvā ‘‘yaṃ te karaṇīyaṃ, taṃ karohī’’ti vadeyya.
那人听了这话,看到四条毒蛇正处在疏忽松懈的时候,又看到国王的差役已经离开,就用左手缠住右手,把蛇的头冠按在右耳边的发卷上,像抚摸睡着的毒蛇的身体一样,慢慢把它挪开。用同样的办法把其余的蛇也一一挪开后,他因为害怕这些蛇,就逃走了。这时,那些毒蛇心想:“这是国王派给我们的侍者。”于是紧追不舍地跟了上来。就是针对这个情况才说:“比丘们,那时那个人因为害怕四条毒蛇……便逃走了。”巴利
Taṃ sutvā itaro catunnaṃ āsīvisānaṃ pamādakkhaṇaṃ rājapurisehi ca pavivittaṃ disvā, vāmahatthena dakkhiṇahatthaṃ veṭhetvā, dakkhiṇakaṇṇacūḷikāya phaṇaṃ ṭhapetvā, sayitāsīvisassa sarīraṃ parimajjanto viya saṇikaṃ taṃ apanetvā, eteneva upāyena sesepi apanetvā tesaṃ bhīto palāyeyya. Atha naṃ te āsīvisā ‘‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ raññā upaṭṭhāko dinno’’ti anubandhamānā āgaccheyyuṃ. Idaṃ sandhāya atha kho so, bhikkhave, puriso bhīto catunnaṃ āsīvisānaṃ…pe… palāyethāti vuttaṃ.
那人一边逃跑,一边不停地回头张望自己走过的路。国王听说“那个人逃跑了”,就琢磨:“谁能追上他、把他杀掉呢?”他四处寻找,找到了那人的五个死对头,就派他们去:“去,追上他,把他杀了。”这时,为那人效力的人得知了这个消息,就去告诉他。他因此更加恐惧,拼命逃跑。正是针对这个情况,才说了“那时他们会对那人这样说”等话。巴利
Tasmiṃ pana purise evaṃ āgatamaggaṃ oloketvā oloketvā palāyante rājā ‘‘palāto so puriso’’ti sutvā ‘‘ko nu kho taṃ anubandhitvā ghātetuṃ sakkhissatī’’ti vicinanto tasseva paccatthike pañca jane labhitvā ‘‘gacchatha naṃ anubandhitvā ghātethā’’ti peseyya. Athassa atthacarā purisā taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā āroceyyuṃ. So bhiyyosomattāya bhīto palāyetha. Imamatthaṃ sandhāya tamenaṃ evaṃ vadeyyuntiādi vuttaṃ.
第六位是潜伏在身边的杀手。大臣们对国王说:起初他被毒蛇追赶,东躲西骗地逃命,现在又被五个仇敌追赶,逃得更拼命了。这样根本抓不住他,但可以用亲近拉拢的办法。所以,请派一个从他小时候起就和他一起吃喝、有交情的潜伏杀手去。国王就寻访后把他派了过去,这就是那个潜伏在身边的杀手。巴利
Chaṭṭho antaracaro vadhakoti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ āsīvisehi anubaddho ito cito ca te vañcento palāyi, idāni pañcahi paccatthikehi anubaddho suṭṭhutaraṃ palāyati, na sakkā so evaṃ gahetuṃ, upalāḷanāya pana sakkā, tasmā daharakālato paṭṭhāya ekato khāditvā ca pivitvā ca santhavaṃ antaracaraṃ vadhakamassa pesethā’’ti amaccehi vuttena raññā pariyesitvā pesito antaracaro vadhako.
他转头回望,看见一边嗅着足迹一边急速追来的四条毒蛇、五个死对头杀手,以及第六个潜伏在内部的杀手,那第六个杀手一边追来一边喊:“喂,回来!别逃了!跟妻子儿女一起享受欲乐,安稳过日子吧!”他看见他这样追来,更加惊恐,慌不择路地逃跑,这时望见边境地区迎面有一座只有六户人家的空村。他只会进入一座空无一物的村子——因为那里没有财物、谷物、床座、椅子等,所以只会进入一座空无一物的村子。“空无”和“空旷”都是同一个意思的另一种说法。他会去摸索——意思是:他心想“如果有水,我就喝;如果有饭,我就吃”,于是打开容器,把手伸进去摸索。巴利
So passeyya suññaṃ gāmanti nivattitvā olokento padaṃ ghāyitvā ghāyitvā vegenāgacchante cattāro āsīvise pañca vadhake paccatthike chaṭṭhañca antaracaraṃ vadhakaṃ ‘‘nivatta bho, mā palāyi, puttadārena saddhiṃ kāme paribhuñjanto sukhaṃ vasissasī’’ti vatvā āgacchantaṃ disvā, bhiyyosomattāya yena vā tena vā palāyanto paccantaraṭṭhe abhimukhagataṃ ekaṃ chakuṭikaṃ suññaṃ gāmaṃ passeyya. Rittakaññeva paviseyyāti dhanadhaññamañcapīṭhādīhi virahitattā rittakaññeva paviseyya. Tucchakaṃ suññakanti etasseva vevacanaṃ. Parimaseyyāti ‘‘sace pānīyaṃ bhavissati, pivissāmi, sace bhattaṃ bhavissati, bhuñjissāmī’’ti bhājanaṃ vivaritvā hatthaṃ anto pavesetvā parimaseyya.
那人在这六间屋子里什么都没得到。村子中央有一棵枝叶茂密、能遮阴的树,树下铺着一块弯木板。他看见后,心想:“我先在这里坐一会儿。”于是走过去坐下,微风轻轻吹拂着他,他享受着哪怕只是一点点清凉的快乐,把它当作安稳的舒适来受用。这时,有几个为他办事的人从外面得知了情况,赶来对那人这样说:“喂,汉子!现在,喂,汉子!有盗贼,是屠村的盗贼!我们在这里能得到什么,就抢走或者杀掉。”来了六个屠村的盗贼。巴利
Tamenaṃevaṃ vadeyyunti channaṃ gharānaṃ ekagharepi kiñci alabhitvā gāmamajjhe eko sandacchāyo rukkho atthi, tattha vaṅkaphalakaṃ atthataṃ disvā, ‘‘idha tāva nisīdissāmī’’ti gantvā, tattha nisinnaṃ mandamandena vātena bījiyamānaṃ tattakamattampi sukhaṃ santato assādayamānaṃ, tamenaṃ purisaṃ kecideva atthacarakā bahi pavattiṃ ñatvā āgatā evaṃ vadeyyuṃ. Idāni ambho purisāti ambho, purisa, idāni. Corā gāmaghātakāti ‘‘yadevettha labhissāma, taṃ gaṇhissāma vā ghātessāma vā’’ti āgatā cha gāmaghātakacorā.
“水之大洋”是指又深又广的水。因为如果只是深却不广,或者只是广却不深,都不能称为“大洋”;只有又深又广的水,才得到这个名称。“有危险、有怖畏”:因为那四条毒蛇、五个杀手、第六个内应杀手,以及六个屠村的盗贼,所以说有危险、有怖畏。“安稳、无怖畏”:因为那些毒蛇等都不存在,所以安稳、无怖畏,就像一座有种种美妙园林、丰富饮食、如同天城一般的地方。“却没有渡过去的船”:就是没有像“乘这条船从此岸渡到彼岸”那样备好的渡船。也没有“渡过去的桥”:就是木桥、步行桥、车桥等任何一种渡桥都没有。“站着的那位是婆罗门”:他其实并不是婆罗门。为什么称他为婆罗门呢?因为他排除了这么多敌人,或者是为了转换说法,指出一位诸漏已尽的婆罗门,所以这样说。巴利
Udakaṇṇavanti gambhīraṃ puthulaṃ udakaṃ. Gambhīrampi hi aputhulaṃ, puthulaṃ vā agambhīraṃ, na aṇṇavoti vuccati, yampana gambhīrañca puthulañca, tassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sāsaṅkaṃ sappaṭibhayanti catunnaṃ āsīvisānaṃ pañcannaṃ vadhakānaṃ chaṭṭhassa antaracarassa channañca gāmaghātakacorānaṃ vasena sāsaṅkaṃ sappaṭibhayaṃ. Khemaṃ appaṭibhayanti tesaṃyeva āsīvisādīnaṃ abhāvena khemañca nibbhayañca vicitrauyyānavaraṃ bahvannapānaṃ devanagarasadisaṃ. Na cassa nāvā santāraṇīti ‘‘imāya nāvāya orimatīrato paratīraṃ gamissantī’’ti evaṃ ṭhapitā ca santāraṇī nāvā na bhaveyya. Uttarasetu vāti rukkhasetu-jaṅghasetu-sakaṭasetūnaṃ aññataro uttarasetu vā na bhaveyya. Tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇoti na kho esa brāhmaṇo. Kasmā naṃ brāhmaṇoti āha? Ettakānaṃ paccatthikānaṃ bāhitattā, desanaṃ vā vinivattento ekaṃ khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇaṃ dassetumpi evamāha.
那人就这样渡过去之后,四条毒蛇心想:“到底没让我们逮住你。今天本该把你嚼得稀烂,扔掉你这条命。”五个敌人心想:“到底没让我们逮住你。今天本该把你团团围住,一节一节砍下你的肢体,然后到国王那里领到一百或一千的赏钱。”第六个内应杀手心想:“到底没让我逮住你。今天我本该用那水晶般闪亮的剑砍下你的脑袋,得到将军的位子,享受荣华富贵。”六个盗贼心想:“到底没让我们逮住你。今天我们本该用种种刑罚折磨你,逼你交出许多财物。”他们这样盘算着,却没法进入那片汪洋大水,又因为国王的命令而恼怒,不敢往别处去,就困在那里,干枯而死。巴利
Tasmiṃ pana evaṃ uttiṇṇe cattāro āsīvisā ‘‘na laddho vatāsi amhehi, ajja te murumurāya jīvitaṃ khāditvā chaḍḍeyyāma’’. Pañca paccatthikā ‘‘na laddho vatāsi amhehi, ajja te parivāretvā aṅgamaṅgāni chinditvā rañño santikaṃ gatā sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā labheyyāma’’. Chaṭṭho antaracaro ‘‘na laddho vatāsi mayā, ajja te phalikavaṇṇena asinā sīsaṃ chinditvā, senāpatiṭṭhānaṃ labhitvā sampattiṃ anubhaveyyaṃ’’. Cha corā ‘‘na laddho vatāsi amhehi, ajja te vividhāni kammakāraṇāni kāretvā bahudhanaṃ āharāpessāmā’’ti cintetvā, udakaṇṇavaṃ otarituṃ asakkontā rañño āṇāya kopitattā parato gantumpi avisahantā tattheva sussitvā mareyyuṃ.
关于“我的这则譬喻”,这里应当从开头这样理解譬喻与所喻的对应关系:业要看如国王,犯了王法的人要看作依止轮回流转的凡夫。四条毒蛇好比四大种,国王把那四条毒蛇交给那人看管的时刻,就好比业在凡夫结生的刹那赋予他四大种。用“趁这些毒蛇疏忽、国王的侍卫离开的时候,你赶紧出来,汉子,去做你该做的事”这番话来表示“你逃吧”,就好比导师为这位比丘讲说四大种的业处之后,对他说:“你要对这四大种厌离、离欲,这样就能从轮回流转中解脱出来。”那人听了效力者的话,趁毒蛇疏忽、侍卫离开的时候,便朝任何方向逃走;同样,这位比丘从导师那里得到业处之后,为了从四大毒蛇般的大种中解脱,便以智慧逃遁,从而逃离。巴利
Upamā kho myāyanti ettha evaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ – rājā viya hi kammaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, rājāparādhikapuriso viya vaṭṭanissito puthujjano. Cattāro āsīvisā viya cattāri mahābhūtāni, rañño tassa cattāro āsīvise paṭicchāpitakālo viya kammunā puthujjanassa paṭisandhikkhaṇeyeva catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ dinnakālo. ‘‘Imesaṃ āsīvisānaṃ pamādakkhaṇe rājapurisānañca vivittakkhaṇe nikkhamitvā yaṃ te ambho, purisa, karaṇīyaṃ, taṃ karohī’’ti vacanena ‘‘palāyassū’’ti vuttakālo viya satthārā imassa bhikkhuno mahābhūtakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā ‘‘imesu catūsu mahābhūtesu nibbinda virajja, evaṃ vaṭṭato parimuccissasī’’ti kathitakālo, tassa purisassa atthacarakavacanaṃ sutvā catunnaṃ āsīvisānaṃ pamādakkhaṇe rājapurisānañca vivittakkhaṇe nikkhamitvā yena vā tena vā palāyanaṃ viya imassa bhikkhuno satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ labhitvā mahābhūtāsīvisehi parimuccanatthāya ñāṇapalāyanena palāyanaṃ.
现在,这四大种的名称,也就是在“地界、水界”等说法中所讲的四大种论、五取蕴论和处论,都应该按照《清净道论》里详细说明的方式来理解。在这里,地界应当看作像木口毒蛇一样,其余诸界则应当看作像腐口毒蛇、火口毒蛇、刀口毒蛇一样。就像被木口毒蛇咬了之后,整个身体会变得僵硬,地界被扰乱时也是这样;又像被腐口毒蛇等咬了之后,身体会流脓、燃烧、溃烂,水界、火界、风界被扰乱时也是这样。因此,注疏师们说:巴利
Idāni catunnetaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ adhivacanaṃ pathavīdhātuyā āpodhātuyātiādīsu catumahābhūtakathā ca pañcupādānakkhandhakathā ca āyatanakathā ca visuddhimagge vitthāritanayeneva veditabbā. Ettha ca kaṭṭhamukhaāsīviso viya pathavīdhātu daṭṭhabbā, pūtimukhaaggimukhasatthamukhā viya sesadhātuyo. Yatheva hi kaṭṭhamukhena daṭṭhassa sakalakāyo thaddho hoti, evaṃ pathavīdhātupakopenāpi. Yathā ca pūtimukhādīhi daṭṭhassa paggharati ceva jhāyati ca chijjati ca, evaṃ āpodhātutejodhātuvāyodhātupakopenāpīti. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā –
身体会变得僵硬,就像被木口蛇咬了一样;
地界一旦紊乱,他就会像被木口毒蛇咬到一样。
身体会腐烂发臭,或者被腐口者咬到;
因为水界紊乱,他也正如被腐口毒蛇咬伤一样。
身体变得滚烫,就像被火口咬到一样;
因为火界失调,他也正如被火口毒蛇咬伤一样。
身体被切割,或被刀刃刺穿;
因为风界紊乱,他正如刀口所伤一般。巴利
‘‘Patthaddho bhavatī kāyo, daṭṭho kaṭṭhamukhena vā; Pathavīdhātupakopena, hoti kaṭṭhamukheva so. ‘‘Pūtiko bhavatī kāyo, daṭṭho pūtimukhena vā; Āpodhātupakopena, hoti pūtimukheva so. ‘‘Santatto bhavatī kāyo, daṭṭho aggimukhena vā; Tejodhātupakopena, hoti aggimukheva so. ‘‘Sañchinno bhavatī kāyo, daṭṭho satthamukhena vā; Vāyodhātupakopena, hoti satthamukheva so’’ti. –
如是,首先在这里应当尤其了知相似性。巴利
Evaṃ tāvettha visesato sadisabhāvo veditabbo.
不过,从共同特征来看,应当知道它们与毒蛇的相似之处,原因有这些:住处、毒力变化、执取无益之物、难以照料、难以亲近、不知感恩、不加区分地行事、有无穷的过失与祸患。其中,“住处”是说:毒蛇的住处是蚁垤,它们就住在那里;四大种的住处则是这身体的蚁垤。毒蛇的住处也包括树洞、草丛、落叶堆、垃圾堆,它们也住在这些地方;四大种则以身体的孔洞、身体的密丛、身体的垃圾堆为住处。如此,首先应当知道从住处来说的相似性。巴利
Avisesato pana āsayato visavegavikārato anatthaggahaṇato durupaṭṭhānato durāsadato akataññutato avisesakārito anantadosūpaddavatoti imehi kāraṇehi etesaṃ āsīvisasadisatā veditabbā. Tattha āsayatoti āsīvisānañhi vammiko āsayo, tattheva te vasanti. Mahābhūtānampi kāyavammiko āsayo . Āsīvisānañca rukkhasusiratiṇapaṇṇagahanasaṅkāraṭṭhānānipi āsayo. Etesupi hi te vasanti. Mahābhūtānampi kāyasusiraṃ kāyagahanaṃ kāyasaṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ āsayoti. Evaṃ tāva āsayato sadisatā veditabbā.
从毒力变化来说:毒蛇按种类分,有木口蛇等四种。其中每一种再按毒的变化方式来分,又有咬毒等四种。大种按各自的特性分,有地等四种。这里每一种又按业等起等方式分为四种。应当这样理解由毒力变化而来的相似性。巴利
Visavegavikāratoti āsīvisā hi kulavasena kaṭṭhamukhādibhedato cattāro. Tattha ekeko visavikārato vibhajjamāno daṭṭhavisādivasena catubbidho hoti. Mahābhūtānipi paccattalakkhaṇavasena pathavīādibhedato cattāri. Ettha ekekaṃ kammasamuṭṭhānādivasena catubbidhaṃ hoti. Evaṃ visavegavikārato sadisatā veditabbā.
从“执取无益”这个角度来说:抓毒蛇的人会招来五种无益——招来恶臭、招来不净、招来疾病、招来毒、招来死亡。抓取大种的人也一样会招来五种无益——招来恶臭、招来不净、招来疾病、招来衰老、招来死亡。所以古德说:巴利
Anatthaggahaṇatoti āsīvise gaṇhantā pañca anatthe gaṇhanti – duggandhaṃ gaṇhanti, asuciṃ gaṇhanti, byādhiṃ gaṇhanti, visaṃ gaṇhanti, maraṇaṃ gaṇhanti. Mahābhūtānipi gaṇhantā pañca anatthe gaṇhanti – duggandhaṃ gaṇhanti, asuciṃ gaṇhanti, byādhiṃ gaṇhanti, jaraṃ gaṇhanti, maraṇaṃ gaṇhanti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
凡是抓蛇的人,抓到的都是涂满粪便、毒性极大的蛇;
世间喜爱邪恶的人,不应抓取五种有害之物。
恶臭、不净、疾病、毒,第五是死;
这五种无义就存在于这条涂满粪便的蛇身上。
同样地,不善的、盲愚凡夫;
执取五种无益之物,乐于在有中再生。
恶臭、不净、疾病、衰老,以及第五个——死亡;
这五种东西都是没有益处的,就像被粪便涂过的蛇一样。巴利
‘‘Yekeci sappaṃ gaṇhanti, mīḷhalittaṃ mahāvisaṃ; Pañca gaṇhantunatthāni, loke sappābhinandino. ‘‘Duggandhaṃ asuciṃ byādhiṃ, visaṃ maraṇapañcamaṃ; Anatthā honti pañcete, mīḷhalitte bhujaṅgame. ‘‘Evamevaṃ akusalā, andhabālaputhujjanā; Pañca gaṇhantunatthāni, bhave jātābhinandino. ‘‘Duggandhaṃ asuciṃ byādhiṃ, jaraṃ maraṇapañcamaṃ; Anatthā honti pañcete, mīḷhalitteva pannage’’ti. –
应当这样理解:从“执取无益之物”这一点来说,二者是相似的。巴利
Evaṃ anatthaggahaṇato sadisatā veditabbā.
关于“难以照料”:那些蛇确实难以照料。一条想站起来时,另一条想洗澡;那条想洗澡时,另一条想吃东西;那条想吃东西时,又一条想躺下。它们当中,谁的意愿没被满足,谁就当场咬死人。可是,比起这些蛇,四大种更加难以照料。因为当地界要用药时,水界就闹起来;给同一个人用水界药时,火界又闹起来。就这样,为某一界用药时,另一界就闹起来。应当从“难以照料”这一点来理解它们的相似之处。巴利
Durupaṭṭhānatoti te āsīvisā durupaṭṭhānā, ekasmiṃ uṭṭhātukāme eko nhāyitukāmo hoti , tasmiṃ nhāyitukāme aparo bhuñjitukāmo, tasmiṃ bhuñjitukāme añño nipajjitukāmo hoti. Tesu yassa yasseva ajjhāsayo na pūrati, so tattheva ḍaṃsitvā māreti. Imehi pana āsīvisehi bhūtāneva durupaṭṭhānatarāni. Pathavīdhātuyā hi bhesajje kayiramāne āpodhātu kuppati, tasseva bhesajjaṃ karontassa tejodhātūti evaṃ ekissā bhesajje kayiramāne aparā kuppantīti. Evaṃ durupaṭṭhānato sadisatā veditabbā.
“难以接近”的意思是:蛇确实难以接近。人们在屋子前面看到蛇,就从后面逃跑;在后面看到蛇,就从前面逃跑;在屋子中间看到蛇,就躲进内室;在内室看到蛇,就爬上床和椅子。而四大种比蛇还要更难接近。因为被那种麻风病碰到的人,耳朵、鼻子等部位会断落下来,身体溃烂,绿蝇围着他转,身上的臭气远远就飘过来。对这样的人,即使别人责骂他、为他悲叹,人们既不是因为愤怒,也不是因为怜悯,根本没法靠近他,只能捏着鼻子、吐着唾沫,远远地躲开他。同样,对于其他那些令人厌恶、叫人恶心的疾病,比如痔疮、腹部疾病、风病等等,也应该这样来说明其中的道理。应当依据“难以接近”这一点,来理解它们的相似之处。巴利
Durāsadatoti durāsadā hi āsīvisā, gehassa purimabhāge āsīvisaṃ disvā pacchimabhāgena palāyanti, pacchimabhāge disvā purimabhāgena, gehamajjhe disvā gabbhaṃ pavisanti, gabbhe disvā mañcapīṭhaṃ abhiruhanti. Mahābhūtāni tatopi durāsadatarāni. Tathārūpena hi kuṭṭharogena phuṭṭhassa kaṇṇanāsādīni chinditvā patanti, sarīraṃ samphuṭati nīlamakkhikā parivārenti, sarīragandho dūratova ubbāhati. Taṃ purisaṃ akkosamānampi paridevamānampi neva rosavasena, na kāruññena, upasaṅkamituṃ sakkonti, nāsikaṃ pidahitvā kheḷaṃ pātentā dūratova naṃ vivajjenti. Evaṃ aññesampi bhagandarakucchirogavātarogādīnaṃ bībhacchajegucchabhāvakarānañca rogānaṃ vasena ayamevattho vibhāvetabboti. Evaṃ durāsadato sadisatā veditabbā.
忘恩负义:毒蛇确实忘恩负义。人们即使给它沐浴、喂食,用香花等物供养它,把它放进笼子里精心照料,它仍然在寻找可乘之机。一旦找到机会,它就在那里咬死人。而四大种比毒蛇更加忘恩负义。对它们来说,根本不存在什么感恩。即使人们用凉水或热水、干净的水为它们沐浴,用香花等物恭敬供养,用柔软的衣物、柔软的卧具、柔软的园林等来照料,用上好的食物喂养,用上好的饮品供它们饮用,它们仍然在寻找可乘之机。一旦找到机会,它们就在那里发怒,给人带来灾祸和毁灭。应当如此理解:它们与忘恩负义者是相似的。巴利
Akataññutatoti āsīvisā hi akataññuno honti, nhāpiyamānāpi bhojiyamānāpi gandhamālādīhi pūjiyamānāpi peḷāyaṃ pakkhipitvā parihariyamānāpi otārameva gavesanti. Yattha otāraṃ labhanti, tattheva naṃ ḍaṃsitvā mārenti. Āsīvisehipi mahābhūtāneva akataññutarāni. Etesañhi kataṃ nāma natthi, sītena vā uṇhena vā nimmalena jalena nhāpiyamānānipi gandhamālādīhi sakkariyamānānipi muduvatthamudusayanamuduyānādīhi parihariyamānānipi, varabhojanaṃ bhojiyamānānipi, varapānaṃ pāyāpiyamānānipi otārameva gavesanti. Yattha otāraṃ labhanti, tattheva kuppitvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpentīti. Evaṃ akataññutato sadisatā veditabbā.
不分别对象而行动:蛇确实不分辨“这是刹帝利、婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗,或是在家人、出家人”,只要碰到就咬,咬死为止。四大种也一样,不分辨“这是刹帝利、婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗,或是在家人、出家人,或是天人、人、魔罗、梵天,或是无德者、有德者”。如果它们会因为“这个人有德行”而生起惭,那么对包括天人在内的世间中最尊贵的如来,它们就该生起惭。如果它们会因为“这个人有大智慧、有大神通、是头陀行者”等等而生起惭,那么对法将舍利弗长老等人,它们就该生起惭。如果它们会因为“这个人无德、凶暴、顽固”而生起恐惧,那么对包括天人在内的世间中无德、顽固、凶暴至极的提婆达多,或车匿等恶师,它们就该恐惧。然而它们既不惭,也不怕,一旦被激怒,就一定会造成某种灾祸和毁灭。应当这样理解:它们在不分别对象而行动这一点上是相同的。巴利
Avisesakāritoti āsīvisā hi ‘‘ayaṃ khattiyo vā brāhmaṇo vā vesso vā suddo vā gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā’’ti visesaṃ na karonti, sampattasampattameva ḍaṃsitvā mārenti. Mahābhūtānipi ‘‘ayaṃ khattiyo vā brāhmaṇo vā vesso vā suddo vā gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā devo vā manusso vā māro vā brahmā vā nigguṇo vā saguṇo vā’’ti visesaṃ na karonti . Yadi hi nesaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ guṇavā’’ti lajjā uppajjeyya, sadevake loke aggapuggale tathāgate lajjaṃ uppādeyyuṃ. Athāpi nesaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ mahāpañño ayaṃ mahiddhiko ayaṃ dhutavādo’’tiādinā nayena lajjā uppajjeyya, dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherādīsu lajjaṃ uppādeyyuṃ. Athāpi nesaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ nigguṇo dāruṇo thaddho’’ti bhayaṃ uppajjeyya, sadevake loke nigguṇathaddhadāruṇānaṃ aggassa devadattassa channaṃ vā satthārānaṃ bhāyeyyuṃ, na ca lajjanti na ca bhāyanti, kuppitvā yaṃkiñci anayabyasanaṃ āpādentiyeva. Evaṃ avisesakārito sadisatā veditabbā.
蛇所带来的过患和灾祸是无尽的:依靠蛇而生起的那些过患和灾祸,根本没有限量。同样,蛇咬了人之后,能让人瞎眼、驼背、瘫坐、半身不遂等等,就这样展现出无量无数的伤害。四大种一旦被激怒,并不会造成瞎眼等各种伤害,什么伤害都不会做,它们的过患和灾祸也是不可计量的。因此,应当从“过患和灾祸无尽”这一点来理解其相似性。巴利
Anantadosūpaddavatoti āsīvise nissāya uppajjanakānañhi dosūpaddavānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi. Tathā hete ḍaṃsitvā kāṇampi karonti khujjampi pīṭhasappimpi ekapakkhalampīti evaṃ aparimāṇaṃ vippakāraṃ dassenti. Bhūtānipi kuppitāni na kāṇādibhāvesu na kiñci vippakāraṃ na karonti, appamāṇo etesaṃ dosūpaddavoti. Evaṃ anantadosūpaddavato sadisatā veditabbā.
在这里,如果要按四大种来讲解业处,直到阿拉汉果为止,那在《清净道论》的“四界差别”解说里已经讲过了。巴利
Idānettha catumahābhūtavasena yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetabbaṃ siyā, taṃ visuddhimagge catudhātuvavatthānaniddese kathitameva.
比丘们,所谓“五个杀手、敌人”,这是五取蕴的另一种说法。在这里,应当从两个方面来理解蕴与杀手、敌人相似:一方面,诸蕴互相杀害;另一方面,只有诸蕴存在时,杀害这件事才被认知。
怎么互相杀害呢?首先,色既杀害色,也杀害非色;同样,非色既杀害非色,也杀害色。
怎么理解呢?地界坏灭时,必定连同其余三个一起坏灭;水界等也是这样。这样看来,色确实杀害色。而色蕴坏灭时,必定连同四个非色蕴一起坏灭;这样,色也杀害非色。受蕴坏灭时,必定连同想蕴、行蕴、识蕴一起坏灭;想蕴等也是这样。这样,非色确实杀害非色。而在命终那一刹那,四个非色蕴坏灭时,必定连同所依的色一起坏灭;这样,非色也杀害色。因此,首先是因为它们互相杀害,所以称为“杀手”。
再者,凡是诸蕴存在的地方,就会有切割、破裂、杀害、捆绑等事;没有诸蕴的地方就不会有。因此,由于杀害是随着诸蕴存在而被认知的,所以它们也是“杀手”。巴利
Pañca vadhakā paccatthikāti kho bhikkhave pañcannetaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ adhivacananti ettha dvīhi ākārehi khandhānaṃ vadhakapaccatthikasadisatā veditabbā. Khandhā hi aññamaññañca vadhenti, tesu ca santesu vadho nāma paññāyati. Kathaṃ? Rūpaṃ tāva rūpampi vadheti arūpampi, tathā arūpaṃ arūpampi vadheti rūpampi. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi pathavīdhātu bhijjamānā itarā tisso dhātuyo gahetvāva bhijjati, āpodhātuādīsupi eseva nayo, evaṃ tāva rūpaṃ rūpameva vadheti. Rūpakkhandho pana bhijjamāno cattāro arūpakkhandhe gahetvāva bhijjati, evaṃ rūpaṃ arūpampi vadheti. Vedanākkhandhopi bhijjamāno saññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇakkhandhe gahetvāva bhijjati. Saññākkhandhādīsupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ arūpaṃ arūpameva vadheti. Cutikkhaṇe pana cattāro arūpakkhandhā bhijjamānā vatthurūpampi gahetvāva bhijjanti, evaṃ arūpaṃ rūpampi vadheti. Evaṃ tāva aññamaññaṃ vadhentīti vadhakā. Yattha pana khandhā atthi, tattha chedanabhedanavadhabandhanādayo honti, na aññatthāti. Evaṃ khandhesu santesu vadho paññāyatītipi vadhakā.
现在,把五蕴分成色与非色两类,然后从辨识色法或辨识名法入手,依次讲解直到证得阿拉汉果的业处。这些内容在《清净道论》里已经讲过了。巴利
Idāni pañcakkhandhe rūpārūpavasena dve koṭṭhāse katvā, rūpavasena vā nāmavasena vā rūpapariggahaṃ ādiṃ katvā, yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetabbaṃ siyā tampi visuddhimagge kathitameva.
比丘们,所谓“第六个内贼,举剑的杀手”,这是对喜贪的另一种说法。在这里,应当从两个方面来理解喜贪与举剑杀手的相似:一是使智慧之头落下,二是使投生诸趣。
怎么理解呢?当可爱的所缘出现在眼门时,依靠那个所缘,贪爱就生起来了——到这一步,就叫做智慧之头落下。在耳门等处也是同样的道理。首先应当这样从智慧之头落下的角度来理解相似性。
其次,这种喜贪会把有情带入卵生、胎生、湿生、化生这四种生。一旦投生诸趣,二十五种大怖畏和三十二种业罚就随之而来。因此,从使投生诸趣的角度,也应当理解喜贪与举剑杀手的相似性。巴利
Chaṭṭho antaracaro vadhako ukkhittāsikoti kho, bhikkhave, nandīrāgassetaṃ adhivacananti ettha dvīhākārehi nandīrāgassa ukkhittāsikavadhakasadisatā veditabbā paññāsirapātanato ca yonisampaṭipādanato ca. Kathaṃ? Cakkhudvārasmiñhi iṭṭhārammaṇe āpāthagate taṃ ārammaṇaṃ nissāya lobho uppajjati, ettāvatā paññāsīsaṃ patitaṃ nāma hoti, sotadvārādīsupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ tāva paññāsirapātanato sadisatā veditabbā. Nandīrāgo panesa aṇḍajādibhedā catasso yoniyo upaneti. Tassa yoniupagamanamūlakāni pañcavīsati mahābhayāni dvattiṃsa kammakāraṇāni ca āgatāneva hontīti evaṃ yonisampaṭipādanatopissa ukkhittāsikavadhakasadisatā veditabbā.
就这样,以喜贪为切入点,为一位比丘讲说了业处。怎么讲呢?这个喜贪属于行蕴,先把它确定为“行蕴”;与它相应的受是受蕴,想是想蕴,心是识蕴,它们的依处和所缘是色蕴。这样来区分五蕴。然后,再把这五蕴按名色来区分,从探寻它们的缘开始,修习增长观智,逐渐证得阿罗汉果。这样就是以喜贪为切入点来讲说业处。巴利
Iti nandīrāgavasenāpi ekassa bhikkhuno kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitameva hoti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi nandīrāgo saṅkhārakkhandho, taṃ saṅkhārakkhandhoti vavatthapetvā taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, cittaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, tesaṃ vatthārammaṇaṃ rūpakkhandhoti, evaṃ pañcakkhandhe vavatthapeti. Idāni te pañcakkhandhe nāmarūpavasena vavatthapetvā, tesaṃ paccayapariyesanato paṭṭhāya vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā, anupubbena eko arahattaṃ pāpuṇātīti evaṃ nandīrāgavasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti.
六内处与空村的相似,在经文里就已经说到了。这里接着讲具体的业处修法:就像六个盗贼闯进一个有六间小屋的空村,到处转来转去,什么也捞不到,就对那个村子没了兴趣;同样,比丘在六内处上执取、探查,看不到有任何可以执为“我”或“我的”东西,就对它们没了兴趣。他想“我要开始修观”,于是以所造色为业处,把握眼净色等,确定“这是色蕴”;再把意处确定为“非色蕴”。这样,把这一切按名和色来区分——“这是名,这是色”,然后去寻找它们的因缘,增长观智,观照诸行,便一步步证入阿拉汉果。以上就是为一位比丘解说的、直到阿拉汉果的业处。巴利
Channaṃ ajjhattikāyatanānaṃ suññagāmena sadisatā pāḷiyaṃyeva āgatā. Ayaṃ panettha kammaṭṭhānanayo – yathā ca te cha corā chakuṭikaṃ suññaṃ gāmaṃ pavisitvā aparāparaṃ vicarantā kiñci alabhitvā gāmena anatthikā honti, evamevaṃ bhikkhu chasu ajjhattikāyatanesu abhinivisitvā vicinanto ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā gahetabbaṃ kiñci adisvā tehi anatthiko hoti. So ‘‘vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapessāmī’’ti upādārūpakammaṭṭhānavasena cakkhupasādādayo pariggahetvā ‘‘ayaṃ rūpakkhandho’’ti vavatthapeti, manāyatanaṃ ‘‘arūpakkhandho’’ti. Iti sabbānipetāni nāmañceva rūpañcāti nāmarūpavasena vavatthapetvā, tesaṃ paccayaṃ pariyesitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā , saṅkhāre sammasanto anupubbena arahatte patiṭṭhāti. Idaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti.
现在,为了说明外在的处与劫村盗贼相似,说了“盗贼、劫村者……”等话。其中,“在合意与不合意中”是表示工具的处格,意思是“通过合意与不合意的对象”。当盗贼劫村时,有五种情况发生:盗贼先包围村庄,放火并弄出噼啪的响声,于是人们拿起手边值钱的东西逃出村外。接着,盗贼与他们一起为了财物而互相拉扯。其中有些人遭到殴打,有些人被打倒在地,剩下那些没有受伤的人则被捆绑起来,带到盗贼自己的住处,用绳索等绑住,当作奴隶来役使。巴利
Idāni bāhirānaṃ gāmaghātakacorehi sadisataṃ dassento corā gāmaghātakāti khotiādimāha. Tattha manāpāmanāpesūti karaṇatthe bhummaṃ, manāpāmanāpehīti attho. Tattha coresu gāmaṃ hanantesu pañca kiccāni vattanti – corā tāva gāmaṃ parivāretvā ṭhitā aggiṃ datvā kaṭakaṭasaddaṃ uṭṭhāpenti, tato manussā hatthasāraṃ gahetvā bahi nikkhamanti. Tato tehi saddhiṃ bhaṇḍakassa kāraṇā hatthaparāmāsaṃ karonti. Keci panettha pahāraṃ pāpuṇanti, keci pahāraṭṭhāne patanti, avasese pana arogajane bandhitvā attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ netvā rajjubandhanādīhi bandhitvā dāsaparibhogena paribhuñjanti.
在这里,应当这样理解:就像劫村盗贼包围村庄后放火,当所缘出现在六根门前时,烦恼的灼烧就会生起;就像抓起手边值钱的东西逃出村外,那一刻就是舍弃善法而落入不善的状态;就像为了财物而互相拉扯,那就是犯下恶作、恶说、波逸提、土喇咤亚的时候;就像遭到殴打,那就是犯下僧残的时候;而被打倒在地上,就像犯下波罗夷之后成为非沙门的时候;其余的人被捆绑起来带回住处,当作奴隶使唤,就像依靠那个所缘,在所有看见的人面前破坏小戒、中戒、大戒,舍弃学处而还俗的时候。在这里,他养育妻儿,应当知道这就是现世的苦蕴;死后投生到恶趣,就是来世的苦蕴。巴利
Tattha gāmaghātakacorānaṃ gāmaṃ parivāretvā aggidānaṃ viya chasu dvāresu ārammaṇe āpāthagate kilesapariḷāhuppatti veditabbā, hatthasāraṃ ādāya bahi nikkhamanaṃ viya. Taṅkhaṇe kusaladhammaṃ pahāya akusalasamaṅgitā, bhaṇḍakassa kāraṇā hatthaparāmasanāpajjanaṃ viya dukkaṭadubbhāsitapācittiyathullaccayānaṃ āpajjanakālo, pahāraladdhakālo viya saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjanakālo, pahāraṃ laddhā pana pahāraṭṭhāne patitakālo viya pārājikaṃ āpajjitvā assamaṇakālo, avasesajanassa bandhitvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ netvā dāsaparibhogena paribhuñjanakālo viya tameva ārammaṇaṃ nissāya sabbesaṃ passantānaṃyeva cūḷasīlamajjhimasīlamahāsīlāni bhinditvā sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya gihibhāvaṃ āpajjanakālo. Tatrassa puttadāraṃ posentassa sandiṭṭhiko dukkhakkhandho veditabbo, kālaṃ katvā apāye nibbattassa samparāyiko.
这些外在的处,也是针对一位比丘,就禅修所缘的层面来说的。在这里,色等四种是所造色;触处是三种界;在法处里加上水界,就成了四种。这四种就是四大种。按它们各自的界限来说,是空界;按轻快性等来说,是轻快性等。这样一来,这全部的四大种与所造色就是色蕴,以它们为所缘而生起的受等四种就是四无色蕴。其中,“色蕴是色,四种无色蕴是名”。确定了名色之后,按照前面所说的方式修行的人,直到证得阿罗汉果为止的禅修业处就已经说明了。巴利
Imānipi bāhirāyatanāni ekassa bhikkhuno kammaṭṭhānavaseneva kathitāni. Ettha hi rūpādīni cattāri upādārūpāni, phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ tisso dhātuyo, dhammāyatane āpodhātuyā saddhiṃ tā catassoti imāni cattāri bhūtāni, tesaṃ paricchedavasena ākāsadhātu, lahutādivasena lahutādayoti evamidaṃ sabbampi bhūtupādāyarūpaṃ rūpakkhandho, tadārammaṇā vedanādayo cattāro arūpakkhandhā. Tattha ‘‘rūpakkhandho rūpaṃ, cattāro arūpino khandhā nāma’’nti. Nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā purimanayeneva paṭipajjantassa yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti.
在这里,“暴流”的意思是难以渡过。这些暴流,如果有人发起“我要圆满戒的防护,证得阿罗汉果”这样的志向,依靠善知识,正确地精进努力,就能渡过去;用其他任何方式,就很难渡过。因为难以渡过这个含义,所以称为暴流。这些也是针对一位比丘,依禅修业处而说的。因为这四种其实也就是一个行蕴。其余部分,应按照“喜贪”中所说的方式配合展开说明。巴利
Oghānanti ettha duruttaraṇaṭṭho oghaṭṭho. Ete hi ‘‘sīlasaṃvaraṃ pūretvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti ajjhāsayaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā kalyāṇamitte nissāya sammā vāyamantena taritabbā, yena vā tena vā duruttarā. Iminā duruttaraṇaṭṭhena oghāti vuccanti. Tepi ekassa bhikkhuno kammaṭṭhānavasena kathitā. Cattāropi hi ete eko saṅkhārakkhandho vāti. Sesaṃ nandīrāge vuttanayeneva yojetvā vitthāretabbaṃ.
这是有身的同义语。因为有身就像毒蛇等围绕的大水此岸一样,被四大等所威胁,充满恐惧与怖畏;它也是针对一位比丘,仅依禅修业处而说的。因为有身就是三界中的五蕴,而这五蕴总括起来就是名色。因此,在这里应当以名色的确定作为起点,直到阿拉汉果,把禅修业处展开来说明。巴利
Sakkāyassetaṃ adhivacananti, sakkāyopi hi āsīvisādīhi udakaṇṇavassa orimatīraṃ viya catumahābhūtādīhi sāsaṅko sappaṭibhayo, sopi ekassa bhikkhuno kammaṭṭhānavaseneva kathito. Sakkāyo hi tebhūmakapañcakkhandhā, te ca samāsato nāmarūpamevāti. Evamettha nāmarūpavavatthānaṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vitthāretabbanti.
这是涅槃的另一种说法。因为涅槃就像大水的彼岸,远离四大等带来的危险,安稳而没有恐惧。这是精进努力的另一种说法。这里为了显示心的作用,就把前面所说的“勤勉”直接当作“精进”来说明。已渡到彼岸,就是已经渡过去、到达了彼岸。巴利
Nibbānassetaṃ adhivacananti nibbānañhi udakaṇṇavassa pārimatīraṃ viya catumahābhūtādīhi khemaṃ appaṭibhayaṃ. Vīriyārambhassetaṃ adhivacananti ettha cittakiriyadassanatthaṃ heṭṭhā vuttavāyāmameva vīriyanti gaṇhitvā dasseti. Tiṇṇo pāraṅgatoti taritvā pāraṃ gato.
在这里,就像有人站在有危险的此岸,想要渡过洪水,却先住了几天,慢慢地把船准备好,然后只顾着在水里嬉戏玩水,而不上船——他不该这样做。因为这样做的人,还没上船就遭遇了灾祸。同样,想要渡过烦恼洪流的人,不该生起这样的戏论:“我还年轻,等到老了再编八支圣道的筏子。”因为这样做的人,还没到老年就已经毁灭了,即使到了老年也做不成。而应当忆念《善一夜者》等教诫,然后立刻编造这圣道的筏子。巴利
Tattha yathā sāsaṅkaorimatīre ṭhitena udakaṇṇavaṃ taritukāmena katipāhaṃ vasitvā saṇikaṃ nāvaṃ sajjetvā udakakīḷaṃ kīḷantena viya na nāvā abhiruhitabbā. Evaṃ karonto hi anāruḷhova byasanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Evameva kilesaṇṇavaṃ taritukāmena ‘‘taruṇo tāvamhi, mahallakakāle aṭṭhaṅgikamaggakullaṃ bandhissāmī’’ti papañco na kātabbo . Evaṃ karonto hi mahallakakālaṃ apatvāpi vināsaṃ pāpuṇāti, patvāpi kātuṃ na sakkoti. Bhaddekarattādīni pana anussaritvā vegeneva ayaṃ ariyamaggakullo bandhitabbo.
就像要造筏子的人,希望手脚齐全。因为脚有残疾或跛脚的人站不稳,手像铲子一样残缺的人抓不住草叶等东西。同样,要造这座圣道之筏的人,也应当具足戒之足和信之手。因为破戒、无信的人,在佛陀的教法中站不住脚,不相信修行,就无法造圣道之筏。又像一个人虽然手脚齐全,但身体虚弱、被疾病折磨,就造不了筏子,只有体力充沛的人才能造;同样,有戒有信的人如果懒惰、懈怠,也造不了这座道筏,只有精进努力的人才能造。所以,想要造这座筏的人,就应当精进努力。又像那个人造好筏后,站在岸边,面对一由旬宽的洪流,心里下定决心:“我要靠自己的精勤渡过去”;同样,修行的人从经行处下来时,也应当下定决心:“今天我要渡过四种圣道所断的烦恼海,安住在阿拉汉果。”巴利
Yathā ca kullaṃ bandhantassa hatthapādapāripūri icchitabbā. Kuṇṭhapādo hi khañjapādo vā patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti, phaṇahatthakādayo tiṇapaṇṇādīni gahetuṃ na sakkonti. Evamimampi ariyamaggakullaṃ bandhantassa sīlapādānañceva saddhāhatthassa ca pāripūri icchitabbā. Na hi dussīlo assaddho sāsane appatiṭṭhito paṭipattiṃ assaddahanto ariyamaggakullaṃ bandhituṃ sakkoti. Yathā ca paripuṇṇahatthapādopi dubbalo byādhipīḷito kullaṃ bandhituṃ na sakkoti, thāmasampannova sakkoti, evaṃ sīlavā saddhopi alaso kusīto imaṃ maggakullaṃ bandhituṃ na sakkoti , āraddhavīriyova sakkotīti imaṃ bandhitukāmena āraddhavīriyena bhavitabbaṃ. Yathā so puriso kullaṃ bandhitvā tīre ṭhatvā yojanavitthāraṃ udakaṇṇavaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ mayā paccattapurisakāraṃ nissāya nittharitabbo’’ti mānasaṃ bandhati, evaṃ yogināpi caṅkamā oruyha ‘‘ajja mayā catumaggavajjhaṃ kilesaṇṇavaṃ taritvā arahatte patiṭṭhātabba’’nti mānasaṃ bandhitabbaṃ.
就像那个人靠着木筏渡过洪水,每走一俱卢舍就回头看看,心里清楚:我已经越过了一份,还剩三份;再走一俱卢舍,回头一看,知道:我已经越过了两份,还剩两份;又走一俱卢舍,回头一看,知道:我已经越过了三份,还剩一份;等越过最后那一份,他回头一看,知道:四份我都已经越过了。然后他用脚把木筏踩开,让它顺流漂走,自己上岸,站在陆地上。
同样,这位比丘靠着圣道的木筏渡过烦恼的洪流:他依靠入流道,渡过了最初那道所断的烦恼,住于道后之果,用省察智回头观察,知道自己已经断除了四道所断烦恼中的一份,其余三份还在。然后他再次把根、力、觉支结合起来,审察诸行,依靠一来道渡过了第二道所断的烦恼,住于道后之果,用省察智回头观察,知道自己已经断除了四道所断烦恼中的两份,其余两份还在。然后他再次把根、力、觉支结合起来,审察诸行,依靠不来道渡过了第三道所断的烦恼,住于道后之果,用省察智回头观察,知道自己已经断除了四道所断烦恼中的三份,还剩一份。然后他再次把根、力、觉支结合起来,审察诸行,依靠阿拉汉道渡过了第四道所断的烦恼,住于道后之果,用省察智回头观察,知道自己的一切烦恼都已经断尽了。巴利
Yathā ca so puriso kullaṃ nissāya udakaṇṇavaṃ taranto gāvutamattaṃ gantvā nivattitvā olokento ‘‘ekakoṭṭhāsaṃ atikkantomhi, aññe tayo sesā’’ti jānāti, aparampi gāvutamattaṃ gantvā nivattitvā olokento ‘‘dve atikkantomhi, dve sesā’’ti jānāti, aparampi gāvutamattaṃ gantvā nivattitvā olokento ‘‘tayo atikkantomhi, eko seso’’ti jānāti, tampi atikkamma nivattitvā olokento ‘‘cattāropi me koṭṭhasā atikkantā’’ti jānāti, tañca kullaṃ pādena akkamitvā sotābhimukhaṃ khipitvā uttaritvā tīre tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ ayampi bhikkhu ariyamaggakullaṃ nissāya kilesaṇṇavaṃ taranto sotāpattimaggena paṭhamamaggavajjhe kilese taritvā maggānantare phale ṭhito paccavekkhaṇañāṇena nivattitvā olokento ‘‘catumaggavajjhānaṃ me kilesānaṃ eko koṭṭhāso pahīno , itare tayo sesā’’ti jānāti. Puna tatheva indriyabalabojjhaṅgāni samodhānetvā saṅkhāre sammasanto sakadāgāmimaggena dutiyamaggavajjhe kilese taritvā maggānantare phale ṭhito paccavekkhaṇañāṇena nivattitvā, olokento ‘‘catumaggavajjhānaṃ me kilesānaṃ dve koṭṭhāsā pahīnā , itare dve sesā’’ti jānāti. Puna tatheva indriyabalabojjhaṅgāni samodhānetvā saṅkhāre sammasanto anāgāmimaggena tatiyamaggavajjhe kilese taritvā maggānantare phale ṭhito paccavekkhaṇañāṇena nivattitvā olokento ‘‘catumaggavajjhānaṃ me kilesānaṃ tayo koṭṭhāsā pahīnā, eko seso’’ti jānāti. Puna tatheva indriyabalabojjhaṅgāni samodhānetvā saṅkhāre sammasanto arahattamaggena catutthamaggavajjhe kilese taritvā maggānantare phale ṭhito paccavekkhaṇañāṇena nivattitvā olokento ‘‘sabbakilesā me pahīnā’’ti jānāti.
就像那个人把筏推到水流中,上岸后站在干地上,进入城里,登上高楼顶上的殊胜处,心想“我以这么多从这无益之事中解脱了”,于是一心专注、满心欢喜地坐下。同样,这位比丘或者就在原来的座位上,或者在别的夜间住处、白天住处等任何地方坐着,心想“我以这么多从这无益之事中解脱了”,以涅槃为所缘进入果定,一心专注、满心欢喜地坐下。正是针对这个意思才说:“已渡脱、已到彼岸者站在干地上,就是婆罗门。”比丘们,这是对阿拉汉的称呼。到这里,已经讲了各种修行业处;不过,把它们归纳起来,应当显示为同一个整体。即使显示为同一个整体,也应当归结为五蕴来说明。巴利
Yathā so puriso taṃ kullaṃ sote pavāhetvā uttaritvā thale ṭhito nagaraṃ pavisitvā uparipāsādavaragato ‘‘ettakena vatamhi anatthena mutto’’ti ekaggacitto tuṭṭhamānaso nisīdati, evaṃ tasmiṃyeva vā āsane aññesu vā rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānādīsu yattha katthaci nisinno ‘‘ettakena vatamhi anatthena mutto’’ti nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā ekaggacitto tuṭṭhamānaso nisīdati. Idaṃ vā sandhāya vuttaṃ tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇoti kho, bhikkhave, arahato etaṃ adhivacananti. Evaṃ tāvettha nānākammaṭṭhānāni kathitāni, samodhānetvā pana sabbānipi ekameva katvā dassetabbāni. Ekaṃ katvā dassentenāpi pañcakkhandhavaseneva vinivattetabbāni.
怎么理解呢?这里,内在的四大种、内在的五处、外在的五处、法处中的十五种微细色,是自身的一部分,这就是色蕴;意处是识蕴,法处的一部分、四种瀑流、自身的一部分,这四种是非色蕴。其中,色蕴是色,四种非色蕴是名,这就是名色。对它的喜贪、欲瀑流、有瀑流、法处的一部分、自身的一部分,这些是缘。这样,就确定了有缘的名色。确定了有缘的名色之后,赋予三相,增长观智,正确审察诸行,证得阿拉汉果,这是一位比丘的出离之门。巴利
Kathaṃ? Ettha hi cattāri mahābhūtāni ajjhattikāni pañcāyatanāni bāhirāni pañcāyatanāni dhammāyatane pannarasa sukhumarūpāni sakkāyassa ekadesoti ayaṃ rūpakkhandho, manāyatanaṃ viññāṇakkhandho dhammāyatanekadeso cattāro oghā sakkāyekadesoti ime cattāro arūpino khandhā. Tattha rūpakkhandho rūpaṃ, cattāro arūpino khandhā nāmanti idaṃ nāmarūpaṃ. Tassa nandīrāgo kāmogho bhavogho dhammāyatanekadeso sakkāyekadesoti ime paccayā. Iti sappaccayaṃ nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapeti nāma. Sappaccayaṃ nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā saṅkhāre sammasanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇātīti idaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno niyyānamukhaṃ.
在这里,四大种、五取蕴、内外的十一处、法处的一部分、见瀑流、无明瀑流、有身的一部分,这些是苦谛;喜贪、法处的一部分、欲瀑流、有瀑流、有身的一部分,这些是集谛;被称为彼岸的涅槃是灭谛;圣道是道谛。其中,两个谛属于轮回,两个谛属于还灭;两个谛是世间的,两个谛是出世间的。应当以十六种行相、六万种理趣来分别开示这四谛。说法结束时,通达其义的五百位比丘证入阿罗汉果。而这部经是依苦相而宣说的。巴利
Tattha cattāro mahābhūtā pañcupādānakkhandhā ajjhattikabāhirāni ekādasāyatanāni dhammāyatanekadeso diṭṭhogho avijjogho sakkāyekadesoti idaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, nandīrāgo dhammāyatanekadeso kāmogho bhavogho sakkāyekadesoti idaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, pārimatīrasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, ariyamaggo maggasaccaṃ. Tattha dve saccāni vaṭṭaṃ, dve vivaṭṭaṃ, dve lokiyāni, dve lokuttarānīti cattāri saccāni soḷasahākārehi saṭṭhinayasahassehi vibhajitvā dassetabbānīti. Desanāpariyosāne vipañcitaññū pañcasatā bhikkhū arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Suttaṃ pana dukkhalakkhaṇavasena kathitaṃ.
第2篇 车喻经的注释巴利
2. Rathopamasuttavaṇṇanā
239 239. 在第二经中,“乐与喜悦多”的意思是:身乐和心喜悦都很多,所以叫“乐与喜悦多”。“他的根源已经发起”是说他的因缘已经圆满。“为了诸漏的灭尽”:这里“漏尽”指的是阿罗汉道,意思是為了达到那个漏尽。“横放在中间的刺棒”:指横放在车中央的刺棒。“随其所欲的方向”:即他想去哪个方向。“随其所欲的行程”:即他想怎么走就怎么走。“令驾驶”:指驱使前进。“令回转”:指使车退回。“为防护”:为了守护。“为抑制”:为控制速度。“为调伏”:为彻底驯服。“为止息”:为烦恼的平息。巴利
239. Dutiye sukhasomanassabahuloti kāyikasukhañceva cetasikasomanassañca bahulaṃ assāti sukhasomanassabahulo. Yoni cassa āraddhā hotīti kāraṇañcassa paripuṇṇaṃ hoti. Āsavānaṃ khayāyāti idha āsavakkhayoti arahattamaggo adhippeto, tadatthāyāti attho. Odhastapatodoti rathamajjhe tiriyaṃ ṭhapitapatodo. Yenicchakanti yena disābhāgena icchati. Yadicchakanti yaṃ yaṃ gamanaṃ icchati. Sāreyyāti peseyya. Paccāsāreyyāti paṭivinivatteyya. Ārakkhāyāti rakkhaṇatthāya. Saṃyamāyāti veganiggahaṇatthāya. Damāyāti nibbisevanatthāya. Upasamāyāti kilesūpasamatthāya.
就像这样:在这里,好比一个不善驾车的人,把未经调伏的信度马套上车,赶着车走在崎岖不平的路上,结果车轮也坏了,车轴和马蹄也伤了,自己还遭遇灾祸和毁灭,而且没法按自己想要的方向驾驭前行;同样,一个在六根门头不加守护的比丘,也没法体验到随心所愿的沙门之乐。又好比一个善巧的御者,把调伏好的信度马套上车,把车赶到平坦的地面上,握好缰绳,把正念放在马蹄上,拿起刺棒,让马走得平稳无刺,这样驱赶时,就能按自己想要的方向驾驭前行。同样,一个在六根门头守护根门的比丘,在这教法里能体验到随心所愿的沙门之乐。如果他想要把智慧导向无常随观,智慧就朝那个方向去。在苦随观等其余方面,方法也是这样。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha yathā akusalassa sārathino adante sindhave yojetvā visamamaggena rathaṃ pesentassa cakkānipi bhijjanti, akkhopi sindhavānañca khurā, attanāpi anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇāti, na ca icchiticchitena gamanena sāretuṃ sakkoti ; evaṃ chasu indriyesu aguttadvāro bhikkhu na icchiticchitaṃ samaṇaratiṃ anubhavituṃ sakkoti. Yathā pana cheko sārathi dante sindhave yojetvā, same bhūmibhāge rathaṃ otāretvā rasmiyo gahetvā, sindhavānaṃ khuresu satiṃ ṭhapetvā, patodaṃ ādāya nibbisevane katvā, pesento icchiticchitena gamanena sāreti. Evameva chasu indriyesu guttadvāro bhikkhu imasmiṃ sāsane icchiticchitaṃ samaṇaratiṃ anubhoti, sace aniccānupassanābhimukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ pesetukāmo hoti, tadabhimukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ gacchati. Dukkhānupassanādīsupi eseva nayo.
在饮食上知量,就是在饮食方面知道适量。这里面有两种量:接受时的量和食用时的量。在接受时的量上,应当了解施主的意愿,应当了解所施之物的多少,也应当知道自己的体力。这样的比丘,如果所施之物很多,而施主只想给一点点,他就随顺施主的意愿,只取少量;如果所施之物很少,而施主想多给,他就根据所施之物的多少,只取少量;如果所施之物也多、施主也想多给,他就知道自己的体力,按适量来取。他凭这种接受时的知量,能让还没生起的利养生起,也能让已经生起的利养保持稳固,就像法救大王在位时那位七岁的沙弥一样。巴利
Bhojane mattaññūti bhojanamhi pamāṇaññū. Tattha dve pamāṇāni – paṭiggahaṇapamāṇañca paribhogapamāṇañca. Tattha paṭiggahaṇapamāṇe dāyakassa vaso veditabbo, deyyadhammassa vaso veditabbo, attano thāmo jānitabbo. Evarūpo hi bhikkhu sace deyyadhammo bahuko hoti, dāyako appaṃ dātukāmo, dāyakassa vasena appaṃ gaṇhāti. Deyyadhammo appo, dāyako bahuṃ dātukāmo, deyyadhammassa vasena appaṃ gaṇhāti. Deyyadhammopi bahu, dāyakopi bahuṃ dātukāmo, attano thāmaṃ ñatvā pamāṇena gaṇhāti. So tāya paṭiggahaṇe mattaññutāya anuppannañca lābhaṃ uppādeti, uppannañca thāvaraṃ karoti dhammikatissamahārājakāle sattavassiko sāmaṇero viya.
听说国王让人用五百辆车运来糖。国王想:“这是让人欢喜的赠礼,没有尊者们,我们就不吃。”于是把两百五十辆车送到大寺,自己也吃过早饭就过去了。鼓声一响,一万两千位比丘聚到了一起。国王站在一边,叫人把园丁喊来,对他说:“国王布施时,以装满钵为准。把已接取的容器装满了再给。要是有人只肯按自己的适量拿、不肯多接,你就来告诉我。”巴利
Rañño kira pañcahi sakaṭasatehi guḷaṃ āhariṃsu. Rājā ‘‘manāpo paṇṇākāro, ayyehi vinā na khādissāmā’’ti aḍḍhateyyāni sakaṭasatāni mahāvihāraṃ pesetvā sayampi bhuttapātarāso agamāsi. Bheriyā pahaṭāya dvādasa bhikkhusahassāni sannipatiṃsu. Rājā ekamante ṭhito ārāmikaṃ pakkosāpetvā āha – ‘‘rañño nāma dāne pattapūrova pamāṇaṃ, gahitabhājanaṃ pūretvāva dehi, sace koci mattapaṭiggahaṇe ṭhito na gaṇhāti, mayhaṃ āroceyyāsī’’ti.
有位大长老说:“我要去礼拜大菩提树和大塔。”他从支提山来到精舍,正走进去时,在大殿那里看见比丘们正在拿糖块,就对跟在后面的沙弥说:“你不需要糖。”沙弥回答:“是的,尊者,不需要。我们一路走得累了,只要有一块木苹果那么大的糖就够了。”沙弥拿出钵,站在长老按戒腊排的位置上。园丁把量器装满糖举起来,沙弥摇了摇手指。园丁说:“喂,沙弥,给王室的布施是以装满容器为标准的,你把钵装满拿吧。”沙弥说:“是的,居士,国王们心量广大,但我们的亲教师只要这么多就够了。”巴利
Atheko mahāthero ‘‘mahābodhimahācetiyāni vandissāmī’’ti cetiyapabbatā āgantvā, vihāraṃ pavisanto mahāmaṇḍapaṭṭhāne bhikkhū guḷaṃ gaṇhante disvā pacchato āgacchantaṃ sāmaṇeraṃ āha, ‘‘natthi te guḷena attho’’ti. ‘‘Āma, bhante, natthī’’ti. Sāmaṇera mayaṃ maggakilantā, ekena kapiṭṭhaphalamattena piṇḍakena amhākaṃ atthoti. Sāmaṇero thālakaṃ nīharitvā therassa vassaggapaṭipāṭiyaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Ārāmiko gahaṇamānaṃ pūretvā ukkhipi, sāmaṇero aṅguliṃ cālesi. Tāta sāmaṇera, rājakulānaṃ dāne bhājanapūrameva pamāṇaṃ, thālakapūraṃ gaṇhāhīti. Āma, upāsaka, rājāno nāma mahajjhāsayā honti, amhākaṃ pana upajjhāyassa ettakeneva atthoti.
国王听了他的话,问道:“这位沙弥在说什么?”然后走到他跟前。园丁说:“主人,沙弥的钵太小,装不了多少。”国王说:“把拿来的容器装满再拿吧,尊者。”大王,国王们确实心量广大,总想把举起的容器装满才肯布施,但我们的亲教师只需要这么多就够了。国王心想:“这个七岁的孩子,到现在嘴里还带着奶味,却不说‘拿了装满篮子、装满筐,明天后天接着吃’,看来是能够护持佛陀的教法的。”于是命令手下的人:“诸位,我对这位沙弥生起了净信,把另外那两百五十辆车也带来,布施给僧团吧。”巴利
Rājā tassa kathaṃ sutvā, ‘‘kiṃ bho sāmaṇero bhaṇatī’’ti? Tassa santikaṃ gato. Ārāmiko āha – ‘‘sāmi, sāmaṇerassa bhājanaṃ khuddakaṃ, bahuṃ na gaṇhātī’’ti. Rājā āha, ‘‘ānītabhājanaṃ pūretvā gaṇhatha, bhante’’ti. Mahārāja, rājāno nāma mahajjhāsayā honti , ukkhittabhājanaṃ pūretvāva dātukāmā, amhākaṃ pana upajjhāyassa ettakeneva atthoti. Rājā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ sattavassikadārako, ajjāpissa mukhato khīragandho na muccati, gahetvā kuṭe vā kuṭumbe vā pūretvā svepi punadivasepi khādissāmāti na vadati, sakkā buddhasāsanaṃ pariggahetu’’nti purise āṇāpesi, ‘‘bho, pasannomhi sāmaṇerassa, itarānipi aḍḍhateyyāni sakaṭasatāni ānetvā saghaṃssa dethā’’ti.
那位国王有一天想吃鹧鸪肉,心里想:“如果我说出想吃炭烤鹧鸪肉,他们就会把周围一由旬内的鹧鸪全都捕杀光。”他压下了生起的欲望,就这样忍了三年。后来他耳朵里生了脓,实在忍不住了,就问:“诸位,我们这里有没有哪位持戒清净的侍者近事男?”有人回答:“有的,大王,有位叫提舍的,他持戒圆满,从不毁犯。”国王想试探他,就派人把他叫来。他来了以后,向国王行礼,站在一旁。国王问他:“贤者,你叫提舍吗?”“是的,大王。”“那你去吧。”他走后,国王让人拿来一只鸡,命令一个人说:“你去对提舍说,用三种做法把这只鸡煮好,给我们端上来。”那人去了,照原话说了。提舍说:“贤友,如果这只鸡是死的,按我知道的做法,我可以煮好端来。但杀生这种事,我是不做的。”那人回去禀报了国王。巴利
Soyeva pana rājā ekadivasaṃ tittiramaṃsaṃ khāditukāmo cintesi – ‘‘sace ahaṃ aṅgārapakkaṃ tittiramaṃsaṃ khāditukāmosmīti aññassa kathessāmi, samantā yojanaṭṭhāne tittirasamugghātaṃ karissantī’’ti uppannaṃ pipāsaṃ adhivāsento tīṇi saṃvaccharāni vītināmesi. Athassa kaṇṇesu pubbo saṇṭhāsi, so adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto ‘‘atthi nu kho, bho, amhākaṃ koci upaṭṭhākupāsako sīlarakkhako’’ti pucchi . Āma, deva, atthi, tisso nāma so akhaṇḍasīlaṃ rakkhatīti. Atha naṃ vīmaṃsitukāmo pakkosāpesi. So āgantvā rājānaṃ vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. Tato naṃ āha – ‘‘tvaṃ, tāta, tisso nāmā’’ti? ‘‘Āma devā’’ti. Tena hi gacchāti. Tasmiṃ gate ekaṃ kukkuṭaṃ āharāpetvā ekaṃ purisaṃ āṇāpesi, ‘‘gaccha tissaṃ vadāhi, imaṃ tīhi pākehi pacitvā amhākaṃ upaṭṭhāpehī’’ti. So gantvā tathā avoca. So āha – ‘‘sace, bho, ayaṃ matako assa, yathā jānāmi, tathā pacitvā upaṭṭhaheyyaṃ. Pāṇātipātaṃ panāhaṃ na karomī’’ti. So āgantvā rañño ārocesi.
国王又派人去说:“再去一趟。”那人去了以后说:“贤友,侍奉国王可是件苦差事,别这样做了,戒还是可以重新受持的,把它煮了吧。”提舍对他说:“贤友,在同一个生命里,死亡是唯一确定的事,我不会做杀生的事。”那人又把这番话禀报了国王。国王第三次派人去,见他还是不答应,就把他召来亲自问。面对国王,他给的回答还是一样。于是国王命令手下:“这个人违抗王命,你们把他带到刑场,砍下他的头。”但私下里又给他们使了个眼色:“你们就吓唬吓唬他,把他带去,把他的头放在刑场上,然后回来告诉我。”巴利
Rājā puna ‘‘ekavāraṃ gacchā’’ti pesesi. So gantvā, ‘‘bho, rājupaṭṭhānaṃ nāma bhāriyaṃ, mā evaṃ kari, punapi sīlaṃ sakkā samādātuṃ, paceta’’nti āha. Atha naṃ tisso avoca, ‘‘bho, ekasmiṃ nāma attabhāve dhuvaṃ ekaṃ maraṇaṃ, nāhaṃ pāṇātipātaṃ karissāmī’’ti. So punapi rañño ārocesi. Rājā tatiyampi pesetvā asampaṭicchantaṃ pakkosāpetvā attanā pucchi. Raññopi tatheva paṭivacanaṃ adāsi. Atha rājā purise āṇāpesi, ‘‘ayaṃ rañño āṇaṃ kopeti, gacchathetassa āghātanabhaṇḍikāyaṃ ṭhapetvā, sīsaṃ chindathā’’ti. Raho ca pana nesaṃ saññamadāsi – ‘‘imaṃ santajjayamānā netvā sīsamassa āghātanabhaṇḍikāyaṃ ṭhapetvā āgantvā mayhaṃ ārocethā’’ti.
他们让他躺到断头台上,把那只鸡放在他手里。他把鸡放在心口,说:“孩子,我把我的命给你,我拿走你的命,你毫无恐惧地走吧。”说完就把它放了。那只鸡拍打翅膀,飞上空中,停在一棵榕树上。他给那只鸡施予无畏的地方,从此就被叫作“鸡山”。巴利
Te taṃ āghātanabhaṇḍikāyaṃ nipajjāpetvā tamassa kukkuṭaṃ hatthesu ṭhapayiṃsu. So taṃ hadaye ṭhapetvā ‘‘ahaṃ, tāta, mama jīvitaṃ tuyhaṃ demi, tava jīvitaṃ ahaṃ gaṇhāmi, tvaṃ nibbhayo gacchā’’ti vissajjesi. Kukkuṭo pakkhe papphoṭetvā ākāsena gantvā vaṭarukkhe nilīyi. Tassa kukkuṭassa abhayadinnaṭṭhānaṃ kukkuṭagiri nāma jātaṃ.
国王听完这件事的经过,就把那位大臣的儿子叫来,让人用各种首饰把他打扮好,然后对他说:“孩子,我正是为了这件事才考验你的。我想吃鹧鸪肉,已经过了整整三年,你能把它弄成三净的,给我端上来吗?”他回答:“陛下,这正是我该做的事。”说完就出去了。他站在门道中间,一大早就看见一个人拿着三只鹧鸪走进来,就给了那人两个迦哈巴那,接过鹧鸪,收拾干净,用孜然等香料熏好,在炭火上烤得熟透,然后端给国王。国王坐在大殿的狮子座上,拿过一块,切下一小片放进嘴里。就在那一刻,国王全身一万七千条持味脉顿时通畅,安住下来。巴利
Rājā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā amaccaputtaṃ pakkosāpetvā sabbābharaṇehi alaṅkaritvā āha – ‘‘tāta, mayā tvaṃ etadatthameva vīmaṃsito, mayhaṃ tittiramaṃsaṃ khāditukāmassa tīṇi saṃvaccharāni atikkantāni, sakkhissasi me tikoṭiparisuddhaṃ katvā upaṭṭhāpetu’’nti. ‘‘Etaṃ nāma, deva, mayhaṃ kamma’’nti nikkhamitvā dvārantare ṭhito ekaṃ purisaṃ pātova tayo tittire gahetvā pavisantaṃ disvā, dve kahāpaṇe datvā tittire ādāya parisodhetvā, jīrakādīhi vāsetvā, aṅgāresu supakke pacitvā rañño upaṭṭhāpesi. Rājā mahātale sirīpallaṅke nisinnova ekaṃ gahetvā thokaṃ chinditvā mukhe pakkhipi, tāvadevassa sattarasaharaṇīsahassāni pharitvā aṭṭhāsi.
那时,他想起比丘僧团,心想:像我这样身为大地之主的国王,想吃鹧鸪肉,三年都得不到,那不做饭的比丘僧团,又怎么能得到呢?于是就把已经放进嘴里的那块肉吐到了地上。大臣的儿子双膝跪下,用嘴接住了。国王说:走开吧,孩子,我知道你没有过错,我是因为这个原因才把它吐掉的。接着又说:剩下的那些,你也照样好好收起来放着吧。巴利
Tasmiṃ samaye bhikkhusaṅghaṃ saritvā, ‘‘mādiso nāma pathavissaro rājā tittiramaṃsaṃ khāditukāmo tīṇi saṃvaccharāni na labhi, apaccamāno bhikkhusaṅgho kuto labhissatī’’ti? Mukhe pakkhittakkhaṇḍaṃ bhūmiyaṃ chaḍḍesi. Amaccaputto jaṇṇukehi patitvā mukhena gaṇhi. Rājā ‘‘apehi, tāta, jānāmahaṃ tava niddosabhāvaṃ, iminā nāma kāraṇena mayā etaṃ chaḍḍita’’nti kathetvā, ‘‘sesakaṃ tatheva saṅgopetvā ṭhapehī’’ti āha.
第二天,那位常出入王宫的长老进城乞食。大臣的儿子看见他,接过钵,把他领进王宫。另一个年老才出家的人,装作是长老的随从沙门,跟在后面也进去了。长老心想:“这大概是国王召来的比丘吧。”就没在意。大臣的儿子也想:“这人应该是长老的侍者吧。”也就没警觉。请他们坐下后,端上了粥。喝完粥,国王又端上鹧鸪肉。长老拿了一块,那个人也拿了一块。国王心想:“还有剩余的一份,没打招呼就拿来吃,不太合适。”于是就去问大长老。大长老用手遮住,表示不行;那位年长的长老却接受了。国王心里不高兴,等长老吃完饭,拿着钵跟在他身后出去,说道:“尊者,到居士家里来的比丘,应该带一位受过教导、懂规矩的比丘一起来才对。”长老当下就明白了:“这人不是国王召来的。”巴利
Punadivase rājakulūpako thero piṇḍāya pāvisi. Amaccaputto taṃ disvā pattaṃ gahetvā rājagehaṃ pavesesi. Aññataro vuḍḍhapabbajitopi therassa pacchāsamaṇo viya hutvā anubandhanto pāvisi. Thero ‘‘raññā pakkosāpitabhikkhu bhavissatī’’ti pamajji. Amaccaputtopi ‘‘therassa upaṭṭhāko bhavissatī’’ti pamādaṃ āpajji. Tesaṃ nisīdāpetvā yāguṃ adaṃsu. Yāguyā pītāya rājā tittire upanesi. Thero ekaṃ gaṇhi, itaropi ekaṃ gaṇhi. Rājā ‘‘anubhāgo atthi, anāpucchitvā khādituṃ na yutta’’nti mahātheraṃ āpucchi. Thero hatthaṃ pidahi, mahallakatthero sampaṭicchi. Rājā anattamano hutvā katabhattakiccaṃ theraṃ pattaṃ ādāya anugacchanto āha – ‘‘bhante, kulagehaṃ āgacchantehi uggahitavattaṃ bhikkhuṃ gahetvā āgantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Thero tasmiṃ khaṇe aññāsi ‘‘na esa raññā pakkosāpito’’ti.
第二天,长老带着侍者沙弥一起进宫。国王等他们喝完粥,又端上鹧鸪肉。长老拿了一块,沙弥则动了动手指,让人从中间切开,只取了切成方块中的一块。国王把那一块又递给大长老。大长老用手挡住,沙弥也用手挡住。国王坐在不远处,把肉切成小块吃着,说道:“多亏了遵守修学规矩的人,我们才能吃到一个半鹧鸪啊。”他刚把肉咽下去,耳朵里就流出了脓。于是国王漱了口,走到沙弥跟前说:“贤友,我对你生起了信心,我供养你八份固定食物。”沙弥说:“大王,我要把它给我的戒师。”国王又说:“那我再给八份。”沙弥说:“那些我要给我们的老师。”国王又说:“再给八份。”沙弥说:“那些我要给同戒的比丘们。”国王又说:“再给八份。”沙弥说:“那些我要给比丘僧团。”国王又说:“那就再给八份吧。”沙弥这才接受了。就这样,仅仅懂得如何接受,就能让还没生起的利养生起,让已经生起的利养稳固下来。这就叫“接受的标准”。其中,“受用的标准”是以省察为作用的;只有省察“我受用这食物是为了什么”之后再受用,才具有意义,所以它只是“受用的标准”而已,这里指的就是这个。正因为如此,才说“以正智省思”等话,不过其他方式也是可以的。巴利
Punadivase upaṭṭhākasāmaṇeraṃ gahetvā pāvisi. Rājā tadāpi yāguyā pītāya tittire upanāmesi. Thero ekaṃ aggahesi, sāmaṇero aṅguliṃ cāletvā majjhe chindāpetvā ekakoṭṭhāsameva aggahesi. Rājā taṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ mahātherassa upanāmesi. Mahāthero hatthaṃ pidahi, sāmaṇeropi pidahi. Rājā avidūre nisīditvā khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ chinditvā khādanto ‘‘uggahitavatte nissāya diyaḍḍhatittire khādituṃ labhimhā’’ti āha. Tassa maṃse khāditamatteva kaṇṇehi pubbo nikkhami. Tato mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā sāmaṇeraṃ upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘pasannosmi, tāta, aṭṭha te dhuvabhattāni demī’’ti āha. Ahaṃ, mahārāja, upajjhāyassa dammīti. Aparāni aṭṭha demīti. Tāni amhākaṃ ācariyassa dammīti. Aparānipi aṭṭha demīti. Tāni samānupajjhāyānaṃ dammīti. Aparānipi aṭṭha demīti. Tāni bhikkhusaṅghassa dammīti. Aparānipi aṭṭha demīti. Sāmaṇero adhivāsesi. Evaṃ paṭiggahaṇamattaṃ jānanto anuppannañceva lābhaṃ uppādeti, uppannañca thāvaraṃ karoti. Idaṃ paṭiggahaṇapamāṇaṃ nāma. Tattha paribhogapamāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇapayojanaṃ, ‘‘idamatthiyaṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjāmī’’ti pana paccavekkhitaparibhogasseva payojanattā paribhogapamāṇaṃyeva nāma, taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Teneva paṭisaṅkhā yonisotiādimāha, itarampi pana vaṭṭatiyeva.
关于“狮子卧”这里,卧法有四种:欲乐卧、饿鬼卧、狮子卧、如来卧。其中,世尊在经中说:“诸比丘,大多数享受欲乐的人,都是向左胁而卧。”(《增支部》4.246)这就是“欲乐卧”。因为他们当中,基本上没有向右胁而卧的人。巴利
Sīhaseyyanti ettha kāmabhogiseyyā, petaseyyā, sīhaseyyā, tathāgataseyyāti catasso seyyā. Tattha ‘‘yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, kāmabhogī vāmena passena sentī’’ti (a. ni. 4.246) ayaṃ kāmabhogiseyyā. Tesañhi yebhuyyena dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi.
比丘们,大多数饿鬼是仰面躺着的。这就是饿鬼卧。因为饿鬼缺少血肉,身体只是一副骨架交缠在一起,没办法侧身躺,只能仰面躺着。巴利
‘‘Yebhuyyena , bhikkhave, petā uttānā sentī’’ti (a. ni. 4.246) ayaṃ petaseyyā. Petā hi appamaṃsalohitattā aṭṭhisaṅghāṭajaṭitā ekena passena sayituṃ na sakkonti, uttānāva sayanti.
比丘们,大多数兽王狮子不会把尾巴夹进两条后腿之间,而是向右胁而卧。这就是狮子卧。因为兽王狮子威势炽盛,它把两只前脚放在一处,两只后脚放在一处,把尾巴夹进两条后腿之间,确认前脚、后脚和尾巴各自所在的位置后,再把头枕在两只前脚上方躺下。即使睡了一整天,醒来时也不会惊慌,它会抬起头,查看前脚等部位是否还在原处。如果发现某个部位偏离了原位,它就心里不高兴,想:“这跟你的高贵出身和勇猛气概不相称。”于是就地躺着,不去觅食。如果发现各部位都没有移动,它就满心欢喜,想:“这才跟你的高贵出身和勇猛气概相称。”于是起身,像狮子一样舒展身体,抖擞鬃毛,发出三遍狮子吼,然后出发去觅食。巴利
‘‘Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, sīho migarājā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi anupakkhipitvā dakkhiṇena passena sayatī’’ti ayaṃ sīhaseyyā. Tejussadattā hi sīho migarājā dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ, pacchimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi pakkhipitvā purimapādapacchimapādanaṅguṭṭhānaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkhetvā dvinnaṃ purimapādānaṃ matthake sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā sayati , divasampi sayitvā pabujjhamāno na utrasanto pabujjhati, sīsaṃ pana ukkhipitvā purimapādādīnaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkheti. Sace kiñci ṭhānaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti, ‘‘nayidaṃ tuyhaṃ jātiyā sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpa’’nti anattamano hutvā tattheva sayati, na gocarāya pakkamati. Avijahitvā ṭhite pana ‘‘tuyhaṃ jātiyā ca sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpamida’’nti haṭṭhatuṭṭho uṭṭhāya sīhavijambhitaṃ vijambhitvā kesarabhāraṃ vidhunitvā tikkhattuṃ sīhanādaṃ naditvā gocarāya pakkamati.
第四禅的卧法,则称为如来卧。在这些卧法当中,这里取的是狮子卧。因为这种卧姿属于威势炽盛的威仪,所以被称为最上卧法。巴利
Catutthajjhānaseyyā pana tathāgataseyyāti vuccati. Tāsu idha sīhaseyyā āgatā. Ayañhi tejussadairiyāpathattā uttamaseyyā nāma.
脚叠在脚上,是指把左脚放在右脚上。太过交叠,是指叠得过头,也就是把脚稍微挪过了一些。因为当脚踝碰着脚踝,或者膝盖顶着膝盖,不断相互摩擦时,就会频频生起苦受,心无法专一,睡眠也就不安稳。但如果不让它们互相碰触,稍微错开一些摆放,就不会生起苦受,心能专一,睡眠也就安稳舒适。因此,要这样安排卧姿。巴利
Pāde pādanti dakkhiṇapāde vāmapādaṃ. Accādhāyāti atiādhāya, īsakaṃ atikkamma ṭhapetvā. Gopphakena hi gopphake, jāṇunā vā jāṇumhi saṅghaṭṭiyamāne abhiṇhaṃ vedanā uppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ na hoti, seyyā aphāsukā hoti. Yathā pana na saṅghaṃṭṭeti, evaṃ atikkamma ṭhapite vedanā nuppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, seyyā phāsukā hoti. Tasmā evaṃ seyyaṃ kappeti.
具念与正知,意思是具备正念与正知。那么,在睡眠时怎么还能具念与正知呢?因为不曾舍弃正念与正知。这位比丘在白天以及整个夜分,从诸障碍法中净化自己的心;到了初夜结束时,他从经行处下来,即使是在洗脚的时候,也没有离开根本业处,一边洗脚一边不离开它;不离开它就去开门,坐到床上,也不离开它而入睡。醒来的时候,也是抓住根本业处才醒来。这样,即使是在入睡时,也是具念与正知的人。不过,说这样就是“智界”,诸师并不认可。巴利
Sato sampajānoti satiyā ceva sampajaññena ca samannāgato. Kathaṃ niddāyanto sato sampajāno hotīti? Satisampajaññassa appahānena. Ayañhi divasañceva sakalayāmañca āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaṃ parisodhetvā paṭhamayāmāvasāne caṅkamā oruyha pāde dhovantopi mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ avijahantova dhovati, taṃ avijahantova dvāraṃ vivarati, mañce nisīdati, avijahantova niddaṃ okkamati. Pabujjhanto pana mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva pabujjhati. Evaṃ niddaṃ okkamantopi sato sampajāno hoti. Evaṃ pana ñāṇadhātukanti na rocayiṃsu.
按照前面所说的方法,这位比丘清净了心之后,在初夜分结束时,心想:“我要让这个执取而成的身体靠睡眠休息一下”,于是从经行处下来,不舍弃根本业处就去洗脚、开门。然后坐到床上,放下根本业处,这样观察住处:“只是诸蕴在互相碰撞,只是诸界在互相撞击”,便逐渐入睡;醒来时,也是先提起根本业处才醒来。应当知道,这样即使入睡,也叫做具念与正知。巴利
Vuttanayena panesa cittaṃ parisodhetvā paṭhamayāmāvasāne ‘‘upādinnakaṃ sarīraṃ niddāya samassāsessāmī’’ti caṅkamā oruyha mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ avijahantova pāde dhovati, dvāraṃ vivarati, mañce pana nisīditvā mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ pahāya, ‘‘khandhāva khandhesu, dhātuyova dhātūsu paṭihaññantī’’ti senāsanaṃ paccavekkhanto kamena niddaṃ okkamati, pabujjhanto pana mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvāva pabujjhati. Evaṃ niddaṃ okkamantopi sato sampajāno nāma hotīti veditabbo.
就这样,在这部经里,讲的只是具备三个部分的前行观。不过,仅仅靠这些还不能达到终点,比丘要把那些根、力、觉支结合起来,增长观,然后证得阿拉汉果。因此,开示应当一直讲到阿拉汉果为止。巴利
Iti imasmiṃ sutte tivaṅgikā pubbabhāgavipassanāva kathitā. Ettakeneva pana vosānaṃ anāpajjitvā tāneva indriyabalabojjhaṅgāni samodhānetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā bhikkhu arahattaṃ pāpuṇātīti. Evaṃ yāva arahattā desanā kathetabbā.
第三 龟譬喻经的注释巴利
3. Kummopamasuttavaṇṇanā
240 240. 在第三经里,“龟”指的是骨龟。“鳄龟”只是它的另一个叫法。“在河岸边”就是在河的岸边。“为了觅食而投入”意思是:他心里盘算着“要是能找到什么果子或能吃的东西,我就把它吃掉”,就这样为了找吃的而热切地投入、一心系在这件事上。“收摄之后”就像把东西收进箱子里那样放好。“蛰伏藏匿”就是安静地待着不动。“收摄”就是收起来、放好。这里要表达的意思是:就像乌龟把四肢收进自己的壳里时,豺狼找不到下手的机会,也没法制伏它;同样,比丘把自己的心意寻思收摄在禅修所缘这个壳里时,烦恼魔找不到下手的机会,魔罗也没法制伏他。巴利
240. Tatiye kummoti aṭṭhikummo. Kacchapoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anunadītīreti nadiyā anutīre. Gocarapasutoti ‘‘sace kiñci phalāphalaṃ labhissāmi, khādissāmī’’ti gocaratthāya pasuto ussukko tannibandho. Samodahitvāti samugge viya pakkhipitvā. Saṅkasāyatīti acchati. Samodahanti samodahanto ṭhapento. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā kummo aṅgāni sake kapāle samodahanto siṅgālassa otāraṃ na deti, na ca naṃ siṅgālo pasahati, evaṃ bhikkhu attano manovitakke sake ārammaṇakapāle samodahanto kilesamārassa otāraṃ na deti, na ca naṃ māro pasahati.
不执著:不执著于渴爱和邪见的执著。不害他人:不伤害任何其他人。已寂灭:以烦恼的寂灭而寂灭。不轻视任何人:不因戒行败坏、行为败坏,或因想抬高自己、贬低他人,而轻视任何其他人;相反,把五种法放在自己心中现前,以这样的心而安住:“我会应时说,不应时不说;会说真实,不说虚假;会说柔和,不说粗恶;会说有意义的话,不说无意义的话;会以慈心说,不以嗔心说。”也就是以这种具有救护性质的心而安住。巴利
Anissitoti taṇhādiṭṭhinissayehi anissito. Aññamaheṭhayānoti aññaṃ kañci puggalaṃ aviheṭhento. Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto. Nūpavadeyya kañcīti aññaṃ kañci puggalaṃ sīlavipattiyā vā ācāravipattiyā vā attānaṃ ukkaṃsetukāmatāya vā paraṃ vambhetukāmatāya vā na upavadeyya, aññadatthu pañca dhamme ajjhattaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā, ‘‘kālena vakkhāmi, no akālena, bhūtena vakkhāmi , no abhūtena, saṇhena vakkhāmi, no pharusena, atthasaṃhitena vakkhāmi, no anatthasaṃhitena, mettacitto vakkhāmi, no dosantaro’’ti evaṃ ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhiteneva cittena viharati.
第一 第一木块喻经注释巴利
4. Paṭhamadārukkhandhopamasuttavaṇṇanā
241 第四经中,“看见”是指世尊坐在恒河岸边铺设的最胜佛座上,看见了。“正在漂流”是指那根木块被砍成四方形,放在山间,被风吹日晒变得极其干燥;到了雨季,乌云降雨,被水浮起,逐渐落入恒河的水流中,正随着那股水流漂去。“告诉比丘们”是指世尊心想:“我要拿这根木块作比喻,来指出那位在我的教法中因信心而出家的善男子。”因为想说法,所以召唤比丘们。“那根正被恒河水流冲着往下漂的大木块”——这句话是为了说明:那根木块虽然已经脱离了八种过失,正顺流向前,却还有另外八种过失会障碍它到达大海,世尊便就此开始宣说。巴利
241. Catutthe addasāti gaṅgātīre paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinno addasa. Vuyhamānanti caturassaṃ tacchetvā pabbatantare ṭhapitaṃ vātātapena suparisukkhaṃ pāvussake meghe vassante udakena uplavitvā anupubbena gaṅgāya nadiyā sote patitaṃ tena sotena vuyhamānaṃ. Bhikkhū āmantesīti ‘‘iminā dārukkhandhena sadisaṃ katvā mama sāsane saddhāpabbajitaṃ kulaputtaṃ dassessāmī’’ti dhammaṃ desetukāmatāya āmantesi. Amuṃ mahantaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ gaṅgāya nadiyā sotena vuyhamānanti idaṃ pana aṭṭhadosavimuttattā sotapaṭipannassa dārukkhandhassa apare samuddapattiyā antarāyakare aṭṭha dose dassetuṃ ārabhi.
在这里,应当这样理解它远离八种过失:比如有一根木头,生在离恒河不远的山脚下,被各种藤蔓缠住,变成枯黄的落叶,又被白蚁等啃食,就在那个地方彻底消失不见;而这根木头即使流入恒河,在弯曲的地方来回打转,到达大海,也无法在如摩尼宝珠般色泽的浪尖上闪耀。巴利
Tatrassa evaṃ aṭṭhadosavimuttatā veditabbā – eko hi gaṅgāya nadiyā avidūre pabbatatale jāto nānāvallīhi paliveṭhito paṇḍupalāsataṃ āpajjitvā upacikādīhi khajjamāno tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gacchati, ayaṃ dārukkhandho gaṅgaṃ otaritvā vaṅkaṭṭhānesu vilāsamāno sāgaraṃ patvā maṇivaṇṇe ūmipiṭṭhe sobhituṃ na labhati.
还有一种木头,长在恒河岸边,根朝外、枝朝内。它虽然时不时有下垂的枝条碰到水,但因为根是朝外的,所以进入恒河后,在弯曲的地方嬉游,到达大海,却不能在像摩尼宝珠一样颜色的浪尖上闪耀。巴利
Aparo gaṅgātīre bahimūlo antosākho hutvā jāto, ayaṃ kiñcāpi kālena kālaṃ olambinīhi sākhāhi udakaṃ phusati, bahimūlattā pana gaṅgaṃ otaritvā vaṅkaṭṭhānesu vilāsamāno sāgaraṃ patvā maṇivaṇṇe ūmipiṭṭhe sobhituṃ na labhati.
还有一种,生在恒河中间,根扎得很牢、站得很稳,但外面的枝条弯曲,被各种藤蔓缠住。这棵树也因为根扎得牢、外面又被藤蔓缠住,所以进入恒河之后……不能闪耀。巴利
Aparo majjhe gaṅgāya jāto, daḷhamūlena pana suppatiṭṭhito, bahi cassa gatā vaṅkasākhā nānāvallīhi ābaddhā, ayampi daḷhamūlattā bahiddhā vallīhi ābaddhattā ca gaṅgaṃ otaritvā…pe… sobhituṃ na labhati.
还有一种,就在它倒下的地方被沙子埋住,腐烂。这棵树也一样,下到恒河……无法获得。巴利
Aparo patitaṭṭhāneyeva vālikāya otthaṭo pūtibhāvaṃ āpajjati, ayampi gaṅgaṃ otaritvā…pe… na labhati.
另一种:因为长在两块岩石之间,像被深深栽稳了一样,安住不动,把来来去去的水劈成两股。这棵树因为在岩石间站得非常牢固,所以下到恒河……也不能获得。巴利
Aparo dvinnaṃ pāsāṇānaṃ antare jātattā, sunikhāto viya niccalo ṭhito, āgatāgataṃ udakaṃ dvidhā phāleti, ayaṃ pāsāṇantare suṭṭhu patiṭṭhitattā gaṅgaṃ otaritvā…pe… na labhati.
还有一种木头,长在空旷的地方,高高地伸向天空,被藤蔓缠住立在那里。过了一两年,等大洪水来的时候,它才被浸湿一次或两次。这种木头也是因为高高地立在天空中,又因为要过一两年才被浸湿一两次,所以沉入恒河……不能获得。巴利
Aparo abbhokāsaṭṭhāne nabhaṃ pūretvā vallīhi ābaddho ṭhito. Ekaṃ dve saṃvacchare atikkamitvā āgate mahoghe sakiṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā temeti, ayampi nabhaṃ pūretvā ṭhitatāya ceva ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā saṃvaccharānaṃ accayena sakiṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā temanatāya ca gaṅgaṃ otaritvā…pe… na labhati.
还有另一种:生在恒河中间小岛上的,枝干柔软的木头。洪水冲来时,它顺着水流躺倒;水退去后,又抬起头来,像在跳舞一样立着。大海为了得到这根木段,这样对恒河说:“尊敬的恒河女士,你为我带来旃檀心材、娑罗罗心材等各种木材,却不带来这根木段。”它说:“这容易,天王,下次我会知道。”下一次,恒河以铜色之水,像拥抱一样涌来。那木头也照样顺着水流躺倒,水退去后抬起头来,像在跳舞一样立着。这根木头因为自身太柔软,进入恒河……得不到。巴利
Aparopi majjhe gaṅgāya dīpake jāto mudukkhandhasākho oghe āgate anusotaṃ nipajjitvā, udake gate sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā, naccanto viya tiṭṭhati. Yassatthāya sāgaro gaṅgaṃ evaṃ viya vadati, ‘‘bhoti gaṅge tvaṃ mayhaṃ candanasārasalaḷasārādīni nānādārūni āharasi, dārukkhandhaṃ pana nāharasī’’ti. Sulabho esa, deva, punavāre jānissāmīti. Punavāre tambavaṇṇena udakena āliṅgamānā viya āgacchati. Sopi tatheva anusotaṃ nipajjitvā, udake gate sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā, naccanto viya tiṭṭhati. Ayaṃ attano mudutāya gaṅgaṃ otaritvā…pe… na labhati.
又有一段木头横在恒河里,被沙子盖住,像一座河中间的桥,成了许多生灵的依靠。两岸的竹子、芦苇、芦竹、迦拘陀树等漂过来,就卡在那里。同样,各种被冲刷的草木,以及漂下来的断杵、破簸箕,还有蛇、狗、象、马等腐烂的尸体,也都卡在那里。大恒河的水一碰到它,就分开成两股流走,鱼、鳖、鳄鱼、摩竭鱼等也在那里栖息。这段木头因为横卧河中、成了众多生灵的依靠,所以沉入恒河后,虽然在弯曲的地方游荡嬉戏,到达大海后,却无法在宝珠般颜色的浪尖上闪耀。巴利
Aparo gaṅgāya nadiyā tiriyaṃ patito vālikāya ottharito antarasetu viya bahūnaṃ paccayo jāto, ubhosu tīresu veḷunaḷakarañjakakudhādayo uplavitvā tattheva lagganti. Tathā nānāvidhā gacchā vuyhamānā bhinnamusalabhinnasuppaahikukkurahatthiassādikuṇapānipi tattheva lagganti. Mahāgaṅgāpi naṃ āsajja bhijjitvā dvidhā gacchati, macchakacchapakumbhīlamakarādayopi tattheva vāsaṃ kappenti. Ayampi tiriyaṃ patitvā mahājanassa paccayattakatabhāvena gaṅgaṃ otaritvā vaṅkaṭṭhānesu vilāsamāno sāgaraṃ patvā maṇivaṇṇe ūmipiṭṭhe sobhituṃ na labhati.
世尊为了说明顺流而下的木段因为已经解脱了这八种过失,同时也为了指出另外八种阻碍到达大海的过失,所以说了“这个大木段在恒河的流水中被冲走”等话。其中,“不搁浅于岸”是指它不会搁浅在岸上。“不被人类取”是指人们看见后心想“这木段真大”,就乘着筏子赶过去,但不会为了做椽子等用途而把它捞走。“不被非人取”是指非人不会想着“这是珍贵的栴檀心材,我们要把它放在天宫门口”而把它取走。巴利
Iti bhagavā imehi aṭṭhahi dosehi vimuttattā sotapaṭipannassa dārukkhandhassa apare samuddapattiyā antarāyakare aṭṭha dose dassetuṃ amuṃmahantaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ gaṅgāya nadiyā sotena vuyhamānantiādimāha. Tattha na thale ussīdissatīti thalaṃ nābhiruhissati. Na manussaggāho gahessatīti ‘‘mahā vatāyaṃ dārukkhandho’’ti disvā, uḷumpena taramānā gantvā, gopānasīādīnaṃ atthāya manussā na gaṇhissanti. Na amanussaggāho gahessatīti ‘‘mahaggho ayaṃ candanasāro, vimānadvāre naṃ ṭhapessāmā’’ti maññamānā na amanussā gaṇhissanti.
同样地,这里应当结合外部的八种过失,这样来理解譬喻的对应关系:就像一段生长在离恒河不远的山脚下的木头,就在那里被白蚁等啃噬,最终变得毫无用处——应当知道,具足“没有布施”等邪见的人就是这样。因为他远离了教法,所以即便走下圣道、安坐在定的岸边,也无法到达涅槃的大海。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha saddhiṃ bāhirehi aṭṭhahi dosehi evaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ – gaṅgāya avidūre pabbatatale jāto tattheva upacikādīhi khajjamāno apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gatadārukkhandho viya hi ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādikāya micchādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato puggalo veditabbo. Ayañhi sāsanassa dūrībhūtattā ariyamaggaṃ oruyha samādhikulle nisinno nibbānasāgaraṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti.
就像一棵长在恒河岸边、根朝外、枝朝里的树,应当把这种沙门居士型的人看作还没有断除在家束缚的人。他心里想:“心这东西本来就是无所系属的。嘴上说‘我是沙门’的时候,其实还是个居士;嘴上说‘我是居士’的时候,其实又是个沙门。谁知道将来会怎样呢?”即使年纪很大才出家,他也不肯放下在家的束缚。而且年老出家的人,根本谈不上有什么成就。他如果得到袈裟,得到的也是中间破断的,或者又旧又难看的。住处也只能得到寺院边角的草棚或简易棚屋。出去乞食时,还得跟在像自己儿孙辈的年轻比丘后面走,只能坐在最末尾。因此他痛苦、郁闷、掉眼泪,心里想:“我有家里传下来的财产,拿来受用过活到底合不合戒律呢?”于是他去问一位持律者:“尊者老师,把自己的财产拿来受用,合戒律吗?”对方说:“这没有过失,可以。”他就带上几个顺从自己、难以管教、行为恶劣的比丘,傍晚时分进入村子,站在村中央,叫人把村民们喊来,说:“我们自己劳作得来的收入,你们该交给谁?”村民说:“尊者,你们都出家了,我们能交给谁呢?”他说:“难道出家人就不能有自己受用的东西吗?”于是他拿起锄头和簸箕,做筑田埂、划地界之类的事,收集各种谷物、蔬菜和瓜果,冬天、夏天、雨季里,想吃什么就让人煮什么来吃,就这样过着沙门居士的生活。只是他身边唯独没有一个能照料他起居的女人,只和一个五髻童子相伴。这个人虽然像一棵枝条下垂、能碰到水、枝干朝里长的树一样,在塔院、菩提院等地方能和比丘们保持身体上的和合,但因为在家的束缚没有断,根还是朝外的,所以他无法踏入圣道,无法坐在定的高岸上,抵达涅槃的大海。巴利
Gaṅgātīre bahimūlo antosākho hutvā jāto viya acchinnagihibandhano samaṇakuṭimbikapuggalo daṭṭhabbo. Ayañhi ‘‘cittaṃ nāmetaṃ anibaddhaṃ, ‘samaṇomhī’ti vadantova gihī hoti, ‘gihīmhī’ti vadantova samaṇo hoti. Ko jānissati, kiṃ bhavissatī’’ti? Mahallakakāle pabbajantopi gihibandhanaṃ na vissajjeti. Mahallakapabbajitānañca sampatti nāma natthi. Tassa sace cīvaraṃ pāpuṇāti, antacchinnakaṃ vā jiṇṇadubbaṇṇaṃ vā pāpuṇāti. Senāsanampi vihārapaccante paṇṇasālā vā maṇḍapo vā pāpuṇāti. Piṇḍāya carantenāpi puttanattakānaṃ dārakānaṃ pacchato caritabbaṃ hoti, pariyante nisīditabbaṃ hoti. Tena so dukkhī dummano assūni muñcanto, ‘‘atthi me kulasantakaṃ dhanaṃ, kappati nu kho taṃ khādantena jīvitu’’nti cintetvā ekaṃ vinayadharaṃ pucchati – ‘‘kiṃ, bhante ācariya, attano santakaṃ vicāretvā khādituṃ kappati, no kappatī’’ti? ‘‘Natthettha doso, kappateta’’nti. So attano bhajamānake katipaye dubbace durācāre bhikkhū gahetvā, sāyanhasamaye antogāmaṃ gantvā, gāmamajjhe ṭhito gāmike pakkosāpetvā, ‘‘amhākaṃ payogato uṭṭhitaṃ āyaṃ kassa dethā’’ti āha. Bhante, tumhe pabbajitā, mayaṃ kassa dassāmāti? Kiṃ pabbajitānaṃ attano santakaṃ na vaṭṭatīti? Kuddāla-piṭakaṃ gahetvā, khettamariyādabandhanādīni karonto nānāppakāraṃ pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇañceva phalāphale ca saṅgaṇhitvā, hemantagimhavassānesu yaṃ yaṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ pacāpetvā khādanto samaṇakuṭumbiko hutvā jīvati. Kevalamassa pañcacūḷakena dārakena saddhiṃ pādaparicārikāva ekā natthi. Ayaṃ puggalo kiñcāpi olambinīhi sākhāhi udakaṃ phusamāno antosākho rukkho viya cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇādīsu bhikkhūnaṃ kāyasāmaggiṃ deti, gihibandhanassa pana acchinnatāya bahimūlattā ariyamaggaṃ otaritvā samādhikulle nisinno nibbānasāgaraṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti.
就像生在恒河中间、被外面的藤蔓缠住、枝条弯曲的树一样,应当把这种依靠僧团财物过活的邪命者看作这样的人。有些人虽然舍弃了在家的束缚而出家,却没能在合适的地方得到出家。因为出家这件事,确实和结生很相似。就像人们在哪里结生,就学习那个家族的行为举止;比丘在谁面前出家,也就接受那个人的行为举止。所以,有人在不适当地地方出家后,就被排除在教授、教诫、诵经、问法等之外。他清早拿着无盖的罐子去水边,为亲教师和导师等人的饭食把衣钵搭在肩上,走进食堂,和难教的沙弥一起玩各种游戏,和寺院的童仆混在一起住。巴利
Gaṅgāya majjhe jāto bahiddhā vallīhi ābaddhavaṅkasākhā viya saṅghasantakaṃ nissāya jīvamāno bhinnājīvapuggalo daṭṭhabbo. Ekacco gihibandhanaṃ pahāya pabbajantopi sāruppaṭṭhāne pabbajjaṃ na labhati. Pabbajjā hi nāmesā paṭisandhiggahaṇasadisā. Yathā manussā yattha paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti, tesaṃyeva kulānaṃ ācāraṃ sikkhanti, evaṃ bhikkhūpi yesaṃ santike pabbajanti, tesaṃyeva ācāraṃ gaṇhanti. Tasmā ekacco asāruppaṭṭhāne pabbajitvā ovādānusāsanīuddesaparipucchādīhi paribāhiro hutvā pātova muṇḍaghaṭaṃ gahetvā udakatitthaṃ gacchati, ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ bhattatthāya khandhe pattaṃ katvā bhattasālaṃ gacchati, dubbacasāmaṇerehi saddhiṃ nānākīḷaṃ kīḷati, ārāmikadārakehi saṃsaṭṭho viharati.
他年轻做比丘的时候,跟一些相宜的年轻比丘和寺院杂工一起去享用僧团的财物,说:“这是漏尽阿罗汉们从某位国王那里接受的僧团财物,你们不要给僧团这样那样的东西,因为国王或大臣听到你们的所作所为,是不会高兴的。来,现在你们做这做那吧。”他让人拿起锄头和篮子,在水库下方的水沟里做该做的活,又把许多谷物和蔬菜送进精舍,让杂工向僧团报告自己的功劳。僧团就说:“这位年轻比丘帮了很多忙,给他一百或两百吧。”于是让人给了他。就这样,他从这里那里仅仅靠着僧团的东西不断壮大,在外被二十一种邪命所束缚,无法踏上圣道,无法坐在定的筏上,无法到达涅槃的大海。巴利
So daharabhikkhukāle attano anurūpehi daharabhikkhūhi ceva ārāmikehi ca saddhiṃ saṅghabhogaṃ gantvā, ‘‘ayaṃ khīṇāsavehi asukarañño santikā paṭiggahitasaṅghabhogo, tumhe saṅghassa idañcidañca na detha, na hi tumhākaṃ pavattiṃ sutvā rājā vā rājamahāmattā vā attamanā bhavissanti, etha dāni idañcidañca karothā’’ti kuddāla-piṭakāni gāhāpetvā heṭṭhā taḷākamātikāsu kattabbakiccāni kārāpetvā bahuṃ pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇaṃ vihāraṃ pavesetvā ārāmikehi attano upakārabhāvaṃ saṅghassa ārocāpeti. Saṅgho ‘‘ayaṃ daharo bahūpakāro, imassa sataṃ vā dvisataṃ vā dethā’’ti dāpeti. Iti so ito cito ca saṅghasantakeneva vaḍḍhanto bahiddhā ekavīsatividhāhi anesanāhi baddho ariyamaggaṃ otaritvā samādhikulle nisinno nibbānasāgaraṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti.
就像一棵倒在原地、被沙子埋住而腐烂的树,应当知道这个极度懈怠、贪吃的人也是这样。五盖针对的正是这种人:他眼里只有利养,贪求各种资具供养,抛弃了老师与戒师的义务,不做诵习、提问和如理作意。它们实际上是这样说的:贤者们,我们去谁那里呢?然后昏沉睡眠盖站起来说:你们没看见吗?住在某个精舍的这个懈怠者,去了某个村子,在粥堆前喝粥,在糕饼堆前吃糕饼,在饭堆前吃饭,回到精舍后抛弃一切义务,不做诵习等事,当他躺到床上时,就给我腾出了地方。巴利
Patitaṭṭhāneyeva vālikāya ottharitvā pūtibhāvaṃ āpāditarukkho viya ālasiyamahagghaso veditabbo. Evarūpañhi puggalaṃ āmisacakkhuṃ paccayalolaṃ vissaṭṭhaācariyupajjhāyavattaṃ uddesaparipucchāyonisomanasikāravajjitaṃ sandhāya pañca nīvaraṇāni atthato evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘bho, kassa santikaṃ gacchāmā’’ti? Atha thinamiddhaṃ uṭṭhāya evamāha – ‘‘kiṃ na passatha? Eso asukavihāravāsī kusītapuggalo asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ gantvā yāgumatthake yāguṃ, pūvamatthake pūvaṃ, bhattamatthake bhattaṃ ajjhoharitvā vihāraṃ āgamma vissaṭṭhasabbavatto uddesādivirahito mañcaṃ upagacchanto mayhaṃ okāsaṃ karotī’’ti.
接着,欲贪盖跳出来说:“喂,他给你让出地方,就等于给我让出了地方。他现在刚睡完觉,带着烦恼染污醒来,就会去寻思欲念。”接着,嗔恚盖跳出来说:“他给你们让出地方,就等于给我让出了地方。他现在刚睡完觉起来,有人对他说‘去做你该做的事吧’,他就会说:‘喂,这些人自己不干活,却来管我们的事。’然后说各种粗恶的话,瞪着眼睛走来走去。”接着,掉举盖跳出来说:“他给你们让出地方,就等于给我让出了地方。懈怠的人就像被风吹动的火堆一样,躁动不安。”接着,恶作盖跳出来说:“他给你们让出地方,就等于给我让出了地方。懈怠的人就是这样,老是后悔,把不该做的当成该做的,把该做的当成不该做的。”接着,疑盖跳出来说:“他给你们让出地方,就等于给我让出了地方。这样的人在八种情形上会生起大疑惑。”就这样,五盖像恶狗之类扑向一头被砍断犄角的老牛一样,扑向这个极度懈怠、贪图饮食的人,把他牢牢抓住。他也无法进入圣道之流,安坐在定的大岸上,抵达涅槃大海。巴利
Tato kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ uṭṭhāyāha – ‘‘bho, tava okāse kate mayhaṃ katova hoti, idāneva so niddāyitvā kilesānurañjitova pabujjhitvā kāmavitakkaṃ vitakkessatī’’ti. Tato byāpādanīvaraṇaṃ uṭṭhāyāha – ‘‘tumhākaṃ okāse kate mayhaṃ katova hoti. Idāneva niddāyitvā vuṭṭhito ‘vattapaṭivattaṃ karohī’ti vuccamāno, ‘bho, ime attano kammaṃ akatvā amhesu byāvaṭā’ti nānappakāraṃ pharusavacanaṃ vadanto akkhīni nīharitvā vicarissatī’’ti. Tato uddhaccanīvaraṇaṃ uṭṭhāyāha – ‘‘tumhākaṃ okāse kate mayhaṃ katova hoti, kusīto nāma vātāhato aggikkhandho viya uddhato hotī’’ti. Atha kukuccanīvaraṇaṃ uṭṭhāyāha – ‘‘tumhākaṃ okāse kate mayhaṃ katova hoti, kusīto nāma kukkuccapakatova hoti, akappiye kappiyasaññaṃ kappiye ca akappiyasaññaṃ uppādetī’’ti. Atha vicikicchānīvaraṇaṃ uṭṭhāyāha – ‘‘tumhākaṃ okāse kate mayhaṃ katova hoti. Evarūpo hi aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu mahāvicikicchaṃ uppādesī’’ti. Evaṃ ālasiyamahagghasaṃ pañca nīvaraṇāni caṇḍasunakhādayo viya siṅgacchinnaṃ jaraggavaṃ ajjhottharitvā gaṇhanti. Sopi ariyamaggasotaṃ otaritvā samādhikulle nisinno nibbānasāgaraṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti.
要知道,有一种持邪见的人,就像一棵树根埋植在两块石头之间、却还立在那里的树,生起了邪见,并且安住在邪见里。他主张:“无色界里有色,无想有情界里有心在流转,出世间道有很多个心刹那,随眠和心不相应,那些众生在流转、在轮回。”他就像阿利咤比丘和荆棘沙弥那样四处游走。而且他还说挑拨离间的话,在亲教师等人和共住弟子等人之间搬弄是非,让他们分裂。他也虽已踏入圣道之流、坐在定的岸边,却仍到不了涅槃大海。巴利
Dvinnaṃ pāsāṇānaṃ antare nikhātamūlākārena ṭhitarukkho viya diṭṭhiṃ uppādetvā ṭhito diṭṭhigatiko veditabbo. So hi ‘‘arūpabhave rūpaṃ atthi, asaññībhave cittaṃ pavattati, bahucittakkhaṇiko lokuttaramaggo, anusayo cittavippayutto, te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṃsarantī’’ti vadanto ariṭṭho viya kaṇṭakasāmaṇero viya ca vicarati. Pisuṇavāco pana hoti, upajjhāyādayo saddhivihārikādīhi bhindanto vicarati. Sopi ariyamaggasotaṃ otaritvā samādhikulle nisinno nibbānasāgaraṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti.
应该知道有一种人:就像一棵长在空地上、藤蔓缠满高耸入云的树,过了一两年,等到大洪水来时,也不过被浸湿一两次。同样,有人年纪很大才出家,住在边远地区,很难见到僧众,也很难听到佛法。有的人年老出家,没几天就受了具足戒,到第五年时把巴帝摩卡背熟了;到第十年时,在持律长老面前讲律的时候,嘴里含着胡椒或诃子块,用扇子遮住脸,坐着打瞌睡。就这样凭一点借口,便成了所谓的已通达律者,然后拿着衣钵去边地。那里的人们因为难得见到比丘而敬重他,说:“尊者,您就住在这里吧。”于是为他建精舍,种上能开花结果的树,让他住在那里。巴利
Abbhokāse nabhaṃ pūretvā vallīhi ābaddho ṭhito ekaṃ dve saṃvacchare atikkamitvā āgate mahoghe sakiṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā temanarukkho viya mahallakakāle pabbajitvā paccante vasamāno dullabhasaṅghadassano ceva dullabhadhammassavano ca puggalo veditabbo. Ekacco hi vuḍḍhakāle pabbajito katipāhena upasampadaṃ labhitvā pañcavassakāle pātimokkhaṃ paguṇaṃ katvā dasavassakāle vinayadharattherassa santike vinayakathākāle maricaṃ vā harītakakhaṇḍaṃ vā mukhe ṭhapetvā bījanena mukhaṃ pidhāya niddāyanto nisīditvā lesakappena katavinayo nāma hutvā pattacīvaraṃ ādāya paccantaṃ gacchati. Tatra naṃ manussā sakkaritvā bhikkhudassanassa dullabhatāya ‘‘idheva, bhante, vasathā’’ti vihāraṃ kāretvā pupphūpagaphalūpagarukkhe ropetvā tattha vāsenti.
这时,住在类似大寺那样的寺院里的多闻比丘们心想:“我们去乡下把染衣等事情办完就回来。”于是动身前往那里。他见到他们后,满心欢喜,尽了自己该尽的招待义务。第二天,他带着他们进入托钵的村庄,说:“这位长老是经师,这位是论师,这位是持律者,这位是三藏师。你们什么时候才能遇到这样的长老呢?请让他们说法吧。”近事男们说:“我们会请他们说法的。”于是清扫了通往寺院的道路,带上酥油等物品,来到大长老面前,说:“尊者,我们要请法,请安排说法的人。”第二天他们再来听法。巴利
Atha mahāvihārasadisavihārā bahussutā bhikkhū, ‘‘janapade cīvararajanādīni katvā āgamissāmā’’ti tattha gacchanti. So te disvā, haṭṭhatuṭṭho vattapaṭivattaṃ katvā, punadivase ādāya bhikkhācāragāmaṃ pavisitvā, ‘‘asuko thero suttantiko, asuko abhidhammiko, asuko vinayadharo, asuko tepiṭako, evarūpe there kadā labhissatha, dhammasavanaṃ kārethā’’ti vadati. Upāsakā ‘‘dhammassavanaṃ kāressāmā’’ti vihāramaggaṃ sodhetvā, sappitelādīni ādāya, mahātheraṃ upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘bhante, dhammassavanaṃ kāressāma, dhammakathikānaṃ vicārethā’’ti vatvā punadivase āgantvā dhammaṃ suṇanti.
住在寺里的长老为客比丘们收拾衣钵,整个白天都待在里面的房间里。白天讲法的人起身了,像倒水一样流畅地诵出经文,诵完就起身走了,这位长老完全不知道。夜里讲法的人像搅动大海一样讲了一整夜,讲完起身走了,他也完全不知道。凌晨讲法的人讲完起身走了,他还是完全不知道。到了清晨,他起床洗脸,把衣钵递给长老们,准备去托钵时,问大长老:“尊者,白天讲法的人讲了哪部本生?诵经的人诵了哪部经?夜里讲法的人讲了什么法谈?凌晨讲法的人讲了哪部本生?蕴有多少?界有多少?处有多少?”这样的人,即使过了一两年,偶尔也能见到比丘、听到佛法,却像洪水来时只被水浸湿一两次的树一样。他就这样远离了见僧众和闻法,住在偏远的地方,没能踏上圣道;即使坐在定境的高处,也到不了涅槃的大海。巴利
Nevāsikatthero āgantukānaṃ pattacīvarāni paṭisāmento antogabbheyeva divasabhāgaṃ vītināmeti. Divākathiko uṭṭhito sarabhāṇako ghaṭena udakaṃ vamento viya sarabhāṇaṃ bhaṇitvā uṭṭhito, tampi so na jānāti. Rattikathiko sāgaraṃ khobhento viya rattiṃ kathetvā uṭṭhito, tampi so na jānāti. Paccūsakathiko kathetvā uṭṭhāsi, tampi so na jānāti. Pātova pana uṭṭhāya mukhaṃ dhovitvā, therānaṃ pattacīvarāni upanāmetvā, bhikkhācāraṃ upagacchanto mahātheraṃ āha – ‘‘bhante, divākathiko kataraṃ jātakaṃ nāma kathesi, sarabhāṇako kataraṃ suttaṃ nāma bhaṇi, rattikathiko kataraṃ dhammakathaṃ nāma kathesi, paccūsakathiko kataraṃ jātakaṃ nāma kathesi, khandhā nāma kati, dhātuyo nāma kati, āyatanā nāma katī’’ti. Evarūpo ekaṃ dve saṃvaccharāni atikkamitvā bhikkhudassanañceva dhammassavanañca labhantopi oghe āgate udakena sakiṃ vā dvikkhattuṃ vā temitarukkhasadiso hoti. So evaṃ saṅghadassanato ca dhammassavanato ca paṭikkamma dūre vasanto ariyamaggaṃ otaritvā samādhikulle nisinno nibbānasāgaraṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti.
在恒河中央的洲岛上出生、像柔嫩树一样的诵经者,应当被理解为声音甜美的人。他学了许多著名的本生故事,比如须大拏本生等,然后去了很难见到比丘的边远地区,在那里因为说法而让众人心生净信,受到人们供养,住在为他而建的、长满繁花硕果之树、像欢喜园一样悦意的精舍里。后来,那些承担重任的比丘们听说了这件事,就说:“听说那位尊者的心如此系缚在施主身上而住。这位聪明的比丘有能力学习佛语,或者修习业处。我们把他带来,和他一起到某位长老那里学法,到某位长老那里修习业处。”于是他们就去了那里。巴利
Majjhe gaṅgāya dīpake jāto mudurukkho viya madhurassarabhāṇakapuggalo veditabbo. So hi abhiññātāni abhiññātāni vessantarādīni jātakāni uggaṇhitvā, dullabhabhikkhudassanaṃ paccantaṃ gantvā, tattha dhammakathāya pasāditahadayena janena upaṭṭhiyamāno attānaṃ uddissa kate sampannapupphaphalarukkhe nandanavanābhirāme vihāre vasati. Athassa bhārahārabhikkhū taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā, ‘‘asuko kira evaṃ upaṭṭhākesu paṭibaddhacitto viharati. Paṇḍito bhikkhu paṭibalo buddhavacanaṃ vā uggaṇhituṃ, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā manasikātuṃ, ānetvā tena saddhiṃ asukattherassa santike dhammaṃ uggaṇhissāma, asukattherassa santike kammaṭṭhāna’’nti tattha gacchanti.
他为他们尽了义务。傍晚时分,那些比丘外出经行时问他:“贤友,这座塔是你建的吗?”他说:“是的,尊者。”他们又问:“这棵菩提树、这座凉亭、这座布萨堂、这座火堂、这条经行道,都是你建的吗?这些树是你让人栽种的,你让人把精舍建得像欢喜园一样宜人吗?”他说:“是的,尊者。”巴利
So tesaṃ vattaṃ katvā sāyanhasamayaṃ vihāracārikaṃ nikkhantehi tehi ‘‘imaṃ, āvuso, cetiyaṃ tayā kārita’’nti puṭṭho, ‘‘āma, bhante’’ti vadati. ‘‘Ayaṃ bodhi, ayaṃ maṇḍapo, idaṃ uposathāgāraṃ, esā aggisālā, ayaṃ caṅkamo tayā kārito. Ime rukkhe ropāpetvā tayā nandanavanābhirāmo vihāro kārito’’ti. ‘‘Āma, bhante’’ti, vadati.
傍晚,他去到长老的住处,顶礼之后问道:“尊者,你们为什么来?”对方回答:“贤友,我们是为了带你走才来的——先在某位长老那里学法,再在某位长老那里取业处,然后到某片森林里和合共修沙门法。就是因为这个缘故,我们才来的。”他说:“善哉,尊者,你们竟是为了我的利益而来。我在这里住久了,也心生厌倦,我愿意走。尊者,我去拿衣钵。”对方说:“贤友,沙弥们年纪小,路上又走累了,今天先住下,明天吃完午饭我们再走。”他说:“善哉,尊者。”第二天,他和他们一起进村乞食。村民们心想:“我们的师父带了许多客比丘回来。”于是摆好座位,供了粥,听他说了令人欢喜的开示,然后供养了饭食。长老们说:“贤友,你做完随喜就先出来,我们找个有水又舒服的地方用斋。”说完就先出去了。巴利
So sāyaṃ therupaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā vanditvā pucchati – ‘‘kasmā, bhante, āgatatthā’’ti? ‘‘Āvuso, taṃ ādāya gantvā, asukattherassa santike dhammaṃ uggaṇhitvā, asukattherassa santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ, asukasmiṃ nāma araññe samaggā samaṇadhammaṃ karissāmāti iminā kāraṇena āgatamhā’’ti. Sādhu, bhante, tumhe nāma mayhaṃ atthāya āgatā, ahampi ciranivāsena idha ukkaṇṭhito gacchāmi, pattacīvaraṃ gaṇhāmi, bhanteti. Āvuso, sāmaṇeradaharā maggakilantā, ajja vasitvā sve pacchābhattaṃ gamissāmāti. Sādhu, bhanteti punadivase tehi saddhiṃ piṇḍāya pavisati. Gāmavāsino ‘‘amhākaṃ ayyo bahū āgantuke bhikkhū gahetvā āgato’’ti āsanāni paññāpetvā yāguṃ pāyetvā sukhanisinnakathaṃ sutvā bhattaṃ adaṃsu. Therā ‘‘tvaṃ, āvuso, anumodanaṃ katvā nikkhama, mayaṃ udakaphāsukaṭṭhāne bhattakiccaṃ karissāmā’’ti nikkhantā.
村里人听完随喜开示后,问道:“尊者,这些长老是从哪里来的?”年轻比丘回答说:“他们是我的亲教师和依止师,是跟我同一位亲教师的同门,是我相知相交的好友。”村里人又问:“他们为什么来?”他说:“他们想带我走。”村里人问:“那你也想走吗?”他答道:“是的,各位贤友。”村里人说:“尊者,您这是什么话?我们这座布萨堂是为谁建的?这座斋堂是为谁建的?这火堂等设施又是为谁建的?每逢吉凶之事,我们该去找谁呢?”那些大近事女们也坐在那里,止不住地流泪。年轻比丘心想:“你们都这么难过了,我就算走了又能怎样?我还是把长老们送走吧。”于是他回到了精舍。巴利
Gāmavāsino anumodanaṃ sutvā pucchiṃsu, ‘‘kuto, bhante, therā āgatā’’ti? Ete amhākaṃ ācariyupajjhāyā samānupajjhāyā sandiṭṭhā sambhattāti. Kasmā āgatāti? Maṃ gahetvā gantukāmatāyāti. Tumhe pana gantukāmāti? Āmāvusoti. Kiṃ vadetha, bhante, amhehi kassa uposathāgāraṃ kāritaṃ, kassa bhojanasālā, kassa aggisālādayo kāritā, mayaṃ maṅgalāmaṅgalesu kassa santikaṃ gamissāmāti? Mahāupāsikāyopi tattheva nisīditvā assūni pavattayiṃsu. Daharo ‘‘tumhesu evaṃ dukkhitesu ahaṃ gantvā kiṃ karissāmi? There uyyojessāmī’’ti vihāraṃ gato.
长老们吃完饭,收拾好钵和袈裟,坐在那里。一看到他,就说:“贤友,你怎么耽搁这么久?天都亮了,我们走吧。”他回答说:“是的,尊者,你们自在无事。可是某某家的砖基还照原样搁着,某某家等处的彩绘工程也还在做。就算我走了,心里也会牵挂散乱。请尊者们在前面先走,到某某寺院去做洗衣、染衣这些准备工作,我随后就赶到那里。”长老们知道他想退缩,就说:“那你晚点再跟上来吧。”说完便动身离开了。巴利
Therāpi katabhattakiccā pattacīvarāni gahetvā nisinnā taṃ disvāva, ‘‘kiṃ, āvuso, cirāyasi, divā hoti, gacchāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Āma, bhante, tumhe sukhitā, asukagehassa iṭṭhakāmūlaṃ ṭhitasaṇṭhāneneva ṭhitaṃ, asukagehādīnaṃ cittakammamūlādīni atthi, gatassāpi me cittavikkhepo bhavissati, tumhe purato gantvā asukavihāre cīvaradhovanarajanādīni karotha, ahaṃ tattha sampāpuṇissāmīti. Te tassa osakkitukāmataṃ ñatvā tvaṃ pacchā āgaccheyyāsīti pakkamiṃsu.
他送走长老们后,转身回到精舍,环顾斋堂等地方,看见精舍这么优美宜人,就想:“太好了,我没走。要是我走了,天哪,万一有位说法师来了,用说法打动所有人的心,把这精舍变成他自己部派的产业,那我以后回来,就只能跟在他后面吃他剩下的饭食过活了。”巴利
So there anugantvā nivatto vihārameva āgantvā bhojanasālādīni olokento vihāraṃ rāmaṇeyyakaṃ disvā cintesi – ‘‘sādhu vatamhi na gato. Sace agamissaṃ, koci, deva, dhammakathiko āgantvā , sabbesaṃ manaṃ bhinditvā, vihāraṃ attano nikāyasantakaṃ kareyya, atha mayā pacchā āgantvā etassa pacchato laddhapiṇḍaṃ bhuñjantena caritabbaṃ bhavissatī’’ti.
后来,他听说:“那些比丘到了他们去的地方,按一部派、两部派,乃至一藏、两藏的方式学习佛语,成了注释导师,成了持律者,有的带着上百随从,有的带着上千随从,四处游化。而那些去那里修习沙门法的人,精进努力,有的证得入流者,有的一来者、不来者,有的成了阿罗汉,在大恭敬中般涅槃。”他就想:“如果我也去了,这些成就我也会拥有。可是我放不下这个地方,损失太大了。”这种人因为自己性格软弱,放不下那个地方,所以无法进入圣道,无法坐在定筏上,无法到达涅槃之海。巴利
So aparena samayena suṇāti, ‘‘te kira bhikkhū gataṭṭhāne ekanikāyadvenikāyaekapiṭakadvepiṭakādivasena buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā aṭṭhakathācariyā jātā vinayadharā jātā sataparivārāpi sahassaparivārāpi caranti. Ye panettha samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ gatā, te ghaṭentā vāyamantā sotāpannā jātā, sakadāgāmino anāgāmino arahanto jātā, mahāsakkārena parinibbutā’’ti . So cintesi – ‘‘sace ahampi agamissaṃ, mayhampesā sampatti abhavissa, imaṃ pana ṭhānaṃ muñcituṃ asakkonto ativiya parihīnamhī’’ti. Ayaṃ puggalo attano mudutāya taṃ ṭhānaṃ amuñcanto ariyamaggaṃ otaritvā samādhikulle nisinno nibbānasāgaraṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti.
应该知道有一种人:他就像掉在恒河中间、被沙子覆盖而变成连接两岸的沙洲,又像一棵长成后成为许多人依靠的树。他在《车乘经》《大圣种经》《月亮譬喻经》等所讲的修行方法中,学了其中一种修行方法后安住其中,却是懈怠退堕的人。因为他学了那依修行而立的法之后,凭着自己天生优美的嗓音,前往像心峰山那样的大寺院,做打扫塔院等义务。后来,当听法大众聚集时,新来的年轻比丘们对他说:“请说法吧。”他就把正确学来的法,依照那修行方法阐明并讲说。那时,穿粪扫衣的、常行乞食的等所有长老、中年、新学比丘都心生欢喜:“啊,真是善士!”巴利
Gaṅgāya nadiyā tiriyaṃ patitvā, vālikāya otthaṭabhāvena antarasetu viya hutvā, bahūnaṃ paccayo jātarukkho viya rathavinītamahāariyavaṃsacandopamādipaṭipadāsu aññataraṃ paṭipadaṃ uggahetvā ṭhito olīnavuttiko puggalo veditabbo. So hi taṃ paṭipattinissitaṃ dhammaṃ uggahetvā pakatiyā mañjussaro cittalapabbatādisadisaṃ mahantaṃ ṭhānaṃ gantvā cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīni karoti. Atha naṃ dhammassavanaggaṃ pattaṃ āgantukā daharā ‘‘dhammaṃ kathehī’’ti vadanti. So sammā uggahitaṃ dhammaṃ paṭipadaṃ dīpetvā katheti. Athassa paṃsukūlikapiṇḍapātikādayo sabbe theranavamajjhimā bhikkhū ‘‘aho sappuriso’’ti attamanā bhavanti.
他有时给某人提示一点因缘,有时提示半首偈颂,有时提示一整首偈颂,就像用铁箍把年轻沙弥们箍在一起一样,把他们拉拢过来,然后去拜访大长老们,问道:“尊者,这里有座古寺,那里有什么收入吗?”长老们说:“贤友,你说什么?那里有两万四千迦利沙面积的收入呢。”“尊者,您虽然这么说,可灶上连火都烧不起来啊。”“贤友,大寺僧众得到的东西,就是这样被糟蹋掉的,没人能把它恢复起来。”“尊者,那是古时候国王们布施的、诸漏尽者所接受的东西,他们为什么要把它糟蹋掉呢?”“贤友,要是能有那么一位说法师的话,或许还能再得到吧。”“尊者,请不要这么说。我们就是专门阐明修行的说法师。您是把我当成‘僧团的管家、寺院的护持者’来使唤吧。”“贤友,这难道不是不如法的事吗?不过,要是由像您这样的人来讲,我们或许能有收入吧?”“既然这样,尊者,等寺院的净人来了以后,请你们替我们担起责任,我们会给他们开示一条如法的途径。”巴利
So kassaci nidānamattaṃ, kassaci upaḍḍhagāthaṃ, kassaci gāthaṃ upaṭṭhāpento ayapaṭṭakena ābandhanto viya daharasāmaṇere saṅgaṇhitvā mahāthere upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘bhante, ayaṃ porāṇakavihāro atthi, ettha koci tatruppādo’’ti?, Pucchati. Therā – ‘‘kiṃ vadesi, āvuso, catuvīsati karīsasahassāni tatruppādo’’ti. Bhante, tumhe evaṃ vadetha, uddhane pana aggipi na jalatīti. Āvuso, mahāvihāravāsīhi laddhā nāma evameva nassanti, na koci saṇṭhapetīti. Bhante, porāṇakarājūhi dinnaṃ khīṇāsavehi paṭiggahitaṃ kasmā ete nāsentīti? Āvuso, tādisena dhammakathikena sakkā bhaveyya laddhunti. Bhante, mā evaṃ vadetha, amhe paṭipattidīpakadhammakathikā nāma, tumhe maṃ ‘‘saṅghakuṭumbiko vihārupaṭṭhāko’’ti maññamānā kātukāmāti. Kiṃ nu kho, āvuso, akappiyametaṃ, tumhādisehi pana kathite amhākaṃ uppajjeyyāti? Tena hi, bhante, ārāmikesu āgatesu amhākaṃ bhāraṃ karotha, ekaṃ kappiyadvāraṃ kathessāmāti.
他一大早就去了,站在集会堂里。等净人们来了,他就说:“近事男们,某块田的那份收成在哪里?某块田的那枚咖哈巴那在哪里?”诸如此类。他拿了这人的田,交给另一个人。就这样依次驳回这一项那一项、又给予这一项那一项,结果弄成这般情形:端着粥的、端着糕点的、端着饭食的、端着油、蜜、糖浆、罐装酥油等的人,全都只到他跟前来了。整座寺院乱成一团,那些贤善的比丘们感到厌离,都离开了。巴利
So pātova gantvā, sannipātasālāyaṃ ṭhatvā, ārāmikesu āgatesu ‘‘upāsakā asukakhette bhāgo kuhiṃ, asukakhette kahāpaṇaṃ kuhi’’ntiādīni vatvā, aññassa khettaṃ gahetvā, aññassa deti. Evaṃ anukkamena taṃ taṃ paṭisedhento tassa tassa dento tathā akāsi , yathā yāguhatthā pūvahatthā bhattahatthā telamadhuphāṇitaghatādihatthā ca attanova santikaṃ āgacchanti. Sakalavihāro ekakolāhalo hoti, pesalā bhikkhū nibbijja apakkamiṃsu.
他给许多被亲教师和依止师抛弃、难以管教的弟子担任亲教师,把精舍塞得满满的。外来比丘站在精舍门口问:“这精舍里住的是些什么人?”一听说“是某某之类的人”,就从外面径自离去。这个人横在教法中间,成了大众供养的对象,虽踏上圣道、安坐在定的木筏上,却不能到达涅槃之海。巴利
Sopi ācariyupajjhāyehi vissaṭṭhakānaṃ bahūnaṃ dubbacapuggalānaṃ upajjhaṃ dento vihāraṃ pūreti. Āgantukā bhikkhū vihāradvāre ṭhatvāva ‘‘vihāre ke vasantī’’ti, pucchitvā, ‘‘evarūpā nāma bhikkhū’’ti sutvā bāhireneva pakkamanti. Ayaṃ puggalo sāsane tiriyaṃ nipannatāya mahājanassa paccayabhāvaṃ upagato ariyamaggaṃ otaritvā samādhikulle nisinno nibbānasāgaraṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti.
那位比丘听懂了以“倾向涅槃”这句话作结的法说,因为善于把握前后文的衔接,就说出“尊者,这是怎么回事”等话来问。如来坐在大众中,也知道“这里有个比丘善于衔接前后文,他会来问我问题”,就是为了给他开口的机会,才在这个地方把说法收住。巴利
Bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti ‘‘nibbānapabbhārā’’ti padena osāpitaṃ dhammadesanaṃ ñatvā anusandhikusalatāya etaṃ ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tathāgatopi hi imissaṃ parisati nisinno ‘‘anusandhikusalo bhikkhu atthi, so maṃ pañhaṃ pucchissatī’’ti tasseva okāsakaraṇatthāya imasmiṃ ṭhāne desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
现在,对于前面以“此岸”等方式所说的内处等,应当这样理解亲近和不亲近等情况。如果一个人依着“我的眼清净,哪怕极微小的色所缘我也能看透”这种想法而贪著于眼,或者因为翳障、风等导致眼净色受损,心想“我的眼不好使,连很大的色所缘都看不清”,由此生起忧恼,这就叫亲近眼处。而如果以无常、苦、无我三相来观照,就叫不亲近。耳处等也是同样的道理。巴利
Idāni orimaṃ tīrantiādinā nayena vuttesu ajjhattikāyatanādīsu evaṃ upagamanānupagamanādīni veditabbāni. ‘‘Mayhaṃ cakkhu-pasannaṃ, ahaṃ appamattakampi rūpārammaṇaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ sakkomī’’ti etaṃ nissāya cakkhuṃ assādentopi timirakavātādīhi upahatapasādo ‘‘amanāpaṃ mayhaṃ cakkhu, mahantampi rūpārammaṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ na sakkomī’’ti domanassaṃ āpajjantopi cakkhāyatanaṃ upagacchati nāma. Aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti tiṇṇaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ vasena vipassanto pana na upagacchati nāma. Sotādīsupi eseva nayo.
对于意处,如果有人这样自我陶醉:“我的意真是让人满意啊,它什么都不往坏处抓,全都往好处抓”,或者“凡是我用意想过的事,没有办不成的”,这就是在亲近意处;如果有人这样生起忧恼:“我的意对不该想的事,总是不往好处抓”,这也是在亲近意处。而对可意的色生起贪,对不可意的色生起嗔,就是在亲近色处。声处等也是同样的道理。巴利
Manāyatane pana ‘‘manāpaṃ vata me mano, kiñci vāmato aggahetvā sabbaṃ dakkhiṇatova gaṇhātī’’ti vā ‘‘manena me cintitacintitassa alābho nāma natthī’’ti vā evaṃ assādentopi, ‘‘ducintitacintitassa me mano appadakkhiṇaggāhī’’ti evaṃ domanassaṃ uppādentopi manāyatanaṃ upagacchati nāma. Iṭṭhe pana rūpe rāgaṃ, aniṭṭhe paṭighaṃ uppādento rūpāyatanaṃ upagacchati nāma. Saddāyatanādīsupi eseva nayo.
这是“喜贪”的另一种说法。就像一根木头沉到河中间,后来漂到岸上,被细沙和粗沙埋住,它就再也抬不起头来;同样,被喜贪缠住的人,堕入四种大恶趣,被大苦压住,即使经过好几千年也抬不起头来。所以说“这是喜贪的另一种说法”。巴利
Nandīrāgassetaṃ adhivacananti yathā hi majjhe saṃsīditvā thalaṃ pattaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ saṇhathūlavālikā pidahati, so puna sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ nandīrāgena ābaddho puggalo catūsu mahāapāyesu patito mahādukkhena pidhīyati, so anekehipi vassasahassehi puna sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘nandīrāgassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti.
这就是“我慢”的另一种说法。就像一根木头被冲上高地,下面被恒河水泡着,上面被雨水淋着,渐渐被苔藓整个包住,让人忍不住说“这到底是石头还是树桩?”同样,被我慢抬举的人,在穿粪扫衣的人堆里就是穿粪扫衣的,在说法的人堆里就是说法的,在吵架的人堆里就是吵架的,在医生堆里就是医生,在挑拨离间的人堆里就是挑拨离间的。他干着种种不正当的谋生之事,被这样那样的罪过缠住,让人忍不住说“这人心里到底还有没有一点戒,还是压根儿没有?”因此说,这就是“我慢”的另一种说法。巴利
Asmimānassetaṃ adhivacananti yathā hi thale āruḷho dārukkhandho heṭṭhā gaṅgodakena ceva upari vassena ca temento anukkamena sevālapariyonaddho ‘‘pāsāṇo nu kho esa khāṇuko’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati, evameva asmimānena unnato puggalo paṃsukūlikaṭṭhāne paṃsukūliko hoti, dhammakathikaṭṭhāne dhammakathiko, bhaṇḍanakārakaṭṭhāne bhaṇḍanakārako, vejjaṭṭhāne vejjo, pisuṇaṭṭhāne pisuṇo. So nānappakāraṃ anesanaṃ āpajjanto tāhi tāhi āpattīhi paliveṭhito ‘‘atthi nu kho assa abbhantare kiñci sīlaṃ, udāhu natthī’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘asmimānassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti.
这是对“五欲”的另一种说法。就像一根木头掉进漩涡里,在漩涡中被石头等东西反复撞击,碎裂成粉末;同样,一个人掉进五欲的漩涡里,在四种恶趣中被业报之苦、饥渴之苦等反复折磨,在漫长的时间里被碾成粉末。因此说“这是对五欲的另一种说法”。巴利
Pañcannetaṃkāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacananti yathā hi āvaṭṭe patitadārukhandho antoyeva pāsāṇādīsu āhatasamabbhāhato bhijjitvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ hoti, evaṃ pañcakāmaguṇāvaṭṭe patitapuggalo catūsu apāyesu kammakāraṇakhuppipāsādidukkhehi āhatasamabbhāhato dīgharattaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇataṃ āpajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcannetaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ adhivacana’’nti.
“恶戒者”就是没有戒行的人。“恶法者”就是品性低劣的人。“不净者”就是不清净的人。“有疑行迹者”,是指他的行为会让别人起疑、议论说:“这件事大概是他干的吧,这件事大概是他干的吧。”另一种解释是:他自己对别人的行为总是带着疑心去揣测,所以叫“有疑行迹者”。因为他看见两三个人在谈话,就会想“他们大概是在说我的过失”,于是心里起疑,追着去琢磨他们的言行,所以叫“有疑行迹者”。巴利
Dussīloti nissīlo. Pāpadhammoti lāmakadhammo. Asucīti na suci. Saṅkassarasamācāroti ‘‘imassa maññe imassa maññe idaṃ kamma’’nti evaṃ parehi saṅkāya saritabbasamācāro. Saṅkāya vā paresaṃ samācāraṃ saratītipi saṅkassarasamācāro. Tassa hi dve tayo jane kathente disvā, ‘‘mama dosaṃ maññe kathentī’’ti tesaṃ samācāraṃ saṅkassarati dhāvatīti saṅkassarasamācāro.
自称沙门,是指在分发筹签等场合,当开始清点“精舍里有几位沙门”时,他就表态说“我也是沙门,我也是沙门”,然后去领筹签等物。自称梵行者,是指在布萨、自恣等场合,他凭着“我也是梵行者”的表态,参与到这些事务中去。内里腐败,并不是说肾脏、心脏等内脏腐烂,而是说即使本来没有腐败的人,其功德也已败坏,所以叫内里腐败。漏泄,就是被贪欲浸透。生于污物,就是由贪等烦恼所生的污秽。巴利
Samaṇapaṭiññoti salākaggahaṇādīsu ‘‘kittakā vihāre samaṇā’’ti gaṇanāya āraddhāya ‘‘ahampi samaṇo, ahampi samaṇo’’ti paṭiññaṃ deti, salākaggahaṇādīni karoti. Brahmacāripaṭiññoti uposathapavāraṇādīsu ‘‘ahampi brahmacārī’’ti paṭiññāya tāni kammāni pavisati . Antopūtīti vakkahadayādīsu apūtikassapi guṇānaṃ pūtibhāvena, antopūti. Avassutoti rāgena tinto. Kasambujātoti rāgādīhi kilesehi kacavarajāto.
他说了这番话:他把牛群赶到恒河岸边,自己站在大众外围,从头到尾听完导师说法后,心想:“导师以此岸等不前往等方式,说明能够圆满修行。如果真能这样圆满,我就出家去圆满它。”这样想过之后,便说出了“尊者,我……”这番话。巴利
Etadavocāti gogaṇaṃ gaṅgātīrābhimukhaṃ katvā parisapariyante ṭhito ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā, ‘‘satthā orimatīrādīnaṃ anupagacchantādivasena sakkā paṭipattiṃ pūretunti vadati. Yadi evaṃ pūretuṃ sakkā, ahaṃ pabbajitvā pūressāmī’’ti cintetvā etaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ kho, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
“贪着小牛”是说:那些母牛对小牛有爱恋,乳房流着乳汁,因为对小牛的爱恋,它们自己就会走回去。“已交付”就是已经交出去了。因为如果母牛还没有交出去,牛主们就会跑来追问:“少了一头母牛,少了一头公牛,少了一头小牛”,跟在你后面紧追不放,这样你就会很不安宁。而且出家这件事,对欠债的人来说本来就不合适;无债而出家,是佛陀等所赞叹的。为了说明这个道理,他才这样说。“已交付”就是已交付。这部经里,既讲了流转轮回,也讲了还灭涅槃。巴利
Vacchagiddhiniyoti vacchesu sasnehā thanehi khīraṃ paggharantehi vacchakasnehena sayameva gamissantīti. Niyyātehevāti niyyātehiyeva. Gāvīsu hi aniyyātitāsu gosāmikā āgantvā, ‘‘ekā gāvī na dissati, eko goṇo, eko vacchako na dissatī’’ti tuyhaṃ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito vicarissanti, iti te aphāsukaṃ bhavissati. Pabbajjā ca nāmesā saiṇassa na ruhati, aṇaṇā pabbajjā ca buddhādīhi saṃvaṇṇitāti dassanatthaṃ evamāha. Niyyātāti niyyātitā. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.
第五 第二木段譬喻经的注释巴利
5. Dutiyadārukkhandhopamasuttavaṇṇanā
242 242. 第五项,“咖弥喇”:指名为咖弥喇的城市。“染污”:从覆藏时起,便没有所谓“未染污”的罪,即指如此染污之罪。“出罪不被知道”:通过别住、敬悦及出罪而恢复清净的情形,便不可见。巴利
242. Pañcame kimilāyanti kimilānāmake nagare. Saṃkiliṭṭhanti paṭicchannakālato paṭṭhāya asaṃkiliṭṭhā nāma āpatti natthi, evarūpaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ āpattiṃ. Na vuṭṭhānaṃ paññāyatīti parivāsamānattaabbhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ na dissati.
6. 《漏泄法门经》的注释巴利
6. Avassutapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
243 第六项,“新的集会堂”:指刚刚建成的集会堂,意思是一座大讲堂。因为国王们在出征等时候会站在那里,这样安排、划定界限:“这么多人往前走,这么多人在后面,这么多人在两边,这么多人骑象,这么多人骑马,这么多人站在车上。”所以那个地方就叫“集会堂”。而且从出发的地方回来后,直到派人把家里用湿牛粪涂抹地面等事做完,那两三天里国王们都在那里铺排安顿,所以也叫“集会堂”。对那些国王来说,那里也是一起商议政务的场所,所以也叫“集会堂”。因为他们是共和制的王族,出现的事务不能由一个人单独决定,必须得到所有人的同意才行,所以大家都聚集在那里共同商议。因此说“也是一起商议政务的场所”。又因为他们聚集在那里,用“这时候适合耕地,这时候适合播种”之类的方式共同商量在家的种种事务,所以他们也在那里经营料理充满缺漏的居家生活,所以也叫“集会堂”。它是新近建成的:通过砌砖、抹灰、彩绘等工艺装饰得如同天宫一般,刚刚完工。其中“由沙门或”:因为在家的宅基落成时,天神们就已经占据了自己的住处,因此不说“或由天人”,而说“或由沙门、或由婆罗门、或由任何人类”。巴利
243. Chaṭṭhe navaṃ santhāgāranti adhunā kāritaṃ santhāgāraṃ, ekā mahāsālāti attho. Uyyogakālādīsu hi rājāno tattha ṭhatvā, ‘‘ettakā purato gacchantu, ettakā pacchā, ettakā ubhohi passehi, ettakā hatthī abhiruhantu, ettakā asse, ettakā rathesu tiṭṭhantū’’ti evaṃ santhaṃ karonti, mariyādaṃ bandhanti, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ santhāgāranti vuccati. Uyyogaṭṭhānato ca āgantvā yāva gehesu allagomayaparibhaṇḍādīni kārenti, tāva dve tīṇi divasāni te rājāno tattha santharantītipi santhāgāraṃ. Tesaṃ rājūnaṃ saha atthānusāsanaṃ agārantipi santhāgāraṃ. Gaṇarājāno hi te, tasmā uppannaṃ kiccaṃ ekassa vasena na chijjati, sabbesaṃ chandopi laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā sabbe tattha sannipatitvā anusāsanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saha atthānusāsanaṃ agārantipi santhāgāra’’nti. Yasmā pana te tattha sannipatitvā, ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle kasituṃ vaṭṭati, imasmiṃ kāle vapitu’’nti evamādinā nayena gharāvāsakiccāni sammantayanti, tasmā chiddāvachiddaṃ gharāvāsaṃ tattha santharantītipi, santhāgāraṃ. Acirakāritaṃ hotīti iṭṭhakakammasudhākammacittakammādivasena susajjitaṃ devavimānaṃ viya adhunā niṭṭhāpitaṃ. Samaṇena vāti ettha yasmā gharavatthupariggahaṇakāleyeva devatā attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gaṇhanti, tasmā ‘‘devena vā’’ti avatvā, ‘‘samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā kenaci vā manussabhūtenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
他们听说集会堂已经建好了,就说“我们去看看吧”,于是前往那里,从门楼开始把整座建筑仔细看了一遍,心想:“这座集会堂实在太赏心悦目、太庄严了。让谁最先受用它,才能给我们带来长远的利益和安乐呢?”接着他们做出决定:“就算先把它献给我们的尊贵亲戚,也只有导师才最合适;就算从应供者的角度来看,也只有导师才最合适。所以,我们请导师最先受用,再安排比丘僧团前来。比丘僧团一到,三藏佛语也就跟着到了。我们再请导师三夜为我们说法。这样一来,先由三宝受用,然后我们再受用,就能给我们带来长远的利益和安乐了。”这样决定之后,他们便前往世尊那里。巴利
Yenabhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti santhāgāraṃ niṭṭhitanti sutvā ‘‘gacchāma naṃ passissāmā’’ti gantvā dvārakoṭṭhakato paṭṭhāya sabbaṃ oloketvā ‘‘idaṃ santhāgāraṃ ativiya manoramaṃ sassirikaṃ. Kena paṭhamaṃ paribhuttaṃ amhākaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya assā’’ti cintetvā – ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātiseṭṭhassa paṭhamaṃ diyyamānepi satthunova anucchavikaṃ, dakkhiṇeyyavasena diyyamānepi satthunova anucchavikaṃ, tasmā satthāraṃ paṭhamaṃ paribhuñjāpessāma, bhikkhusaṅghassa ca āgamanaṃ karissāma, bhikkhusaṅghe āgate tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ āgatameva bhavissati, satthāraṃ tiyāmarattiṃ amhākaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathāpessāma, iti tīhi ratanehi paribhuttaṃ pacchā mayaṃ paribhuñjissāma, evaṃ no dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya bhavissatī’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā upasaṅkamiṃsu.
他们朝新集会堂那边走过去。据说,那天集会堂为了给王族的人参观,已经布置得像天宫一样庄严,也打理得很妥当,但还没有为佛陀铺设座位。因为诸佛一向喜欢林野,乐于住在林野,住在村子里也可以,不住也可以,所以他们想:先弄清楚世尊的心意,我们再铺设。于是他们先去见世尊。现在他们已经明白了世尊的心意,就想动手铺设,于是朝集会堂那边走过去。巴利
Yena navaṃ santhāgāraṃ tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti taṃdivasaṃ kira santhāgāraṃ kiñcāpi rājakulānaṃ dassanatthāya devavimānaṃ viya susajjitaṃ hoti supaṭijaggitaṃ, buddhārahaṃ pana katvā apaññattaṃ. Buddhā hi nāma araññajjhāsayā araññārāmā antogāme vaseyyuṃ vā no vā, tasmā ‘‘bhagavato manaṃ jānitvāva, paññāpessāmā’’ti cintetvā, te bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamiṃsu, idāni pana manaṃ labhitvā paññāpetukāmā yena santhāgāraṃ tenupasaṅkamiṃsu.
把集会堂里所有该铺的东西都铺好:意思是让整座集会堂全都铺满。首先,他们想“据说牛粪在一切吉祥事上都适用”,就让人在已经用石灰处理过的地面上洒上湿牛粪;等地面完全干透,知道踩上去能显出脚印了,再让人用四种生香涂抹,然后在上面铺上各种颜色的细沙;接着,从大木椅、绒毛毯开始,依次铺上手织毯、马毛毯、狮子皮毯、老虎皮毯、月光毯、日光毯、彩绘布等种种色泽的毯子,把该铺的地方全都铺满。因此说“把集会堂里所有该铺的东西都铺好”。巴利
Sabbasanthariṃ santhāgāraṃ santharitvāti yathā sabbameva santhataṃ hoti, evaṃ taṃ santharāpetvā. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ tāva ‘‘gomayaṃ nāma sabbamaṅgalesu vaṭṭatī’’ti sudhāparikammakatampi bhūmiṃ allagomayena opuñjāpetvā, parisukkhabhāvaṃ ñatvā, yathā akkantaṭṭhāne padaṃ paññāyati, evaṃ catujjātiyagandhehi limpāpetvā upari nānāvaṇṇakaṭasārake santharitvā tesaṃ upari mahāpiṭṭhikakojave ādiṃ katvā hatthattharaassattharasīhattharabyagghattharacandattharakasūriyattharakacittattharakādīhi nānāvaṇṇehi attharakehi santharitabbayuttakaṃ sabbokāsaṃ santharāpesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasanthariṃ santhāgāraṃ santharitvā’’ti.
铺设座位时,先在大厅中央靠近吉祥柱的地方,安设了一座极为尊贵的佛座;然后在各处,把每一块柔软悦目的坐垫一一铺好;在座位两边放上悦目的红色靠枕;上方悬挂着用金、银和星星图案装饰得五彩缤纷的华盖;又用香鬘、花鬘、叶鬘等装饰;在四周十二肘的范围内,让人做成花网;用布幔围出大约三十肘的地方;靠西墙,为比丘僧团铺设了盘腿坐的座位、靠背座和圆凳,上面再铺上白色坐垫;靠东墙,为王族们各自铺设了大木椅和毛毯,并摆放了填满鹅绒等柔软舒适的靠枕,心里想着:“这样我们整夜听法就不会疲倦了。”就是针对这些,才说“铺设座位”。巴利
Āsanāni paññāpetvāti majjhaṭṭhāne tāva maṅgalathambhaṃ nissāya mahārahaṃ buddhāsanaṃ paññāpetvā, tattha tattha yaṃ yaṃ mudukañca manoramañca paccattharaṇaṃ , taṃ taṃ paccattharitvā ubhatolohitakaṃ manuññadassanaṃ upadhānaṃ upadahitvā upari suvaṇṇarajatatārakavicittavitānaṃ bandhitvā gandhadāmapupphadāmapattadāmādīhi alaṅkaritvā samantā dvādasahatthe ṭhāne pupphajālaṃ kāretvā, tiṃsahatthamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭasāṇiyā parikkhipāpetvā pacchimabhittiṃ nissāya bhikkhusaṅghassa pallaṅkapīṭhaapassayapīṭhamuṇḍapīṭhāni paññāpetvā upari setapaccattharaṇehi paccattharāpetvā pācīnabhittiṃ nissāya attano attano mahāpiṭṭhikakojave paññāpetvā manoramāni haṃsalomādipūritāni upadhānāni ṭhapāpesuṃ ‘‘evaṃ akilamamānā sabbarattiṃ dhammaṃ suṇissāmā’’ti. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘āsanāni paññāpetvā’’ti.
准备好水瓮:就是把大腹水罐安放好,心里想着“这样世尊和比丘僧团就能随自己的心意洗手、洗脚或漱口了”。他们在各处把水装满,水色像宝石一样,又为了让水有香气,放进各种鲜花和浸水的香粉,再用芭蕉叶盖好,然后安放妥当。针对这件事,才说“准备好水瓮”。巴利
Udakamaṇikaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvāti mahākucchikaṃ udakacāṭiṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘evaṃ bhagavā ca bhikkhusaṅgho ca yathāruciyā hatthe vā dhovissanti pāde vā, mukhaṃ vā vikkhālessantī’’ti tesu tesu ṭhānesu maṇivaṇṇassa udakassa pūrāpetvā vāsatthāya nānāpupphāni ceva udakavāsacuṇṇāni ca pakkhipitvā kadalipaṇṇehi pidahitvā patiṭṭhāpesuṃ. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘udakamaṇikaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā’’ti.
把油灯点起来:意思是,在金银等制成的灯柱和灯盏上,以及在放在臾那人像、基拉塔人像等手中的金银等灯碗里,把油灯点亮。他们朝世尊所在的地方走去:在这里,那些释迦族的国王们不只是布置了集会堂,还让人把迦毗罗卫城周长一由旬内的街道都打扫干净,竖起旗帜,在各家门前放上满瓶和芭蕉树,用灯串等把整座城点缀得像撒满了星星一样。然后他们派人击鼓巡告:还在吃奶的婴儿就让他们继续吃奶,年幼的男孩快点喂好饭让他们睡下,不要大声喧哗。今天导师要在这城里住一夜,佛陀们向来喜欢安静,不喜欢吵闹。之后,他们自己拿着灯杖,朝世尊所在的地方走去。巴利
Telappadīpaṃ āropetvāti rajatasuvaṇṇādimayadaṇḍadīpikāsu yonakarūpakirātarūpakādīnaṃ hatthe ṭhapitasuvaṇṇarajatādimayakapallikāsu ca telappadīpaṃ jālāpetvāti attho. Yenabhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti ettha pana te sakyarājāno na kevalaṃ santhāgārameva, atha kho yojanāvaṭṭe kapilavatthusmiṃ nagaravīthiyopi sammajjāpetvā dhaje ussāpetvā gehadvāresu puṇṇaghaṭe ca kadaliyo ca ṭhapāpetevā sakalanagaraṃ dīpamālādīhi vippakiṇṇatārakaṃ viya katvā ‘‘khīrūpage dārake khīraṃ pāyetha, dahare kumāre lahuṃ lahuṃ bhojetvā sayāpetha, uccāsaddaṃ mā karittha, ajja ekarattiṃ satthā antogāme vasissati, buddhā nāma appasaddakāmā hontī’’ti bheriṃ carāpetvā sayaṃ daṇḍadīpikā ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsu.
那时,世尊穿好下衣,拿着钵和袈裟,和比丘僧团一起朝新建的集会堂走去。据说,当有人禀报“尊者,现在正是世尊您觉得合适的时候”,世尊便穿好下衣——那下衣如同以虫胶液染透、色如紫胶虫所染黑檀花般的鲜红布,他如同用剪刀裁剪红莲花一般,妥善覆盖三轮而穿好下衣;如以金带缠绕莲花束般,系上如闪电光焰般庄严的腰带;像用红毯围裹象头般,又如向百宝庄严的金色宝塔投掷珊瑚网,像给金塔披上红毯衣,像用红色云彩遮蔽行走的满月,像在金山顶上遍洒上等虫胶液,像用闪电缠绕彩绘山顶;又以震动整个轮围山、须弥山、由犍陀罗山的大地后所取、颜色如尼拘律树嫩叶的殊胜红色粪扫衣披覆身体,从香室门口走出,如狮子出金洞,如满月从东山山顶升起。走出后,便站在香室前。巴利
Athakho bhagavā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena yena navaṃ santhāgāraṃ tenupasaṅkamīti ‘‘yassa dāni, bhante, bhagavā kālaṃ maññatī’’ti evaṃ kira kāle ārocite bhagavā lākhārasatintarattakoviḷārapupphavaṇṇaṃ rattadupaṭṭaṃ kattariyā padumaṃ kantento viya, saṃvidhāya timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādento nivāsetvā suvaṇṇapāmaṅgena padumakalāpaṃ parikkhipanto viya, vijjulatāsassirikaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā rattakambalena gajakumbhaṃ pariyonandhanto viya, ratanasatubbedhe suvaṇṇagghike pavāḷajālaṃ khipamāno viya suvaṇṇacetiye rattakambalakañcukaṃ paṭimuñcanto viya, gacchantaṃ puṇṇacandaṃ rattavaṇṇavalāhakena paṭicchādayamāno viya, kañcanapabbatamatthake supakkalākhārasaṃ parisiñcanto viya, cittakūṭapabbatamatthakaṃ vijjulatāya parikkhipanto viya ca sacakkavāḷasineruyugandharaṃ mahāpathaviṃ sañcāletvā gahitaṃ nigrodhapallavasamānavaṇṇaṃ rattavarapaṃsukūlaṃ pārupitvā, gandhakuṭidvārato nikkhami kañcanaguhato sīho viya udayapabbatakūṭato puṇṇacando viya ca. Nikkhamitvā pana gandhakuṭipamukhe aṭṭhāsi.
这时,从他身上发出的光明,像云缝里窜出的闪电束一样从身体射出,把园林里的树木照得像是被金色的汁液浇灌过,枝叶、花朵和果实都染成了金黄。就在那时,大比丘僧团各自拿起自己的钵和衣,围绕在世尊身边。这些围立在一旁的比丘们具有这样的品质:少欲、知足、远离尘世、不与俗众纠缠、精进努力、善于说法、能接受别人的劝诫、会指出过错、呵责恶行,戒具足、定具足、慧具足、解脱具足、解脱知见具足。被他们围绕的世尊,就像被红毯包裹的金柱,像红莲丛中的金船,像珊瑚栏杆环绕的金殿,光彩夺目。舍利弗、目犍连等大长老们,披着云灰色的粪扫衣,像身披宝石铠甲的巨象一样围绕着他;他们已离贪、断尽烦恼、解开缠结、切断束缚,对家族或团体毫无执著。巴利
Athassa kāyato meghamukhehi vijjukalāpā viya rasmiyo nikkhamitvā suvaṇṇarasadhārāparisekapiñjarapattapupphaphalaviṭape viya ārāmarukkhe kariṃsu. Tāvadeva ca attano attano pattacīvaramādāya mahābhikkhusaṅgho bhagavantaṃ parivāresi. Te pana parivāretvā ṭhitā bhikkhū evarūpā ahesuṃ – appicchā santuṭṭhā pavivittā asaṃsaṭṭhā āraddhavīriyā vattāro vacanakkhamā codakā pāpagarahino sīlasampannā samādhisampannā paññāvimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanasampannā. Tehi parivārito bhagavā rattakambalaparikkhitto viya suvaṇṇakkhandho, rattapadumasaṇḍamajjhagatā viya suvaṇṇanāvā, pavāḷavedikāparikkhitto viya suvaṇṇapāsādo virocittha. Sāriputtamoggallānādayo mahātherāpi naṃ meghavaṇṇaṃ paṃsukūlaṃ pārupitvā maṇivammavammikā viya mahānāgā parivārayiṃsu vantarāgā bhinnakilesā vijaṭitajaṭā chinnabandhanā kule vā gaṇe vā alaggā.
世尊自己已离贪,身边围绕的也都是离贪的人;自己已离嗔,身边围绕的也都是离嗔的人;自己已离痴,身边围绕的也都是离痴的人;自己已无渴爱,身边围绕的也都是无渴爱的人;自己已无烦恼,身边围绕的也都是无烦恼的人;自己已是觉者,身边围绕的也都是多闻的觉者。那景象,就像花蕊被花瓣环绕,又像雌蕊被花蕊环绕;像六牙象王被八千头大象簇拥,像持国鹅王被九万只天鹅簇拥,像转轮王被军队围绕,像帝释天王被众天神围绕,像常童大梵天被梵众围绕,像满月被群星围绕。世尊就以这样无与伦比的佛陀之相、无量的佛陀威仪,踏上了前往迦毗罗卫村的路。巴利
Iti bhagavā sayaṃ vītarāgo vītarāgehi, vītadoso vītadosehi, vītamoho vītamohehi , nittaṇho nittaṇhehi, nikkileso nikkilesehi, sayaṃ buddho bahussutabuddhehi parivārito pattaparivāritaṃ viya kesaraṃ, kesaraparivāritā viya kaṇṇikā, aṭṭhanāgasahassaparivārito viya chaddanto nāgarājā, navutihaṃsasahassaparivārito viya dhataraṭṭho haṃsarājā, senaṅgaparivārito viya cakkavattirājā, marugaṇaparivārito viya sakko devarājā, brahmagaṇaparivārito viya hāritamahābrahmā, tārāgaṇaparivārito viya puṇṇacando asamena buddhavesena aparimāṇena buddhavilāsena kapilavatthugāmimaggaṃ paṭipajji.
这时,从佛陀身体的前方升起金色的光芒,照到八十肘远的地方;从后方、右方、左方也各自升起金色的光芒,各照到八十肘远的地方。从头顶的发际开始,每一缕发旋都放出像孔雀脖颈那样的光芒,升到空中,照到八十肘远的地方。从脚下的足底升起珊瑚色的光芒,穿透坚实的大地,深达八十肘。就这样,六种颜色的佛陀光芒向四周闪耀、跃动,照遍八十肘的范围,就像从金柄火炬中喷射出的火焰窜向空中,又像从覆盖四大洲的大雨云中劈出的闪电。它们向各个方向放射光明,仿佛金色瞻波花纷纷洒落,仿佛从金瓶中流出的金色液体不断浇灌,仿佛铺展开的金色布料环绕四周,仿佛旋风吹起的金凤花和迦尼迦罗花的花粉弥漫在空中。巴利
Athassa puratthimakāyato suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ aggahesi pacchima-kāyato, dakkhiṇahatthato, vāmahatthato suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ aggahesi. Upari kesantato paṭṭhāya sabbakesāvaṭṭehi moragīvavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā gaganatale asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ aggahesi. Heṭṭhā pādatalehi pavāḷavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā ghanapathaviṃ asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ aggahesi. Evaṃ samantā asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ chabbaṇṇā buddharasmiyo vijjotamānā vipphandamānā kañcanadaṇḍadīpikāhi niccharitvā ākāsaṃ pakkhandajālā viya cātuddīpikamahāmeghato nikkhantavijjulatā viya vidhāviṃsu. Sabbadisābhāgā suvaṇṇacampakapupphehi vikiriyamānā viya, suvaṇṇaghaṭato nikkhantasuvaṇṇarasadhārāhi siñcamānā viya, pasāritasuvaṇṇapaṭaparikkhittā viya, verambhavātasamuṭṭhitakiṃsukakaṇikārapupphacuṇṇasamokiṇṇā viya vippabhāsiṃsu.
世尊的身体具足八十种随形好、一寻身光和三十二种殊胜之相,光明赫赫,就像布满星辰的天空,像盛开的莲花池,又像百由旬高的波利质多罗树开满了花。那光辉如同三十二个月亮、三十二个太阳、三十二位转轮王、三十二位天王、三十二位大梵天依次排列,而世尊的威光却把他们的光辉全都压了下去。这样的庄严,正是由十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十究竟波罗蜜——也就是圆满修成的三十种波罗蜜——所庄严成就的。在十万劫加上四阿僧祇劫那么漫长的时间里,他所行的布施、所持的戒律、所造的一切善业,仿佛在这一生中全部汇聚到一起,却找不到足够的地方来容纳果报,就像壅塞住了一样。好比把一千艘船的货物装到一艘船上,把一千辆车的货物装到一辆车上,又好比二十五条恒河的洪流在河口汇合,全部聚成一股。巴利
Bhagavatopi asītianubyañjanabyāmappabhādvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇasamujjalasarīraṃ samuggatatārakaṃ viya gaganatalaṃ, vikasitamiva padumavanaṃ, sabbapāliphullo viya yojanasatiko pāricchattako, paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitānaṃ dvattiṃsacandānaṃ dvattiṃsasūriyānaṃ dvattiṃsacakkavattīnaṃ dvattiṃsadevarājānaṃ dvattiṃsamahābrahmānaṃ siriyā siriṃ abhibhavamānaṃ viya virocittha, yathā taṃ dasahi pāramīhi dasahi upapāramīhi dasahi paramatthapāramīhi sammadeva pūritāhi samatiṃsapāramitāhi alaṅkataṃ. Kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni dinnadānaṃ rakkhitasīlaṃ katakalyāṇakammaṃ ekasmiṃ attabhāve otaritvā vipākaṃ dātuṃ ṭhānaṃ alabhamānaṃ sambādhapattaṃ viya ahosi. Nāvāsahassabhaṇḍaṃ ekanāvaṃ āropanakālo viya, sakaṭasahassabhaṇḍaṃ ekasakaṭaṃ āropanakālo viya, pañcavīsatiyā gaṅgānaṃ oghassa sambhijja mukhadvāre ekato rāsibhūtakālo viya ahosi.
在这佛陀威光的照耀下,众人在世尊前方、后方、左边、右边,举起了无数千把火炬。素馨花、瞻波花、林茉莉花、红睡莲、青睡莲、巴库拉花、辛度瓦拉花,还有蓝色、黄色等各种颜色、芳香扑鼻的香粉,像从四大洲的云中降下的雨水一样纷纷洒落。五种乐器的奏鸣声,以及赞叹佛、法、僧功德的歌咏声,响彻了四面八方。天人、人、龙、金翅鸟、乾闼婆、夜叉等众生的眼睛,都像获得了饮用甘露一般。不过,在这个地方,应该用一千首偈颂来描述行走的庄严。这里只略说一点点:巴利
Imāya buddhasiriyā obhāsamānassāpi ca bhagavato purato anekāni daṇḍadīpikāsahassāni ukkhipiṃsu, tathā pacchato, vāmapasse, dakkhiṇapasse. Jātisumanacampakavanamallikārattuppala-nīluppala-bakulasinduvārapupphāni ceva nīlapītādivaṇṇasugandhagandhacuṇṇāni ca cātuddīpikameghavissaṭṭhā udakavuṭṭhiyo viya vippakiriyiṃsu. Pañcaṅgikatūriyanigghosā ceva buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇapaṭisaṃyuttā thutighosā ca sabbā disā pūrayiṃsu. Devamanussanāgasupaṇṇagandhabbayakkhādīnaṃ akkhīni amatapānaṃ viya labhiṃsu. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā padasahassena gamanavaṇṇaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Tatridaṃ mukhamattaṃ –
就这样,具足一切相好,撼动大地;
不伤害众生,世间导师一路前行。
人中狮子先举右足,
具足光辉者行走时,这位两足尊显得光辉庄严。
最胜佛陀行走时,足底柔软。
他平等地触地,却不被尘垢染污。
当世间导师走过时,低洼的地方会鼓起来;
高凸的地方也变得平坦,而大地是没有知觉的。
石头、碎石、陶片、树桩和荆棘,
所有道路都避让开来,当世间导师向前行走时。
抬脚时不会太远,落脚时也不会太近;
他走路时不磨不碰,两个膝盖和两个脚踝都是如此。
具足戒行的牟尼不会走得太快,
他走路时也不慢吞吞的,心是定下来的。
上方、下方、横向,以及四方和四隅,同样地。
他不东张西望地行走,只看着前方一轭远的距离。
他像龙象一样步态威武,行走时,这位胜者显得光彩庄严。
世间最尊贵者优雅地行走,令诸天欢喜。
就像月王一样光辉灿烂,又像四足狮王一样。
让众多众生心生欢喜,他来到了那座最殊胜的城。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ sabbaṅgasampanno, kampayanto vasundharaṃ; Aheṭhayanto pāṇāni, yāti lokavināyako. ‘‘Dakkhiṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ, uddharanto narāsabho Gacchanto sirisampanno, sobhate dvipaduttamo. ‘‘Gacchato buddhaseṭṭhassa, heṭṭhāpādatalaṃ mudu; Samaṃ samphusate bhūmiṃ, rajasā nupalippati. ‘‘Ninnaṭṭhānaṃ unnamati, gacchante lokanāyake; Unnatañca samaṃ hoti, pathavī ca acetanā. ‘‘Pāsāṇā sakkharā ceva, kathalā khāṇukaṇṭakā; Sabbe maggā vivajjanti, gacchante lokanāyake. ‘‘Nātidūre uddharati, naccāsanne ca nikkhipaṃ; Aghaṭṭayanto niyyāti, ubho jāṇū ca gopphake. ‘‘Nātisīghaṃ pakkamati, sampannacaraṇo muni; Na cāpi saṇikaṃ yāti, gacchamāno samāhito. ‘‘Uddhaṃ adho ca tiriyañca, disañca vidisaṃ tathā; Na pekkhamāno so yāti, yugamattañhi pekkhati. ‘‘Nāgavikkantacāro so, gamane sobhate jino; Cāruṃ gacchati lokaggo, hāsayanto sadevake. ‘‘Uḷurājāva sobhanto, catucārīva kesarī; Tosayanto bahū satte, puraṃ seṭṭhaṃ upāgamī’’ti.
据说,这叫作称颂之时。在这样的时刻,无论是称颂佛陀的身相庄严,还是称颂他的功德,说法者有多大的能力,就是衡量的标准。不管是用散文句子,还是用偈颂的形式,能说多少就说多少,不应当说“讲得不好”。因为诸佛的功德不可限量。连诸佛自己都无法把他们的功德完全说尽,更何况其他众生呢。世尊以这样的威仪光彩,进入装饰布置得庄严整齐的释迦族王宫,受到心怀净信的人们用香、熏香、香水、粉末等供养,然后走进了集会堂。因此经中说:“那时,世尊穿好下衣,拿着钵和袈裟,和比丘僧众一起,前往那座新建的集会堂。”巴利
Vaṇṇakālo nāma kiresa, evaṃvidhesu kālesu buddhassa sarīravaṇṇe vā guṇavaṇṇe vā dhammakathikassa thāmoyeva pamāṇaṃ. Cuṇṇiyapadehi vā gāthābandhena vā yattakaṃ sakkoti, tattakaṃ vattabbaṃ. Dukkathitanti na vattabbaṃ. Appamāṇavaṇṇā hi buddhā. Tesaṃ buddhāpi anavasesato vaṇṇaṃ vattuṃ asamatthā, pageva itarā pajāti. Iminā sirivilāsena alaṅkatapaṭiyattaṃ sakyarājakulaṃ pavisitvā bhagavā pasannacittena janena gandhadhūmavāsacuṇṇādīhi pūjiyamāno santhāgāraṃ pāvisi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena yena navaṃ santhāgāraṃ tenupasaṅkamī’’ti.
把世尊放在最前面,意思就是让世尊走在前面。在那里,世尊坐在比丘和在家男信徒中间,就像一尊用纯金铸成的佛像:先用香水沐浴,再用细布擦干身体,然后涂上天然朱砂,最后安放在铺着红毛毯的座位上,显得格外光辉耀眼。这就是古德们用来赞颂的方式——巴利
Bhagavantaṃyeva purakkhatvāti bhagavantaṃ purato katvā. Tattha bhagavā bhikkhūnañceva upāsakānañca majjhe nisinno gandhodakena nhāpetvā dukūlacumbaṭakena vodakaṃ katvā jātihiṅgulakena majjitvā rattakambalapaliveṭhite pīṭhe ṭhapitarattasuvaṇṇaghanapaṭimā viya ativirocittha. Ayaṃ panettha porāṇānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanamaggo –
以龙象般威武的步伐,走进那座圆顶厅堂;
他照耀着,世间最胜者,坐在最殊胜的座位上。
坐在那里的调御人马的导师,
天神之上的天神,具备百福之相;
坐在佛座正中,光明赫赫。
就像把金饰放在淡黄色毛毯上。
就像阎浮金做的饰品放在淡黄色毛毯上,
他离垢清净,光耀夺目,就像摩尼宝珠放光一样。
就像盛开的巨大娑罗树,又像装饰庄严的须弥山王;
就像金色的柱子,又像莲花和红莲一样。
就像燃烧的灯树,又像山顶上熊熊的火焰;
就像天界的波利质多树,开满繁花,光彩夺目。巴利
‘‘Gantvāna maṇḍalamāḷaṃ, nāgavikkantacāraṇo; Obhāsayanto lokaggo, nisīdi varamāsane. ‘‘Tahiṃ nisinno naradammasārathi, Devātidevo satapuññalakkhaṇo; Buddhāsane majjhagato virocati, Suvaṇṇanekkhaṃ viya paṇḍukambale. ‘‘Nekkhaṃ jambonadasseva, nikkhittaṃ paṇḍukambale; Virocati vītamalo, maṇiverocano yathā. ‘‘Mahāsālova samphullo, nerurājāva’laṅkato; Suvaṇṇayūpasaṅkāso, padumo kokanado yathā. ‘‘Jalanto dīparukkhova, pabbatagge yathā sikhī; Devānaṃ pāricchattova, sabbaphullo virocatī’’ti.
在迦毗罗卫城的释迦族人那里,大半夜都作了与法相应的谈话。这里说的“法谈”,应当理解为与会堂随喜有关的各种散说。那时,世尊就像把天河之水倾泻下来,就像把大地的精华牵引出来,就像抓住大阎浮树的树冠摇动,就像用榨轮压榨一由旬大的蜜器、让人喝下蜜汁一样,为住在迦毗罗卫城的释迦族人说了能带来利益和安乐的种种散说。他说:“大王,这布施住所实在意义重大。您的住所被我受用了,也被比丘僧团受用了;而由我和比丘僧团受用之后,又被法宝受用,因此就可说是被三宝共同受用了。因为布施住所时,就等于布施了一切。哪怕只是地上的草棚,或者树枝搭的棚子,其功德也无法衡量。凭借布施住所的力量,即使生生世世受生,也不会住在逼仄的胎中;母亲的子宫会像十二肘宽的内室一样,毫不狭窄。”就这样,他以种种方式说了许多美妙的法谈之后——巴利
Kāpilavatthave sakye bahudeva rattiṃ dhammiyā kathāyāti ettha dhammakathā nāma santhāgārānumodanāpaṭisaṃyuttā pakiṇṇakakathā veditabbā. Tadā hi bhagavā ākāsagaṅgaṃ otārento viya pathavojaṃ ākaḍḍhanto viya mahājambuṃ matthake gahetvā cālento viya yojanikaṃ madhubhaṇḍaṃ cakkayantena pīḷetvā madhupānaṃ pāyamāno viya kapilavatthuvāsīnaṃ sakyānaṃ hitasukhāvahaṃ pakiṇṇakakathaṃ kathesi. ‘‘Āvāsadānaṃ nāmetaṃ, mahārāja, mahantaṃ, tumhākaṃ āvāso mayā paribhutto, bhikkhusaṅghena ca paribhutto , mayā ca bhikkhusaṅghena ca paribhutto pana dhammaratanena paribhuttoyevāti tīhi ratanehi paribhutto nāma hoti. Āvāsadānasmiñhi dinne sabbadānaṃ dinnameva hoti. Bhummaṭṭhakapaṇṇasālāya vā sākhāmaṇḍapassa vāpi ānisaṃso nāma paricchindituṃ na sakkā. Āvāsadānānubhāvena hi bhave bhave nibbattassāpi sambādhitagabbhavāso na hoti, dvādasahattho ovarako viya mātukucchi asambādhova hotī’’ti. Evaṃ nānānayavicittaṃ bahuṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ kathetvā –
能挡住寒冷和炎热,接下来也能挡住凶猛的野兽;
能挡住蛇和蚊子,也能挡住寒冷和下雨。
从那以后,猛烈粗恶的风热生起时,也能被挡住。
为了庇护,为了安乐,为了修禅定,为了修观。
把精舍布施给僧团,是佛陀所赞叹的最上等的布施。
所以,智者确实观照自己的利益。
应当建造让人喜欢的精舍,并让多闻的人住在那里;
还要给他们食物、饮料,以及衣服和住处。
应当以清净的心,布施给正直的人;
他们为他说法,这法能消除一切苦。
那个无漏者在此证知法后,即般涅槃。巴利
‘‘Sītaṃ uṇhaṃ paṭihanti, tato vāḷamigāni ca; Sirīsape ca makase, sisire cāpi vuṭṭhiyo. ‘‘Tato vātātapo ghoro, sañjāto paṭihaññati; Leṇatthañca sukhatthañca, jhāyituñca vipassituṃ. ‘‘Vihāradānaṃ saṅghassa, aggaṃ buddhena vaṇṇitaṃ; Tasmā hi paṇḍito poso, sampassaṃ atthamattano. ‘‘Vihāre kāraye ramme, vāsayettha bahussute; Tesaṃ annañca pānañca, vatthasenāsanāni ca. ‘‘Dadeyya ujubhūtesu, vippasannena cetasā; Te tassa dhammaṃ desenti, sabbadukkhāpanūdanaṃ; Yaṃ so dhammaṃ idhaññāya, parinibbāti anāsavo’’ti. (cūḷava. 295) –
他就这样以“这也是住处的功德,这也是住处的功德”的方式,在大半夜、超过一个半时分,讲说住处的功德。其中,只有这些偈颂被收进了结集,散说的法义开示则没有被收录。至于“指示”等语,含义和前面所说的一样。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘ayampi āvāse ānisaṃso, ayampi āvāse ānisaṃso’’ti bahudeva rattiṃ atirekataraṃ diyaḍḍhayāmaṃ āvāsānisaṃsakathaṃ kathesi. Tattha imā tāva gāthāva saṅgahaṃ āruḷhā, pakiṇṇakadhammadesanā pana saṅgahaṃ nārohati. Sandassetvātiādīni vuttatthāneva.
“已过”就是已经过去,两个夜分已经逝去。“你们现在若觉得是时候了”意思是:如果你们觉得该走了,那就是你们离开的时候,可以走了。世尊为什么要把他们打发走呢?是出于慈悯。因为他们身体娇弱,整夜坐着不睡,身体会生病。而且比丘僧团人数众多,也该给他们腾出站和坐的地方。出于对这两方面的慈悯,世尊才让他们离开。巴利
Abhikkantāti atikkantā dve yāmā gatā. Yassa dāni kālaṃ maññathāti yassa tumhe gamanassa kālaṃ maññatha, gamanakālo tumhākaṃ, gacchathāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā pana bhagavā te uyyojesīti? Anukampāya. Sukhumālā hi te, tiyāmarattiṃ nisīditvā vītināmentānaṃ sarīre ābādho uppajjeyya. Bhikkhusaṅghopi mahā, tassa ṭhānanisajjānaṃ okāso laddhuṃ vaṭṭatīti ubhayānukampāya uyyojesi.
远离昏沉睡眠:据说当时比丘们在前两个时分里,无论是站着还是坐着,都一动不动。但到了后夜,食物消化了,因为食物消化的缘故,比丘僧团就变得远离昏沉睡眠——这个说法并不成立。因为佛陀说法时,听法的人身体和精神都不会感到疲惫,身体轻快、心轻快等状态会生起。因此,他们即使在前两个时分里站着或坐着听法,昏沉睡眠也已经消失;到了后夜时分,同样也是消失的。所以经文才说“远离昏沉睡眠”。巴利
Vigatathinamiddhoti tatra kira bhikkhū yāmadvayaṃ ṭhitāpi nisinnāpi acālayiṃsu, pacchimayāme pana āhāro pariṇamati, tassa pariṇatattā bhikkhusaṅgho vigatathinamiddho jātoti akāraṇametaṃ. Buddhānañhi kathaṃ suṇantassa kāyikacetasikadarathā na honti, kāyacittalahutādayo uppajjanti, tena tesaṃ dve yāme ṭhitānampi nisinnānampi dhammaṃ suṇantānaṃ thinamiddhaṃ vigataṃ, pacchimayāmepi sampatte tathā vigatameva jātaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vigatathinamiddho’’ti.
“背脊痛”——为什么痛呢?因为世尊在六年精勤修大精进时,身体曾受极大的苦;后来到了年老的时候,又生起了背风。不过,这也不是真正的原因。世尊其实有能力镇伏已经生起的感受,用结跏趺坐安住一个七天或两个七天。只是他当时想以四种威仪来受用这座集会堂。在那里,他从洗脚的地方走到法座,这一段路便完成了行走的威仪;到了法座旁,稍站一会儿才坐下,这一段便完成了站立的威仪;在法座上坐了两个时分,这一段便完成了坐的威仪。现在他想,稍微向右侧卧片刻,卧的威仪也就完成了。他就是想这样以四种威仪来受用。再说,这个由业所生的身体,本来就不能说“不会疲倦”,所以他只是借着久坐而生起的那一点点不适,才这样说了。巴利
Piṭṭhime āgilāyatīti kasmā āgilāyati? Bhagavato hi chabbassāni mahāpadhānaṃ padahantassa mahantaṃ kāyadukkhaṃ ahosi, athassa aparabhāge mahallakakāle piṭṭhivāto uppajjīti. Akāraṇaṃ vā etaṃ. Pahoti hi bhagavā uppannaṃ vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā ekampi dvepi sattāhāni ekapallaṅkena nisīdituṃ. Santhāgārasālaṃ pana catūhi iriyāpathehi paribhuñjitukāmo ahosi. Tattha pādadhovanaṭṭhānato yāva dhammāsanā agamāsi, ettake ṭhāne gamanaṃ nipphannaṃ. Dhammāsanaṃ pattaṃ thokaṃ ṭhatvā nisīdi, ettake ṭhāne ṭhānaṃ nipphannaṃ. Dveyāmaṃ dhammāsane nisīdi, ettake ṭhāne nisajjā nipphannā. Idāni dakkhiṇena passena thokaṃ nipanne sayanaṃ nipphajjissatīti evaṃ catūhi iriyāpathehi paribhuñjitukāmo ahosi. Upādinnakasarīrañca nāma ‘‘no āgilāyatī’’ti na vattabbaṃ, tasmā ciranisajjāya sañjātaṃ appakampi āgilāyanaṃ gahetvā evamāha.
那些国王在集会堂的一侧让人围起布幔,铺好合乎规定的床座,铺上合乎规定的垫褥,又在上面挂起用金星星鬘、香花鬘等花环装饰的天盖,点起香油灯。他们想:“说不定导师从法座起身后,会稍微休息一下,在这里躺一会儿。这样一来,这座集会堂就能被世尊以行、住、坐、卧四种姿态使用过,长久以来都会给我们带来利益和安乐。”导师也正是为了这个缘故,才在那里铺好僧伽梨衣,躺了下来。“把起身的想放在心里”,意思是:“过了这段时间,我就起来”——他把这个起身的念头放在心里,其实一直没有睡着,而是一边听着长老说法。巴利
Saṅghāṭiṃ paññāpetvāti santhāgārassa kira ekapasse te rājāno paṭasāṇiṃ parikkhipāpetvā kappiyamañcakaṃ paññāpetvā kappiyapaccattharaṇena attharitvā upari suvaṇṇatārakagandhamālādidāmapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ vitānaṃ bandhitvā gandhatelappadīpaṃ āropayiṃsu, ‘‘appeva nāma satthā dhammāsanato vuṭṭhāya thokaṃ vissamanto idha nipajjeyya, evaṃ no imaṃ santhāgāraṃ bhagavatā catūhi iriyāpathehi paribhuttaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya bhavissatī’’ti. Satthāpi tadeva sandhāya tattha saṅghāṭiṃ paññāpetvā nipajji. Uṭṭhānasaññaṃ manasi karitvāti ‘‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ atikkamitvā vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti vuṭṭhānasaññaṃ citte ṭhapetvā, tañca kho aniddāyantova therassa dhammakathaṃ suṇamāno.
“漏泄之门”是指漏泄的途径,也就是漏泄的原因,这是它的意思。“贪着”是指因烦恼的执取而贪着,变得渴求。“嗔恨”是指因嗔恚而内心污秽败坏。“眼之故”是指由于眼处的状态。“魔”是指烦恼魔和天子魔。“入口”是指空隙、破绽。“所缘”是指条件、原因。因为可被受用的处所就像草屋、茅屋一样,能引发烦恼的所缘就像火把一样,当所缘现前时烦恼便生起,就像火把放在哪里,哪里就燃起红炭一样。因此说“魔得入口”。巴利
Avassutapariyāyanti avassutassa pariyāyaṃ, avassutassa kāraṇanti attho. Adhimuccatīti kilesādhimuccanena adhimuccati, giddho hoti. Byāpajjatīti byāpādavasena pūticitto hoti. Cakkhutoti cakkhubhāvena. Māroti kilesamāropi devaputtamāropi. Otāranti vivaraṃ. Ārammaṇanti paccayaṃ. Naḷāgāratiṇāgāraṃ viya hi savisevanāni āyatanāni, tiṇukkā viya kilesuppattirahaṃ ārammaṇaṃ, tiṇukkāya ṭhapitaṭhapitaṭṭhāne aṅgārassujjalanaṃ viya ārammaṇe āpāthamāgate kilesānaṃ uppatti. Tena vuttaṃ labhetha māro otāranti.
在善法(白分)这边,那些没有可被染着的处,就像涂了厚泥的尖顶阁;所说的那种所缘,就像草把火;当所缘出现在面前时,那些没有可被染着的处不会生起烦恼的灼烧,就像草把火放到哪里,哪里就熄灭一样。因此说:魔罗找不到入口。巴利
Sukkapakkhe bahalamattikapiṇḍāvalepanaṃ kūṭāgāraṃ viya nibbisevanāni āyatanāni, tiṇukkā viya vuttapakārārammaṇaṃ, tiṇukkāya ṭhapitaṭhapitaṭṭhāne nibbāpanaṃ viya nibbisevanānaṃ āyatanānaṃ ārammaṇe āpāthamāgate kilesapariḷāhassa anuppatti. Tena vuttaṃ neva labhetha māro otāranti.
第七 苦法经的注释巴利
7. Dukkhadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
244 244. 第七项中,“苦法”是指能生起苦的法。因为当五蕴存在时,被砍截、杀害、捆绑等种种苦就会生起,所以这些法因为是苦的生起因,就被称为“苦法”。“依彼如是”:就是依那种方式。“如见欲时”:就是他以那种方式见欲时。“如随行”:就是他以那种方式随行于行处和住处而住。“欲即见如炭坑”:这是依“寻求为根本的苦”和“结生为根本的苦”这两类苦,把欲看成如同大火坑一般,具有极大的炽热。因为对寻求诸欲的人来说,乘船入海、走险路、行于羊肠小道、冲入两军混战等,这些都属于“寻求为根本的苦”;对受用诸欲的人来说,由于受用欲的思心所导致在四恶趣中结生,这就是“结生为根本的苦”,会生起极大炽热的苦。如此,依这两种苦,诸欲便如同燃烧着极大炽热的大火坑一样被看到了。巴利
244. Sattame dukkhadhammānanti dukkhasambhavadhammānaṃ. Pañcasu hi khandhesu sati chedanavadhabandhanādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ sambhavati, tasmā te dukkhasambhavadhammattā dukkhadhammāti vuccanti. Tathā kho panassāti tenākārenassa. Yathāssa kāme passatoti yenākārenassa kāme passantassa. Yathā carantanti yenākārena cārañca vihārañca anubandhitvā carantaṃ. Aṅgārakāsūpamākāmā diṭṭhā hontīti pariyeṭṭhimūlakassa ceva paṭisandhimūlakassa ca dukkhassa vasena aṅgārakāsu viya mahāpariḷāhāti diṭṭhā honti. Kāme pariyesantānañhi nāvāya mahāsamuddogāhanaajapathasaṅkupathapaṭipajjanaubhatobyūḷhasaṅgāmapakkhandanādivasena pariyeṭṭhimūlakampi, kāme paribhuñjantānaṃ kāmaparibhogacetanāya catūsu apāyesu dinnapaṭisandhimūlakampi mahāpariḷāhadukkhaṃ uppajjati. Evametassa duvidhassāpi dukkhassa vasena aṅgārakāsu viya mahāpariḷāhāti diṭṭhā honti.
他们进入密林。前方也有刺,意思是说,就像有人想从前面刺过来,那刺就紧靠在近处。对后方等词,也照同样的方式理解。至于下方,是指在脚踩踏处的附近有刺,而不是就在被踩踏的地方。这样一来,他就像进入了一个布满刺的巢穴。莫令我,刺!也就是“别让刺刺中我”,他小心防护着,不被刺扎到。巴利
Dāyanti aṭaviṃ. Puratopi kaṇṭakoti purimapasse vijjhitukāmo viya āsannaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhitakaṇṭako. Pacchatotiādīsupi eseva nayo. Heṭṭhā pana pādehi akkantaṭṭhānassa santike, na akkantaṭṭhāneyeva. Evaṃ so kaṇṭakagabbhaṃ paviṭṭho viya bhaveyya. Mā maṃ kaṇṭakoti mā maṃ kaṇṭako vijjhīti kaṇṭakavedhaṃ rakkhamāno.
比丘们,念的生起是缓慢的。也就是说,念的生起本身确实缓慢,但它一旦生起,任何烦恼就都被压制住了,根本站不住脚。因为在眼门中,当贪等烦恼生起时,他在第二个速行心的阶段就察觉到“烦恼在我心中生起了”,到了第三个速行心,念就作为防护的速行心生起。对一个修观的人来说,能在第三个速行心就压制住烦恼,这并不稀奇。而当眼门出现可意的对象时,有分心转向之后,在转向心等相继生起、确定心紧接着生起时,他就能扭转已经到来的烦恼速行,只让善心生起。对于已经开始修观的人来说,这正是安住在修行对治中的一种利益。巴利
Dandho, bhikkhave, satuppādoti satiyā uppādoyeva dandho, uppannamattāya pana tāya kāci kilesā niggahitāva honti, na saṇṭhātuṃ sakkonti. Cakkhudvārasmiñhi rāgādīsu uppannesu dutiyajavanavārena ‘‘kilesā me uppannā’’ti ñatvā tatiye javanavāre saṃvarajavanaṃyeva javati. Anacchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ vipassako tatiyajavanavāre kilese niggaṇheyya. Cakkhudvāre pana iṭṭhārammaṇe āpāthagate bhavaṅgaṃ āvaṭṭetvā āvajjanādīsu uppannesu voṭṭhabbanānantaraṃ sampattakilesajavanavāraṃ nivattetvā kusalameva uppādeti. Āraddhavipassakānañhi ayamānisaṃso bhāvanāpaṭisaṅkhāne patiṭṭhitabhāvassa.
“被带来而邀请”的意思是:就像对善施长老,或者像对赖吒和罗善男子那样,有人亲自带着七宝前来,或者用言语说“从我的财物里,你想要多少就拿多少”,这样来邀请。“燃烧”的意思是:因为衣物缠裹在身体上,产生灼热之苦,所以叫燃烧;也有汗水生出后附着在身体上、随之流淌的意思。“诸比丘,那种心”这句话,是因为心不转向时,对那个人来说根本不存在所谓的转向。因为那种状态的心就是不转向的,所以世尊才这样说。这样,在这部经中,所阐明的正是观的力量。巴利
Abhihaṭṭhuṃpavāreyyunti sudinnattherassa viya raṭṭhapālakulaputtassa viya ca kāyena vā satta ratanāni abhiharitvā vācāya vā ‘‘amhākaṃ dhanato yattakaṃ icchasi, tattakaṃ gaṇhā’’ti vadantā pavāreyyuṃ. Anudahantīti sarīre paliveṭhitattā uṇhapariḷāhaṃ janetvā anudahanti. Sañjātasede vā sarīre laggantā anusentītipi attho. Yañhi taṃ, bhikkhave, cittanti idaṃ yasmā citte anāvaṭṭante puggalassa āvaṭṭanaṃ nāma natthi. Evarūpañhi cittaṃ anāvaṭṭanti, tasmā vuttaṃ. Iti imasmiṃ sutte vipassanābalameva dīpitaṃ.
8. 甄叔迦树譬喻经的注释巴利
8. Kiṃsukopamasuttavaṇṇanā
245 第八项“见”,是初道的同义词。因为初道在完成断除烦恼的作用时,最先见到涅槃,所以称为“见”。种姓智虽然比道更早见到涅槃,但见到之后,并没有断除烦恼这件应做的事,所以不称为“见”。另外,四种道也都是“见”。为什么呢?因为比丘们曾这样说:“在入流道的刹那,见得到净化;在果的刹那,见是清净的。在一来道、不来道、阿罗汉道的刹那,见得到净化;在果的刹那,见是清净的。”那位比丘听了之后,心想:“我也要让见清净,安住在阿罗汉果,证得具足见清净的涅槃而安住。”于是他就走到那位比丘那里,这样问。那位以触处为业处的比丘,通过六触处把握了色法和非色法,证得了阿罗汉果。在这里,前五处是色法,意处是非色法。就这样,他讲说的正是自己所证得的道。巴利
245. Aṭṭhame dassananti paṭhamamaggassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paṭhamamaggo hi kilesapahānakiccaṃ sādhento paṭhamaṃ nibbānaṃ passati, tasmā dassananti vuccati. Gotrabhuñāṇaṃ pana kiñcāpi maggato paṭhamataraṃ passati, passitvā pana kattabbakiccassa kilesapahānassa abhāvena na dassananti vuccati. Apica cattāropi maggā dassanameva. Kasmā? Sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe dassanaṃ visujjhati, phalakkhaṇe visuddhaṃ. Sakadāgāmianāgāmiarahattamaggakkhaṇe visujjhati, phalakkhaṇe visuddhanti evaṃ kathentānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sutvā so bhikkhu ‘‘ahampi dassanaṃ visodhetvā arahattaphale patiṭṭhito dassanavisuddhikaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikatvā viharissāmī’’ti taṃ bhikkhuṃ upasaṅkamitvā evaṃ pucchi. So phassāyatanakammaṭṭhāniko channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ vasena rūpārūpadhamme pariggahetvā arahattaṃ patto. Ettha hi purimāni pañca āyatanāni rūpaṃ, manāyatanaṃ arūpaṃ. Iti so attanā adhigatamaggameva kathesi.
“不满足”:因为那位比丘是站在局部行的层面上说的,所以他不满足。他心里这样想:“这个人是站在局部行的层面上讲的。站在局部行的层面上,有可能证到具足见清净的涅槃吗?”于是他就问那个人:“贤友,只有您知道这个具足见清净的涅槃,还是也有其他人知道?”对方说:“有的,贤友,在某处寺院里,有一位名叫某某的长老。”他就去到那位长老那里询问。用同样的方式,他又去了一位又一位那里。巴利
Asantuṭṭhoti padesasaṅkhāresu ṭhatvā kathitattā asantuṭṭho. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ padesasaṅkhāresu ṭhatvā kathesi. Sakkā nu kho padesasaṅkhāresu ṭhatvā dassanavisuddhikaṃ nibbānaṃ pāpuṇitu’’nti? Tato naṃ pucchi – ‘‘āvuso, tvaṃyeva nu kho idaṃ dassanavisuddhikaṃ nibbānaṃ jānāsi, udāhu aññepi jānantā atthī’’ti. Atthāvuso, asukavihāre asukatthero nāmāti. So tampi upasaṅkamitvā pucchi. Etenupāyena aññampi aññampīti.
在这里,第二位以五蕴为业处的比丘,依色蕴来界定色,依其余诸蕴来界定名,这样安立了名色之后,次第证得了阿罗汉果。因此,他也只是讲说了自己证得的道。可是这位比丘心想:“他们这些说法彼此不一致。第一位是立足于有部分的诸行而说的,这一位则是立足于无部分的诸行而说的。”他心里不满足,就又同样地问了他之后离开了。巴利
Ettha ca dutiyo pañcakkhandhakammaṭṭhāniko rūpakkhandhavasena rūpaṃ, sesakkhandhavasena nāmanti nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā anukkamena arahattaṃ patto. Tasmā sopi attanā adhigatamaggameva kathesi. Ayaṃ pana ‘‘imesaṃ aññamaññaṃ na sameti, paṭhamena sappadesasaṅkhāresu ṭhatvāva kathitaṃ, iminā nippadesesū’’ti asantuṭṭho hutvā tatheva taṃ pucchitvā pakkāmi.
第三位比丘是以四界为业处的人,他简略地和详细地把握了四大种,证得了阿罗汉果。因此,他也只是讲说了自己所证得的道。而这位求法者心想:“这些人所说的彼此不一致:第一位是立足于有分说的诸行而说的,第二位是立足于无分说的诸行,第三位则是立足于极有分说的诸行。”他对此不满意,就又同样地问了那位比丘,然后离开了。巴利
Tatiyo mahābhūtakammaṭṭhāniko cattāri mahābhūtāni saṅkhepato ca vitthārato ca pariggahetvā arahattaṃ patto, tasmā ayampi attanā adhigatamaggameva kathesi. Ayaṃ pana ‘‘imesaṃ aññamaññaṃ na sameti, paṭhamena sappadesasaṅkhāresu ṭhatvā kathitaṃ, dutiyena nippadesesu, tatiyena atisappadesesū’’ti asantuṭṭho hutvā tatheva taṃ pucchitvā pakkāmi.
第四位是以三界法为业处的比丘。据说他的诸界运转顺畅,身体调柔,体力充沛,一切业处对他都适宜。无论过去的行、未来的行还是现在的行,无论欲界的、色界的还是无色界的,全都适宜。对他来说,没有不适宜的业处。在时间上,无论午前还是午后,无论初夜还是其他时分,也没有不适宜的时候。就像一头进入觅食地的大象,该用鼻子卷取的就用鼻子卷起来拿走,该用脚踢了再取的就用脚踢了再取;同样,他把整个三界的法以整类的方式把握住,反复观察,证得了阿罗汉果。所以他也只是讲说了自己所证得的道。这位比丘却想:“这些人的说法彼此不一致。第一位是立足于有分的行来说的,第二位是立足于无分的行,第三位又是有分的行,第四位则完全是无分的行。”他心里不满足,就去问那位比丘:“贤友,这个见清净的涅槃,是你们自己凭对法性的领悟而知道的,还是有人告诉你们的?”那位比丘回答:“贤友,我们能知道什么呢?不过,在这个有天神有人的世间,确实有一位正等正觉的佛陀,我们是依靠他才知道的。”他心想:“这些比丘没法领会我的心意来为我讲说。我要去问那位全知的佛陀,这样才能彻底没有疑惑。”于是他就往世尊那里去了。巴利
Catuttho tebhūmakakammaṭṭhāniko. Tassa kira samappavattā dhātuyo ahesuṃ, kallasarīraṃ balapattaṃ, kammaṭṭhānānipissa sabbāneva sappāyāni, atītā vā saṅkhārā hontu anāgatā vā paccuppannā vā kāmāvacarā vā rūpāvacarā vā arūpāvacarā vā, sabbepi sappāyāva. Asappāyakammaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi. Kālesupi purebhattaṃ vā hotu pacchābhattaṃ vā paṭhamayāmādayo vā, asappāyo kālo nāma natthi. Yathā nāma cāribhūmiṃ otiṇṇo mahāhatthī hatthena gahetabbaṃ hattheneva luñcitvā gaṇhāti, pādehi paharitvā gahetabbaṃ pādehi paharitvā gaṇhāti, evameva sakale tebhūmakadhamme kalāpaggāhena gahetvā sammasanto arahattaṃ patto, tasmā esopi attanā adhigatamaggameva kathesi. Ayaṃ pana ‘‘imesaṃ aññamaññaṃ na sameti. Paṭhamena sappadesasaṅkhāresu ṭhatvā kathitaṃ, dutiyena nippadesesu, puna tatiyena sappadesesu, catutthena nippadesesuyevā’’ti asantuṭṭho hutvā taṃ pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, āvuso, idaṃ dassanavisuddhikaṃ nibbānaṃ tumhehi attanova dhammatāya ñātaṃ, udāhu kenaci vo akkhāta’’nti? Āvuso, mayaṃ kiṃ jānāma? Atthi pana sadevake loke sammāsambuddho, taṃ nissāyetaṃ amhehi ñātanti. So cintesi – ‘‘ime bhikkhū mayhaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ gahetvā kathetuṃ na sakkonti, ahaṃ sabbaññubuddhameva pucchitvā nikkaṅkho bhavissāmī’’ti yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.
世尊听了他的话,并没有这样责备他:“为你解答这个问题的四个人都已经漏尽,他们讲得很好,只是你自己愚痴,才没有领会。”世尊知道他是能修行的人,心想:“这个人在寻求法义,我就通过说法让他明白。”于是举了甄叔迦树的比喻。这里应当以真实的事例来说明其中的含义:据说,有一座大城里住着一位通晓一切典籍的聪明婆罗门医生。那时,城东门外村子里有个患黄疸病的人来到他那里,向他行礼后站在一旁。那位聪明的医生和他寒暄之后问道:“你是为了什么事来的?”那人说:“尊者,我被疾病折磨,请您告诉我该用什么药。”医生说:“那你去砍一棵甄叔迦树,晒干、烧掉,取它的灰汁,配上这样那样的药,做成阿利吒药喝下去,这样你就会好起来。”那人照做之后,病就好了,变得强壮又有精神。巴利
Bhagavā tassa vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘yehi te pañho kathito, te cattāropi khīṇāsavā, sukathitaṃ tehi, tvaṃ pana attano andhabālatāya taṃ na sallakkhesī’’ti na evaṃ vihesesi. Kārakabhāvaṃ panassa ñatvā ‘‘atthagavesako esa, dhammadesanāya eva naṃ bujjhāpessāmī’’ti kiṃsukopamaṃ āhari. Tattha bhūtaṃ vatthuṃ katvā evamattho vibhāvetabbo – ekasmiṃ kira mahānagare eko sabbaganthadharo brāhmaṇavejjo paṇḍito paṭivasati. Atheko nagarassa pācīnadvāragāmavāsī paṇḍurogapuriso tassa santikaṃ āgantvā taṃ vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. Vejjapaṇḍito tena saddhiṃ sammoditvā ‘‘kenatthena āgatosi bhadramukhā’’ti, pucchi. Rogenamhi, ayya, upadduto, bhesajjaṃ me kathehīti. Tena hi, bho, gaccha, kiṃsukarukkhaṃ chinditvā, sosetvā jhāpetvā, tassa khārodakaṃ gahetvā iminā ciminā ca bhesajjena yojetvā, ariṭṭhaṃ katvā piva, tena te phāsukaṃ bhavissatīti. So tathā katvā nirogo balavā pāsādiko jāto.
这时,另一个住在南门村的人也得了同样的病。他听说“某人配了药,病就好了”,就去找那个人,问道:“朋友,你是怎么好起来的?”那人说:“用一种叫甄叔迦阿利吒的药,你也去照做吧。”他也照样做了,结果也变得和那人一样。巴利
Athañño dakkhiṇadvāragāmavāsī puriso teneva rogena āturo ‘‘asuko kira bhesajjaṃ katvā arogo jāto’’ti sutvā taṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchi – ‘‘kena te, samma, phāsukaṃ jāta’’nti. Kiṃsukāriṭṭhena nāma, gaccha tvampi karohīti. Sopi tathā katvā tādisova jāto.
接着,又有一个住在西门村的人……乃至一个住在北门村的人,也得了同样的病。他听说“某人配了药之后病就好了”,就去找那个人,问道:“朋友,你是怎么好起来的?”那人说:“用一种叫甄叔迦阿利吒的药,你也去照做吧。”他也照样做了,结果就和前面那个人一样康复了。巴利
Athañño pacchimadvāragāmavāsī…pe… uttaradvāragāmavāsī puriso teneva rogena āturo ‘‘asuko kira bhesajjaṃ katvā arogo jāto’’ti taṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchi ‘‘kena te, samma, phāsukaṃ jāta’’nti? Kiṃsukāriṭṭhena nāma, gaccha tvampi karohīti. Sopi tathā katvā tādisova jāto.
这时,另一个住在边远地区的人,从没见过甄叔迦树。他也得了同样的病,长期配了各种药,病情却一直不见好转。他听说“据说大城东门村有个人,配了药就康复了”,于是想:“我也去,照他配的药来做。”便拄着拐杖,一路辗转来到那人跟前,问道:“朋友,你是怎么好起来的?”那人回答说:“朋友,是用甄叔迦阿利吒。”他又问:“那甄叔迦树是什么样子?”那人说:“就像被烧毁的村子里立着的一根烧焦的柱子。”原来,那人见到甄叔迦树的时候,树已经落光了叶子,只剩下像树桩一样的样子,所以就照着自己看到的样子来描述。巴利
Athañño paccantavāsī adiṭṭhapubbakiṃsuko eko puriso teneva rogena āturo ciraṃ tāni tāni bhesajjāni katvā roge avūpasamamāne ‘‘asuko kira nagarassa pācīnadvāragāmavāsī puriso bhesajjaṃ katvā arogo jāto’’ti sutvā ‘‘gacchāmahampi, tena katabhesajjaṃ karissāmī’’ti daṇḍamolubbha anupubbena tassa santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘kena te, samma, phāsukaṃ jāta’’nti pucchi. Kiṃsukāriṭṭhena sammāti. Kīdiso pana so kiṃsukoti. Jhāpitagāme ṭhitajhāmathūṇo viyāti. Iti so puriso attanā diṭṭhākārenava kiṃsukaṃ ācikkhi. Tena hi diṭṭhakāle kiṃsuko patitapatto khāṇukakāle diṭṭhattā tādisova hoti.
那人因为讲究吉凶,就说:“这就像烧毁的村庄里烧焦的柱子一样,这不吉利。就算用这个给我配了药,病也好不了。”他对这人的回答不满意,就问那人:“贤者,难道只有你认得甄叔迦树吗?还有别人也认得吗?”那人说:“贤者,南门村有个叫某某的人认得。”他就去拜访那人并问了同样的问题。那人在甄叔迦树开花时见过,就按照自己看到的样子说:“甄叔迦树是红色的。”他心想:“这人说的跟前一个完全相反,黑色和红色差得太远了。”他对这人的回答也不满意,又问:“贤者,还有没有别人也见过甄叔迦树?”问出“西门村有个叫某某的人”之后,他又去拜访那人并询问。那人在甄叔迦树结果时见过,就按照自己看到的样子说:“带着垂挂的树皮纤维,像握住的剑鞘。”因为甄叔迦树结果的时候,树皮纤维垂挂着,像低着头一样,果实悬垂着,就像握着的剑鞘,也像阔荚合欢树那样挂着果实。他心想:“这人说的跟前几个人都相反,不能采信他的话。”他对这人的回答也不满意,又问:“贤者,还有没有别人也见过甄叔迦树?”问出“北门村有个叫某某的人”之后,他又去拜访那人并询问。那人在树叶茂密时见过,就按照自己看到的样子说:“叶子厚密,树荫浓密。”所谓树荫浓密,就是枝叶交叠在一起形成的阴影。巴利
So pana puriso sutamaṅgalikattā ‘‘ayaṃ ‘jhāpitagāme jhāmathūṇo viyā’ti āha, amaṅgalametaṃ . Etasmiñhi me bhesajje katepi rogo na vūpasamissatī’’ti tassa veyyākaraṇena asantuṭṭho taṃ pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, bho, tvaññeva kiṃsukaṃ jānāsi, udāhu aññopi atthī’’ti. Atthi, bho, dakkhiṇadvāragāme asuko nāmāti. So taṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchi, svāssa pupphitakāle diṭṭhattā attano dassanānurūpena ‘‘lohitako kiṃsuko’’ti āha. So ‘‘ayaṃ purimena viruddhaṃ āha, kāḷako lohitakato suvidūradūre’’ti tassapi veyyākaraṇena asantuṭṭho ‘‘atthi pana, bho, aññopi koci kiṃsukadassāvī, yena kiṃsuko diṭṭhapubbo’’ti? Pucchitvā, ‘‘atthi pacchimadvāragāme asuko nāmā’’ti vutte tampi upasaṅkamitvā pucchi. Svāssa phalitakāle diṭṭhattā attano dassanānurūpena ‘‘ocirakajāto ādinnasipāṭiko’’ti āha. Phalitakālasmiñhi kiṃsuko olambamānacīrako viya adhomukhaṃ katvā gahitaasikoso viya ca sirīsarukkho viya ca lambamānaphalo hoti. So ‘‘ayaṃ purimehi viruddhaṃ āha, na sakkā imassa vacanaṃ gahetu’’nti tassapi veyyākaraṇena asantuṭṭho ‘‘atthi pana, bho, aññopi koci kiṃsukadassāvī, yena kiṃsuko diṭṭhapubbo’’ti? Pucchitvā, ‘‘atthi uttaradvāragāme asuko nāmā’’ti vutte tampi upasaṅkamitvā pucchi. So assa sañchannapattakāle diṭṭhattā attano dassanānurūpena ‘‘bahalapattapalāso sandacchāyo’’ti āha. Sandacchāyo nāma saṃsanditvā ṭhitacchāyo.
他心里想:“这个人说的也跟前面几个人相反,他的话不能信。”于是对这个人讲的也不满意,就对他说:“贤者,你们是凭自己知道甄叔迦树的法性,还是有人告诉你们的?”那人说:“贤者,我们怎么会自己知道呢?城里有一位我们的老师,是个精通医术的智者,我们是依靠他才知道的。”他听了想:“那我也去拜访那位老师,这样就能没有疑惑了。”于是来到老师跟前,向他行礼后站在一旁。那位精通医术的智者和他互相问候之后,问道:“善来,你是为了什么事来的?”他说:“尊者,我被疾病折磨,请为我讲讲药方。”那位智者说:“那么,贤者,你去砍一棵甄叔迦树,晒干,烧掉,取它的碱水,再配上这种和那种药,做成药酒喝下去,这样你就会舒服了。”他照办之后,果然变得无病、强壮、容色庄严。巴利
So ‘‘ayampi purimehi viruddhaṃ āha, na sakkā imassa vacanaṃ gahetu’’nti tassapi veyyākaraṇena asantuṭṭho taṃ āha, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho, bho, tumhe attanova dhammatāya kiṃsukaṃ jānātha, udāhu kenaci vo akkhāto’’ti? Kiṃ, bho, mayaṃ jānāma? Atthi pana mahānagarassa majjhe amhākaṃ ācariyo vejjapaṇḍito, taṃ nissāya amhehi ñātanti. ‘‘Tena hi ahampi ācariyameva upasaṅkamitvā nikkaṅkho bhavissāmī’’ti tassa santikaṃ upasaṅkamitvā taṃ vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. Vejjapaṇḍito tena saddhiṃ sammoditvā, ‘‘kenatthena āgatosi bhadramukhā’’ti pucchi. Rogenamhi, ayya, upadduto, bhesajjaṃ me kathethāti. Tena hi, bho, gaccha, kiṃsukarukkhaṃ chinditvā sosetvā jhāpetvā tassa khārodakaṃ gahetvā iminā ciminā ca bhesajjena yojetvā ariṭṭhaṃ katvā piva, etena te phāsukaṃ bhavissatīti. So tathā katvā nirogo balavā pāsādiko jāto.
在这里,应当把涅槃城看作一座大城。正自觉者就像那位良医。正如经中所说:“善星,如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者,确实被称为‘医师、外科医生’。”四位证得见清净的诸漏尽者,就像四门村中的四位医徒。提问的比丘,就像那位住在边远地方的第一人。边远之人对四位医徒的解说不满意,便直接去请教老师;同样,这位比丘对四位证得见清净的诸漏尽者的解说不满意,便去亲近导师,向导师提问。巴利
Tattha mahānagaraṃ viya nibbānanagaraṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vejjapaṇḍito viya sammāsambuddho. Vuttampi ce taṃ ‘‘bhisakko sallakattoti kho, sunakkhatta, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.65) catūsu dvāragāmesu cattāro vejjantevāsikā viya cattāro dassanavisuddhipattā khīṇāsavā. Paccantavāsī paṭhamapuriso viya pañhapucchako bhikkhu. Paccantavāsino catunnaṃ vejjantevāsikānaṃ kathāya asantuṭṭhassa ācariyameva upasaṅkamitvā pucchanakālo viya imassa bhikkhuno catunnaṃ dassanavisuddhipattānaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ kathāya asantuṭṭhassa satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchanakālo.
“按照各自所倾向的那样”:以各自所倾向的方式。“见极其清净”:对涅槃的见极其清净。“那些善士就是那样那样解说的”:那些善士正是以各自相应的方式为你解说的。就像有人讲“黑色的紫矿树”时,并没有说别的,只是按照自己亲眼所见的方式来讲紫矿树;同样地,那些依六触处而证得见清净的漏尽者,在解说这个问题时,也没有说别的,只是按照自己所证得的道路,讲说能带来见清净的涅槃而已。巴利
Yathā yathā adhimuttānanti yena yenākārena adhimuttānaṃ. Dassanaṃ suvisuddhanti nibbānadassanaṃ suṭṭhu visuddhaṃ. Tathā tathā kho tehi sappurisehi byākatanti tena tenevākārena tuyhaṃ tehi sappurisehi kathitaṃ. Yathā hi ‘‘kāḷako kiṃsuko’’ti kathento na aññaṃ kathesi, attanā diṭṭhanayena kiṃsukameva kathesi, evameva chaphassāyatanānaṃ vasena dassanavisuddhipattakhīṇāsavopi imaṃ pañhaṃ kathento na aññaṃ kathesi, attanā adhigatamaggena dassanavisuddhikaṃ nibbānameva kathesi.
就像有人描述“红色的紫矿树,刚长出新芽、枝叶茂密”时,他并没有说别的东西,只是按自己亲眼所见的方式在讲紫矿树;同样,那位依五取蕴、依四大种、依三界法而证得见清净的漏尽者,在解说这个问题时,也没有说别的,只是依照自己证得的道,讲说那能带来见清净的涅槃。巴利
Yathā ca ‘‘lohitako ocirakajāto bahalapattapalāso kiṃsuko’’ti kathentopi na aññaṃ kathesi, attanā diṭṭhanayena kiṃsukameva kathesi, evameva pañcupādānakkhandhavasena catumahābhūtavasena tebhūmakadhammavasena dassanavisuddhipattakhīṇāsavopi imaṃ pañhaṃ kathento na aññaṃ kathesi, attanā adhigatamaggena dassanavisuddhikaṃ nibbānameva kathesi.
在这里,就像在黑色时节看见紫矿树的人,他的所见是真实、准确的,他没有看见别的,只看见了紫矿树;同样,依靠六触处而达到见清净的漏尽者,他的所见也是真实、准确的,他没有说别的,只说了自己通过所证得的道而达到见清净的涅槃。又像在红色时节、新芽初生时节、枝叶茂密时节看见紫矿树的人,他的所见是真实、准确的,他没有看见别的,只看见了紫矿树;同样,依靠五取蕴、依靠四大种、依靠三界法而达到见清净的漏尽者,他的所见也是真实、准确的,他没有说别的,只说了自己通过所证得的道而达到见清净的涅槃。巴利
Tattha yathā kāḷakakāle kiṃsukadassāvinopi taṃ dassanaṃ bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ na tena aññaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, kiṃsukova diṭṭho, evameva chaphassāyatanavasena dassanavisuddhipattassāpi khīṇāsavassa dassanaṃ bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ, na tena aññaṃ kathitaṃ, attanā adhigatamaggena dassanavisuddhikaṃ nibbānameva kathitaṃ. Yathā ca lohitakāle ocirakajātakāle bahalapattapalāsakāle kiṃsukadassāvinopi taṃ dassanaṃ bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ, na tena aññaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, kiṃsukova diṭṭho, evameva pañcupādānakkhandhavasena catumahābhūtavasena tebhūmakadhammavasena dassanavisuddhipattassāpi khīṇāsavassa dassanaṃ bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ, na tena aññaṃ kathitaṃ, attanā adhigatamaggena dassanavisuddhikaṃ nibbānameva kathitaṃ.
比丘,为什么一开始要说“就像国王的边境城”呢?如果那位比丘已经明白了这个意思,那就是为了说法而说的;如果他还没明白,那就是为了用这个城的比喻来说明、显明那个义理而说的。在这里,因为在中部地区的城,城墙等无论坚固还是脆弱,甚至完全没有,都不用担心有盗贼,所以不拿那种城来说,而是说“边境城”。“坚固的壁垒”,就是坚固的城墙。“坚固的城墙和城门”,就是坚固的城墙加上坚固的城门。所谓城门,是有人身高度的,为了装饰城市、也为了防御盗贼而建造的。或者,“城门”是门框的名称,也就是坚固的门框的意思。“六门”,城门本来有一门、二门、百门、千门,但这里导师为了展示六门之城而这样说。所谓“智者”,就是具足智慧者;所谓“敏锐者”,就是具足敏锐特质、智识清澈者;所谓“有智慧者”,就是具足名为“于适当处能生起”之智慧者。巴利
Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu rañño paccantimaṃ nagaranti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Sace tena bhikkhunā taṃ sallakkhitaṃ, athassa dhammadesanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Sace na sallakkhitaṃ, athassa iminā nagaropamena tassevatthassa dīpanatthāya āvibhāvanatthāya āraddhaṃ. Tattha yasmā majjhimapadese nagarassa pākārādīni thirāni vā hontu dubbalāni vā, sabbaso vā mā hontu, corāsaṅkā na honti, tasmā taṃ aggahetvā ‘‘paccantimaṃ nagara’’nti āha. Daḷhuddhāpanti thirapākāraṃ. Daḷhapākāratoraṇanti thirapākārañceva thiratoraṇañca. Toraṇāni nāma hi purisubbedhāni nagarassa alaṅkāratthaṃ karīyanti, coranivāraṇatthānipi hontiyeva. Atha vā toraṇanti piṭṭhasaṅghāṭassetaṃ nāmaṃ, thirapiṭṭhasaṅghāṭantipi attho. Chadvāranti nagaradvāraṃ nāma ekampi hoti dvepi satampi sahassampi, idha pana satthā chadvārikanagaraṃ dassento evamāha. Paṇḍitoti paṇḍiccena samannāgato. Byattoti veyyattiyena samannāgato visadañāṇo. Medhāvīti ṭhānuppattikapaññāsaṅkhātāya medhāya samannāgato.
“东方”等语,应当结合其实际含义这样理解:据说,在一座繁荣的大城里,有一位具足七宝的转轮王治理国政。他治下有一座边境小城,那里没有国王任命的官员。于是有人前来禀告:“大王,我们城里没有官员,请赐给我们一位官员。”国王便派了一位王子,吩咐道:“你们带他去,在那里为他灌顶,设立裁决处等,然后住下来。”他们照办了。那位王子因为亲近恶友,没过几天就成了嗜酒之徒,把裁决处等一切事务都荒废了,在城中心被一群恶徒簇拥着喝酒,整天沉溺于歌舞等享乐。后来有人来到国王面前,禀报了这件事。巴利
Puratthimāya disāyātiādimhi bhūtamatthaṃ katvā evamattho veditabbo – samiddhe kira mahānagare sattaratanasampanno rājā cakkavatti rajjaṃ anusāsati, tassetaṃ paccantanagaraṃ rājāyuttavirahitaṃ , atha purisā āgantvā ‘‘amhākaṃ, deva, nagare āyuttako natthi, dehi no kiñci āyuttaka’’nti āhaṃsu. Rājā ekaṃ puttaṃ datvā ‘‘gacchatha, etaṃ ādāya tattha abhisiñcitvā vinicchayaṭṭhānādīni katvā vasathā’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Rājaputto pāpamittasaṃsaggena katipāheyeva surāsoṇḍo hutvā, sabbāni vinicchayaṭṭhānādīni hāretvā, nagaramajjhe dhuttehi parivārito suraṃ pivanto naccagītādiratiyā vītināmeti. Atha rañño āgantvā ārocayiṃsu.
国王命令一位聪明的大臣:“你去教导王子,让他整顿好审判处等事务,再为他举行灌顶礼,然后回来。”大臣说:“陛下,没法教导王子啊,王子脾气暴躁,说不定会杀了我。”于是国王又命令一位力气很大的勇士:“你跟他一起去,如果他不听教导,就把他的头砍下来。”就这样,那位大臣和勇士——这对急行使者——很快到了那里,问守门人:“喂,这座城的主人王子在哪里?”守门人说:“他正坐在城中心的十字路口,被一群浪荡子围着喝酒,享受歌舞之类的娱乐呢。”于是这对使者走过去。大臣先对王子说:“主人,请您先把审判处等事务整顿好,好好治理国家吧。”王子坐在那里,装作没听见。这时勇士抓住王子的头,拔出剑说:“你要是听从国王的命令,就照办;要是不听,我就在这里把你的头砍下来!”那些跟随的浪荡子立刻四散逃跑了。王子害怕了,接受了命令。于是他们就在那里当场为他灌顶,竖起白伞,把国王交代的那句实话——“好好治理国家”——转达给他,然后沿着来时的路回去了。世尊为了说明这个道理,说了“于东方……”这段话。巴利
Rājā ekaṃ paṇḍitaṃ amaccaṃ āṇāpesi – ‘‘gaccha kumāraṃ ovaditvā, vinicchayaṭṭhānādīni kāretvā, puna abhisekaṃ katvā, ehī’’ti. Na sakkā, deva, kumāraṃ ovadituṃ, caṇḍo kumāro ghāteyyāpi manti. Athekaṃ balasampannaṃ yodhaṃ āṇāpesi – ‘‘tvaṃ iminā saddhiṃ gantvā sace so ovāde na tiṭṭhati, sīsamassa chindāhī’’ti. Iti so amacco yodho cāti idaṃ sīghaṃ dūtayugaṃ tattha gantvā dovārikaṃ pucchi – ‘‘kahaṃ, bho, nagarassa sāmi kumāro’’ti. Esa majjhesiṅghāṭake suraṃ pivanto dhuttaparivārito gītādiratiṃ anubhonto nisinnoti. Atha taṃ dūtayugaṃ gantvā amacco tāvettha, ‘‘sāmi, vinicchayaṭṭhānādīni kira kāretvā sādhukaṃ rajjaṃ anusāsā’’ti āha. Kumāro asuṇanto viya nisīdi. Atha naṃ yodho sīse gahetvā, ‘‘sace rañño āṇaṃ karosi, kara, no ce, ettheva te sīsaṃ pātessāmī’’ti khaggaṃ abbāhi. Paricārakā dhuttā tāvadeva disāsu palāyiṃsu. Kumāro bhīto sāsanaṃ sampaṭicchi. Athassa te tattheva abhisekaṃ katvā setacchattaṃ ussāpetvā ‘‘sammā rajjaṃ anusāsāhī’’ti raññā vuttaṃ yathābhūtavacanaṃ niyyātetvā yathāgatamaggameva paṭipajjiṃsu. Imamatthaṃ āvikaronto bhagavā ‘‘puratthimāya disāyā’’ti āha.
这里应当作这样的譬喻对应:富庶的大城,应当看作涅槃城;具足七宝的转轮王,就像具足七觉支宝的法王、正自觉者;边境城,就像自身这个身体之城;城中的恶王子,就像这位比丘生起的恶念;恶王子被恶徒围绕的时候,就像这位比丘具足五盖的时候;两位急使,就像止业处和观业处;被大力勇士抓住头的时候,就像以初禅定把心牢牢抓住、令心不动摇的时候;勇士一抓住头,恶徒就四散逃远,就像初禅一生起,诸盖就远离;接受了“我要遵行王命”的那一刻心获得释放,就像从禅那出起的时候;大臣向王子传达国王命令的时候,就像以定力把心调得堪任作业之后,进一步增长观业处的时候;就在那里,那两位使者为他灌顶、撑起白伞,应当理解为:依止止观业处而证得阿罗汉果的人,撑起了解脱的白伞。巴利
Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – samiddhamahānagaraṃ viya hi nibbānanagaraṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, sattaratanasamannāgato rājā cakkavatti viya sattabojjhaṅgaratanasamannāgato dhammarājā sammāsambuddho, paccantimanagaraṃ viya sakkāyanagaraṃ, tasmiṃ nagare kūṭarājaputto viya imassa bhikkhuno kūṭacittuppādo, kūṭarājaputtassa dhuttehi parivāritakālo viya imassa bhikkhuno pañcahi nīvaraṇehi samaṅgikālo, dve sīghadūtā viya samathakammaṭṭhānañca vipassanākammaṭṭhānañca, mahāyodhena sīse gahitakālo viya uppannapaṭhamajjhānasamādhinā niccalaṃ katvā cittaggahitakālo, yodhena sīse gahitamatte dhuttānaṃ disāsu palāyitvā dūrībhāvo viya paṭhamajjhānamhi uppannamatte nīvaraṇānaṃ dūrībhāvo, ‘‘karissāmi rañño sāsana’’nti sampaṭicchitamatte vissaṭṭhakālo viya jhānato vuṭṭhitakālo, amaccena rañño sāsanaṃ ārocitakālo viya samādhinā cittaṃ kammaniyaṃ katvā vipassanākammaṭṭhānassa vaḍḍhitakālo, tatthevassa tehi dvīhi dūtehi katābhisekassa setacchattaussāpanaṃ viya samathavipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ nissāya arahattappattassa vimuttisetacchattussāpanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
比丘,关于“城”这个说法,它是这四大种所成之身的同义词——在这类句子中,“四大种所成”等词的含义,前面已经详细解释过了。不过,仅仅因为身体是识王子的住处,所以在这里把身体称为“城”;因为六处是身体的门口,所以称为“门”;因为念始终稳稳地安住在这些门口,所以称为“守门人”;因为止和观是由那位开示业处、名为法王的佛陀派出去的,所以称为“急行双使”。在这里,应当把止理解为大力勇士,把观理解为贤明大臣。巴利
Nagaranti kho bhikkhu imassetaṃ cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassa adhivacanantiādīsu pana cātumahābhūtikassātiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho heṭṭhā vitthāritova. Kevalaṃ pana viññāṇarājaputtassa nivāsaṭṭhānattā ettha kāyo ‘‘nagara’’nti vutto, tasseva dvārabhūtattā cha āyatanāni ‘‘dvārānī’’ti, tesu dvāresu niccaṃ suppatiṭṭhitattā sati ‘‘dovāriko’’ti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhantena dhammarājena pesitattā samathavipassanā ‘‘sīghaṃ dūtayuga’’nti. Ettha mahāyodho viya samatho, paṇḍitāmacco viya vipassanā veditabbā.
在城中心的十字路口,就是城中央的十字路口。诸大种,是指作为心所依处色的依靠的四大种。这里举出四大种,只是为了说明所依色的缘。而在城中央十字路口的那位王子,应当看作如同安坐在身体中央——心脏色十字路口——的观智之识王子,他将被止与观这两位使者以阿罗汉灌顶来灌顶。至于涅槃,因为它是如实的自性、不动摇、是所依之处,所以说为如实的语。圣道则无论前行阶段的观道是怎样,这道也因为具足八支而与它相同,所以说为所来之道。以上便是对为说法之义所引譬喻的对应说明。巴利
Majjhe siṅghāṭakoti nagaramajjhe siṅghāṭako. Mahābhūtānanti hadayavatthussa nissayabhūtānaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ . Vatthurūpassa hi paccayadassanatthamevetaṃ catumahābhūtaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Nagaramajjhe pana so rājakumāro viya sarīramajjhe hadayarūpasiṅghāṭake nisinno samathavipassanādūtehi arahattābhisekena abhisiñcitabbo vipassanāviññāṇarājaputto daṭṭhabbo. Nibbānaṃ pana yathābhūtasabhāvaṃ akuppaṃ adhikārīti katvā yathābhūtaṃ vacananti vuttaṃ. Ariyamaggo pana yādisova pubbabhāgavipassanāmaggo, ayampi aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatattā tādisoyevāti katvā yathāgatamaggoti vutto. Idaṃ tāvettha dhammadesanatthaṃ ābhatāya upamāya saṃsandanaṃ.
不过,为了把这件事说清楚,在刚才所引的这部分内容里,还有这样一层对应关系:这里引用“六门”的比喻,是为了说明依六触处而达到见清净的漏尽者;引用“城主”的比喻,是为了说明依五蕴而达到见清净的漏尽者;引用“十字路口”的比喻,是为了说明依四大种而达到见清净的漏尽者;引用“城”的比喻,是为了说明依三界诸法而达到见清净的漏尽者。简单来说,这部经讲的就是四圣谛。以整座城的全部设施来说,讲的是苦谛;以“如实的语”来说,讲的是灭谛;以“所来之道”来说,讲的是道谛;而能生出种种苦的渴爱,则是集谛。说法结束时,那位提问的比丘证得了入流果。巴利
Tassevatthassa pākaṭīkaraṇatthaṃ ābhatapakkhe pana idaṃ saṃsandanaṃ – ettha hi chadvārūpamā chaphassāyatanavasena dassanavisuddhipattaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dassetuṃ ābhatā, nagarasāmiupamā pañcakkhandhavasena, siṅghāṭakūpamā catumahābhūtavasena, nagarūpamā tebhūmakadhammavasena dassanavisuddhipattaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dassetuṃ ābhatā. Saṅkhepato panimasmiṃ sutte catusaccameva kathitaṃ. Sakalenapi hi nagarasambhārena dukkhasaccameva kathitaṃ, yathābhūtavacanena nirodhasaccaṃ, yathāgatamaggena maggasaccaṃ, dukkhassa pana pabhāvikā taṇhā samudayasaccaṃ. Desanāpariyosāne pañhapucchako bhikkhu sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitoti.
第9经 琴喻经的注释巴利
9. Vīṇopamasuttavaṇṇanā
246 246. 第九者中,“比丘们,若任何比丘或比丘尼”这一句:导师的做法,就像一位大富家主完成了一大片田的耕作,庄稼成熟后,在家门口搭起棚子,向两众僧团施设布施。虽然那布施是为两众僧团而设,但两众都得到满足时,其余的人也同样得到满足。同样地,世尊圆满了超过四不可数劫的波罗蜜,在菩提树下证得一切知智,转起殊胜的法轮之后,安坐在祇园大精舍中,为比丘众和比丘尼众举行大法施,开演了《琴喻经》。虽然这部经是针对两众而说的,但对四众都没有遮障。因此,所有人都应当听闻、信受,并深入其中,品尝义理之味。巴利
246. Navame yassa kassaci, bhikkhave, bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vāti idaṃ satthā yathā nāma mahākuṭumbiko mahantaṃ kasikammaṃ katvā, nipphannasasso gharadvāre maṇḍapaṃ katvā, ubhatosaṅghassa dānaṃ pavatteyya. Kiñcāpi tena ubhatosaṅghassa dānaṃ paṭṭhapitaṃ, dvīsu pana parisāsu santappitāsu sesajanampi santappetiyeva, evameva bhagavā samadhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūretvā bodhimaṇḍe sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ adhigantvā pavattitavaradhammacakko jetavanamahāvihāre nisinno bhikkhuparisāya ceva bhikkhuniparisāya ca mahādhammayāgaṃ yajanto vīṇopamasuttaṃ ārabhi. Taṃ penetaṃ kiñcāpi dve parisā sandhāya āraddhaṃ, catunnampi pana parisānaṃ avāritaṃ. Tasmā sabbehipi sotabbañceva saddhātabbañca, pariyogāhitvā cassa attharaso vinditabboti.
在这里,“欲”等词当中:“欲”是指先前生起的、微弱的渴爱,它还不足以让人染着。而之后一再反复生起、力量强大的渴爱,就叫“贪”,它能让人染着。还不能做出拿棍棒等行为的,是先前生起的、微弱的愤怒,这叫“嗔”。能够做出那些行为的,是之后一再反复生起、力量强大的愤怒,这叫“恚”。而“痴”则是以迷乱、昏昧的方式生起的无知。这样一来,这里通过这五个词,就包含了三种不善根。这三种不善根被包含之后,所有以它们为根本的烦恼也就都被包含了。通过“欲、贪”这两个词,包含了八个与贪俱起的心生起;通过“嗔、恚”这两个词,包含了两个与忧俱起的心生起;通过“痴”这个词,包含了不伴随贪和嗔的两个与掉举、疑俱起的心生起。这样,全部十二种不善心生起也就都显示出来了。巴利
Tattha chandotiādīsu chando nāma pubbuppattikā dubbalataṇhā, so rañjetuṃ na sakkoti . Aparāparaṃ uppajjamānā pana balavataṇhā rāgo nāma, so rañjetuṃ sakkoti. Daṇḍādānādīni kātuṃ asamattho pubbuppattiko dubbalakodho doso nāma. Tāni kātuṃ samattho aparāparuppattiko balavakodho paṭighaṃ nāma. Moho pana mohanasammohanavasena uppannaṃ aññāṇaṃ. Evamettha pañcahipi padehi tīṇi akusalamūlāni gahitāni. Tesu gahitesu sabbepi tammūlakā kilesā gahitāva honti. ‘‘Chando rāgo’’ti vā padadvayena aṭṭhalobhasahagatacittuppādā, ‘‘doso paṭigha’’nti padadvayena dve domanassasahagatacittuppādā, mohapadena lobhadosarahitā dve uddhaccavicikicchāsahagatacittuppādā gahitāti. Evaṃ sabbepi dvādasa cittuppādā dassitāva honti.
有怖:因为这里是烦恼盗贼的住处,所以叫有怖。有畏:因为它是杀害、捆绑等事的来源,所以叫有畏。有刺:因为被贪等刺所刺,所以叫有刺。有丛:因为被贪等丛所缠,所以叫有丛。邪道:对想去天界、人界或涅槃的人来说,这是一条非道。恶道:就像那条通往恶臭、可厌之地的单行小道,因为它通向恶趣,所以叫恶道。险途:这里的“ihiti”是行走的意思。在那条路上行走是苦的,所以叫险途。因为在那条路上没有根、果等可吃可喝的东西,走起来很苦,没法沿着它走到想去的地方。同样,走上烦恼之道后,也无法到达成就的境地,所以烦恼之道被称为险途。也有读作“Dvīhitika”的,意思一样。非善人所亲近:就是被拘迦利等非善人亲近。巴利
Sabhayoti kilesacorānaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānattā sabhayo. Sappaṭibhayoti vadhabandhanādīnaṃ kāraṇattā sappaṭibhayo. Sakaṇṭakoti rāgādīhi kaṇṭakehi sakaṇṭako. Sagahanoti rāgagahanādīhi sagahano. Ummaggoti devalokaṃ vā manussalokaṃ vā nibbānaṃ vā gacchantassa amaggo. Kummaggoti kucchitajegucchibhūtaṭṭhānagamanaekapadikamaggo viya apāyasampāpakattā kummaggo. Duhitikoti ettha ihitīti iriyanā, dukkhā ihiti etthāti, duhitiko. Yasmiñhi magge mūlaphalādikhādanīyaṃ vā sāyanīyaṃ vā natthi, tasmiṃ iriyanā dukkhā hoti, na sakkā taṃ paṭipajjitvā icchitaṭṭhānaṃ gantuṃ. Kilesamaggampi paṭipajjitvā na sakkā sampattibhavaṃ gantunti kilesamaggo duhitikoti vutto. Dvīhitikotipi pāṭho, esevattho. Asappurisasevitoti kokālikādīhi asappurisehi sevito.
因此,要用方法把心挡回去:对那些眼睛能看到的色境,要用不净作意等方法,去阻挡那颗被欲望等推动而运转的心。因为在眼门这里,当可爱的对象出现而贪生起时,如果作意不净,心就会退回去;当不可爱的对象出现而嗔生起时,如果作意慈心,心就会退回去;当中等的对象出现而痴生起时,如果作意于诵习、遍问、亲近师长,心就会退回去。如果这样还是做不到,那就应当作意思念大师的伟大、法的善说、僧的善行。因为观察大师的伟大,或者观察法的善说、僧的善行,心也会退回去。因此说“应以不净作意等方法挡回去”。巴利
Tato cittaṃ nivārayeti tehi cakkhuviññeyyehi rūpehi taṃ chandādivasena pavattacittaṃ asubhāvajjanādīhi upāyehi nivāraye. Cakkhudvārasmiñhi iṭṭhārammaṇe rāge uppanne asubhato āvajjantassa cittaṃ nivattati, aniṭṭhārammaṇe dose uppanne mettato āvajjantassa cittaṃ nivattati, majjhattārammaṇe mohe uppanne uddesaparipucchaṃ garuvāsaṃ āvajjantassa cittaṃ nivattati. Evaṃ asakkontena pana satthumahattataṃ dhammassa svākkhātatā saṅghassa suppaṭipatti ca āvajjitabbā. Satthumahattataṃ paccavekkhatopi hi dhammassa svākkhātataṃ saṅghassa suppaṭipattiṃ paccavekkhatopi cittaṃ nivattati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘asubhāvajjanādīhi upāyehi nivāraye’’ti.
“谷物”是指长在田里的庄稼。“成熟”是指完全圆满、彻底长成。“吃谷者”就是吃庄稼的牛。同样,在这里应当这样理解:成熟的庄稼好比五种欲乐,吃谷的牛好比诡诈的心,守谷人放逸的时候好比比丘在六个门头舍弃正念而四处游走的时候。守谷人因为放逸,牛就吃掉了结穗的庄稼,谷主因此得不到谷实;同样,比丘因为失去守护六门的正念,以耽著五种欲乐的心毁坏了善法那一边,所以不能证得沙门果。巴利
Kiṭṭhanti kiṭṭhaṭṭhāne uppannasassaṃ. Sampannanti paripuṇṇaṃ sunipphannaṃ. Kiṭṭhādoti sassakhādako . Evameva khoti ettha sampannakiṭṭhaṃ viya pañca kāmaguṇā daṭṭhabbā, kiṭṭhādo goṇo viya kūṭacittaṃ, kiṭṭhārakkhassa pamādakālo viya bhikkhuno chasu dvāresu satiṃ pahāya vicaraṇakālo, kiṭṭhārakkhassa pamādamāgamma goṇena gahitagabbhassa kiṭṭhassa khāditattā sassasāmino sassaphalānadhigamo viya chadvārarakkhikāya satiyā vippavāsamāgamma pañcakāmaguṇaṃ assādentena cittena kusalapakkhassa nāsitattā bhikkhuno sāmaññaphalādhigamābhāvo veditabbo.
两角之间是指两只角中间的地方。用好好抑制的办法来抑制是指在鼻绳已经安放在鼻梁上时,把它好好制伏、牢牢控制住。以棍就是用像木杵那样的粗棍子。比丘们,这头牛就是这样:守谷的人因为疏忽大意,每当它想闯进庄稼地里的时候,就在那一刻把它这样制伏、敲打、赶走,最后它被调伏到不再有闯进欲望的地步。巴利
Uparighaṭāyanti dvinnaṃ siṅgānaṃ antare. Suniggahitaṃ niggaṇheyyāti ghaṭāyaṃ patiṭṭhite nāsārajjuke suṭṭhu niggahitaṃ katvā niggaṇheyya. Daṇḍenāti muggarasadisena thūladaṇḍakena. Evañhi so bhikkhave goṇoti evaṃ so kiṭṭhārakkhassa pamādamanvāya yasmiṃ yasmiṃ khaṇe kiṭṭhaṃ otaritukāmo hoti, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ khaṇe evaṃ niggaṇhitvā tāḷetvā osajjanena nibbisevanabhāvaṃ upanīto goṇo.
同样地,在这里也应当这样理解:成熟的稻田好比五欲,吃稻谷的牛好比狡诈的心,看守稻田者的不放逸好比这位比丘在六个根门中不舍弃正念,棍棒好比经典。就像牛朝向稻田时用棍棒打它一样,当心朝向外面种种不同的所缘时,应当忆念无始、天使、燃烧、毒蛇譬喻、未来怖畏等相应的经典,把心从种种不同的所缘中拉回来,让它进入根本业处。因此古人说:巴利
Evameva khoti idhāpi sampannakiṭṭhamiva pañca kāmaguṇā daṭṭhabbā, kiṭṭhādo viya kūṭacittaṃ, kiṭṭhārakkhassa appamādo viya imassa bhikkhuno chasu dvāresu satiyā avissajjanaṃ, daṇḍo viya suttanto, goṇassa kiṭṭhābhimukhakāle daṇḍena tāḷanaṃ viya cittassa bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇābhimukhakāle anamataggiyadevadūtaādittaāsīvisūpamaanāgatabhayādīsu taṃ taṃ suttaṃ āvajjetvā cittuppādassa puthuttārammaṇato nivāretvā mūlakammaṭṭhāne otāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tenāhu porāṇā –
听到善说之后,内心就生起清净的信心,
调伏它,就能得到喜悦与快乐;
那时他的意在所缘上停留,
就像一头吃谷子的牛,被棍子吓住了。巴利
‘‘Subhāsitaṃ sutvā mano pasīdati, Dameti naṃ pītisukhañca vindati; Tadassa ārammaṇe tiṭṭhate mano, Goṇova kiṭṭhādako daṇḍatajjito’’ti.
Udujita的意思是受到呵责。Sudujita的意思是好好呵责过,也有“已经好好呵责”的意思。而“udu”“sudū”只是不变词。“内”指行境之内。在“住立”等说法里:依初禅而住立,依第二禅而安坐,依第三禅而成为一境,依第四禅而入定。或者,这一切也可以都依初禅来理解。到这里,正自觉者就宣说了名为守护止的根律仪戒。巴利
Udujitanti tajjitaṃ. Sudujitanti sutajjitaṃ, sujitantipi attho. Udu, sudūti idaṃ pana nipātamattameva. Ajjhattanti gocarajjhattaṃ. Santiṭṭhatītiādīsu paṭhamajjhānavasena santiṭṭhati, dutiyajjhānavasena sannisīdati, tatiyajjhānavasena ekodi hoti, catutthajjhānavasena samādhiyati. Sabbampi vā etaṃ paṭhamajjhānavasena veditabbaṃ. Ettāvatā hi sammāsambuddhena samathānurakkhaṇaindriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ nāma kathitaṃ.
“或国王”是指某个边境的国王。“听到声音”是指清晨醒来时,听到技艺娴熟的琴师弹奏,听到那悦耳的琴声。“可染”等词中:能让心染着的,就是“可染”;因为值得贪求,所以是“可欲”;能让心迷醉的,就是“可醉”;因为能使心像昏过去一样,所以是“可闷”;因为像捆绑一样执取,所以是“可缚”。他说“够了,女士”,是因为看到琴的构造后不想要它,才这样说。“覆盖”是指缠绕的部分。“角”是指四方的硬木琴杆。巴利
Rañño vāti kassacideva paccantarañño vā. Saddaṃ suṇeyyāti paccūsakāle pabuddho kusalena vīṇāvādakena vādiyamānāya madhurasaddaṃ suṇeyya. Rajanīyotiādīsu cittaṃ rañjetīti rajanīyo. Kāmetabbatāya kamanīyo. Cittaṃ madayatīti madanīyo. Cittaṃ mucchitaṃ viya karaṇato mucchiyatīti mucchanīyo. Ābandhitvā viya gahaṇato bandhatīti bandhanīyo. Alaṃ me, bhoti vīṇāya saṇṭhānaṃ disvā taṃ anicchanto evamāha. Upadhāraṇeti veṭṭhake. Koṇanti caturassaṃ sāradaṇḍakaṃ.
那位国王说:“把琴拿来,我要看看它的声音。”于是取来那把琴。在“劈成十份”等做法中,他先试着把琴劈成十份,还是看不到声音,就劈成一百份;这样仍看不到,就碎成一片片;这样仍看不到,他又想:“这些碎片烧起来时,声音就会跑出来逃走,那时我就能看到它了。”于是用火烧。这样仍看不到时,他又想:“细灰会被风吹散,声音会像筛谷时落下的谷粒一样落在脚边,那时我就能看到它了。”于是放到大风里扬。这样仍看不到时,他又想:“灰粉会像随水而流一样漂走,声音则会像渡到对岸的人一样出来渡过去,那时我就能看到它了。”于是把它放进湍急的河流里冲走。巴利
So taṃ vīṇanti so rājā ‘‘āharatha naṃ vīṇaṃ, ahamassā saddaṃ pasissāmī’’ti taṃ vīṇaṃ gahetvā. Dasadhā vātiādīsu paṭhamaṃ tāva dasadhā phāleyya, athassā saddaṃ apassanto satadhā phāleyya, tathāpi apassanto sakalikaṃ sakalikaṃ kareyya, tathāpi apassanto ‘‘sakalikā jhāyissanti, saddo pana nikkhamitvā palāyissati, tadā naṃ passissāmī’’ti agginā ḍaheyya. Tathāpi apassanto ‘‘sallahukāni masicuṇṇāni vātena bhassissanti, saddo sāradhaññaṃ viya pādamūle patissati, tadā naṃ passissāmī’’ti mahāvāte vā ophuneyya. Tathāpi apassanto ‘‘masicuṇṇāni yathodakaṃ gamissanti, saddo pana pāraṃ gacchanto puriso viya nikkhamitvā tarissati, tadā naṃ passissāmī’’ti nadiyā vā sīghasotāya pavāheyya.
他会这样说:用尽所有这些方法都找不到时,他就对那些人这样说。所谓“asatī kira ayaṃ vīṇā”,意思是“这把琵琶确实低劣”,“asatī”是低劣的说法。正如所说:巴利
Evaṃ vadeyyāti sabbehipimehi upāyehi apassanto te manusse evaṃ vadeyya. Asatī kirāyanti asatī kira ayaṃ vīṇā, lāmikāti attho. Asatīti lāmakādhivacanametaṃ. Yathāha –
世间女人被称为不实,她们没有固定的界限;
她们极度贪著,又胆大妄为,就像吞噬一切的火焰。巴利
‘‘Asā lokitthiyo nāma, velā tāsaṃ na vijjati; Sārattā ca pagabbhā ca, sikhī sabbaghaso yathā’’ti. (jā. 1.1.61);
就像这样,“凡任何名为琵琶的东西”:并不是只有琵琶才是低劣的,正如这个所谓的琵琶,任何其他用弦绑成的乐器,全都是低劣的,这就是这段话的意思。同样地,在这里应当把五蕴看作琵琶,把瑜伽行者看作国王。就像那位国王从把琵琶破成十片开始仔细寻找,结果找不到声音,就对琵琶失去了兴趣;同样,瑜伽行者在观照五蕴时,看不到有任何可以执取为“我”或“我所”的东西,就对诸蕴失去了兴趣。因此,为了向他开示对诸蕴的这种观照,而说了“他遍求色,乃至色的归趣”等话。巴利
Yathevaṃ yaṃkiñci vīṇā nāmāti na kevalañca vīṇāyeva lāmikā, yatheva pana ayaṃ vīṇā nāma, evaṃ yaṃkiñci aññampi tantibaddhaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ lāmakamevāti attho. Evameva khoti ettha vīṇā viya pañcakkhandhā daṭṭhabbā, rājā viya yogāvacaro. Yathā so rājā taṃ vīṇaṃ dasadhā phālanato paṭṭhāya vicinanto saddaṃ adisvā vīṇāya anatthiko hoti, evaṃ yogāvacaro pañcakkhandhe sammasanto ahanti vā mamanti vā gahetabbaṃ apassanto khandhehi anatthiko hoti. Tenassa taṃ khandhasammasanaṃ dassento rūpaṃ samanvesati yāvatā rūpassa gatītiādimāha.
在这里,“遍求”就是寻找。“乃至色的趣向”:指色有多少趣向。这里的“趣向”有五种:趣向趣、生起趣、自相趣、非有趣、坏灭趣。其中,这个色,下以无间地狱为边界,上以阿迦腻吒梵天为界限,在这中间生死流转、持续存在,这叫作它的趣向趣。巴利
Tattha samanvesatīti pariyesati. Yāvatā rūpassa gatīti yattakā rūpassa gati. Tattha gatīti gatigati, sañjātigati, salakkhaṇagati, vibhavagati, bhedagatīti pañcavidhā honti. Tattha idaṃ rūpaṃ nāma heṭṭhā avīcipariyantaṃ katvā upari akaniṭṭhabrahmalokaṃ anto katvā etthantare saṃsarati vattati, ayamassa gatigati nāma.
这个身体并不是在莲花苞里出生,也不是在白莲、青莲等花里出生;它是在胃和熟脏之间,在一片极其浓重的黑暗里,在恶臭的风吹过的地方,在最令人厌恶的处所,像腐烂的鱼等里面生出的蛆虫那样出生。这就是色的生起归趣。巴利
Ayaṃ pana kāyo neva padumagabbhe, na puṇḍarīkanīluppalādīsu sañjāyati, āmāsayapakkāsayānaṃ pana antare bahalandhakāre duggandhapavanavicarite paramajegucche okāse pūtimacchādīsu kimi viya sañjāyati , ayaṃ rūpassa sañjātigati nāma.
色的相有两种:一种是自相,也就是“比丘们,因为被破坏,所以叫色”这里所说的、以破坏为含义的自相;另一种是共相,以无常等为区分。这就是它的自相归趣。巴利
Duvidhaṃ pana rūpassa lakkhaṇaṃ, ‘‘ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā rūpa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.79) evaṃ vutta ruppanasaṅkhātaṃ paccattalakkhaṇañca aniccādibhedaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇañca, ayamassa salakkhaṇagati nāma.
野兽的去处是森林,鸟儿的去处是天空;
坏灭是诸法的趣向,涅槃是阿罗汉的趣向。巴利
‘‘Gati migānaṃ pavanaṃ, ākāso pakkhinaṃ gati; Vibhavo gati dhammānaṃ, nibbānaṃ arahato gatī’’ti. (pari. 339) –
这样说的时候,色的不存在就叫作“非有归趣”;而它的坏灭,就叫作“坏灭归趣”。受等诸蕴也是同样的道理。只是在这里,往上一直到有顶天,它们的“生起归趣”和“自相归趣”,应当理解为:以感受、认知、造作、识知的作用作为各自的特相。巴利
Evaṃ vutto rūpassa abhāvo vibhavagati nāma. Yo panassa bhedo, ayaṃ bhedagati nāma. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Kevalañhettha upari yāva bhavaggā tesaṃ sañjātigati, salakkhaṇagatiyañca vedayitasañjānanaabhisaṅkharaṇavijānanavasena paccattalakkhaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在色等诸法上被认定为“我”“我的”“我是”的见、渴爱、慢这三种执取,那也不属于他,对于漏尽者来说,那也不属于他。这是顺着经文脉络承接而来的。因此,《大注疏》中说:巴利
Tampi tassa na hotīti yadetaṃ rūpādīsu ahanti vā mamanti vā asmīti vā evaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ diṭṭhitaṇhāmānaggāhattayaṃ, tampi tassa khīṇāsavassa na hotīti yathānusandhināva suttāgataṃ. Tena vuttaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
开头讲了戒,中间讲了修定;
最后则说到涅槃,这就是琴喻之教。巴利
‘‘Ādimhi sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, majjhe samādhibhāvanā; Pariyosāne ca nibbānaṃ, esā vīṇopamā kathā’’ti.
第10经 六种动物譬喻经的注释巴利
10. Chappāṇakopamasuttavaṇṇanā
247 247. 第十经中,“有疮身”指长满疮的身体。因为那些疮化脓成熟了,所以叫“疮熟身”。“箭草”就是芦苇丛。同样地,应当知道有疮身的男子好比破戒的人。就像那个人被茅草尖刺伤,又被像刀锋一样的芦苇叶割破身体,痛苦和忧愁越来越强烈;同样,这个破戒的人到处被同梵行者说:“就是这个人,做了这些那些事”,由此生起的痛苦,应当这样理解。巴利
247. Dasame arugattoti vaṇasarīro. Tesaṃyeva arūnaṃ pakkattā pakkagatto. Saravananti kaṇḍavanaṃ. Evameva khoti arugatto puriso viya dussīlapuggalo veditabbo. Tassa kusakaṇṭakehi viddhassa sarapattehi ca asidhārūpamehi vilikhitagattassa bhiyyosomattāya dukkhadomanassaṃ viya tattha tattha sabrahmacārīhi ‘‘ayaṃ so imesañca imesañca kammānaṃ kārako’’ti vuccamānassa uppajjanadukkhaṃ veditabbaṃ.
得到“诉说者”,就是得到一个举罪的人。“这样做的人”,就是从事这类医师工作、信使工作等的人。“行为如此之人”,就是以接近寡妇等作为活动范围,具有这种活动范围。“不净村刺”:因为不清净,所以叫不净;因为会刺伤村民,所以叫刺,因此称为村刺。巴利
Labhati vattāranti labhati codakaṃ. Evaṃkārīti evarūpānaṃ vejjakammadūtakammādīnaṃ kārako. Evaṃsamācāroti vidhavā gocarādivasena evarūpagocaro. Asucigāmakaṇṭakoti asuddhaṭṭhena asuci, gāmavāsīnaṃ vijjhanaṭṭhena kaṇṭakoti gāmakaṇṭako.
“飞禽”指象鼻鸟。“放开”就是放走。“拉扯”就是拖拽。“我要进去”就是我要走进去。“我要飞向天空”就是我要飞上天空。巴利
Pakkhinti hatthisoṇḍasakuṇaṃ. Ossajjeyyāti vissajjeyya. Āviñcheyyunti ākaḍḍheyyuṃ. Pavekkhāmīti pavisissāmi. Ākāsaṃ ḍessāmīti ākāsaṃ uppatissāmi.
在这些当中,蛇想进蚁冢,心里盘算着:“我要用身体盘成一圈,好好睡一觉。”鳄鱼想下水,心里盘算着:“我要钻进远处的洞穴里躺下。”鸟想飞上天空,心里盘算着:“我要在空旷的天空中自在地飞。”狗想进村子,心里盘算着:“我要在灶边扒开灰,取点暖气躺下。”豺想进乱葬岗,心里盘算着:“我要吃人肉,伸开背躺下睡。”猴子想进树林,心里盘算着:“我要爬上高树,朝四面八方跳来跳去。”巴利
Etesu pana ahi ‘‘bhogehi maṇḍalaṃ bandhitvā supissāmī’’ti vammikaṃ pavisitukāmo hoti. Susumāro ‘‘dūre bilaṃ pavisitvā nipajjissāmī’’ti udakaṃ pavisitukāmo hoti. Pakkhī ‘‘ajaṭākāse sukhaṃ vicarissāmī’’ti ākāsaṃ ḍetukāmo hoti. Kukkuro ‘‘uddhanaṭṭhāne chārikaṃ byūhitvā usumaṃ gaṇhanto nipajjissāmī’’ti gāmaṃ pavisitukāmo hoti. Siṅgālo ‘‘manussamaṃsaṃ khāditvā piṭṭhiṃ pasāretvā sayissāmī’’ti āmakasusānaṃ pavisitukāmo hoti. Makkaṭo ‘‘ucce rukkhe abhiruhitvā disādisaṃ pakkhandissāmī’’ti vanaṃ pavisitukāmo hoti.
“随从而行”是指跟随而去。也有写成anuvidhiyeyyuṃ的读法,意思是随顺从事。也就是说:他去哪里,他们就跟着去哪里。这里的“同样地”,应当把六种动物看作六处,把坚绳看作渴爱,把中间的结看作无明。在哪个根门所缘变得强而有力,那个处就被拉向那个所缘。巴利
Anuvidhāyeyyunti anugaccheyyuṃ, anuvidhiyeyyuntipi pāṭho, anuvidhānaṃ āpajjeyyunti attho. Yattha so yāti, tattheva gaccheyyunti vuttaṃ hoti. Evamevāti ettha cha pāṇakā viya chāyatanāni daṭṭhabbāni, daḷharajju viya taṇhā, majjhe gaṇṭhi viya avijjā. Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ dvāre ārammaṇaṃ balavaṃ hoti, taṃ taṃ āyatanaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ārammaṇe āviñchati.
世尊讲这个譬喻,要么是用相似的东西来类比,要么是为了显示六处的种种差别。先说用相似的东西来类比:这里并没有在经文之外另外建立什么作用,它在经文本身里就已经成立了。而就显示六处的差别来说,这个安立是这样的:蛇这东西,不喜欢待在外面涂抹得光滑平整的地方,偏偏喜欢钻进垃圾堆、草丛、落叶丛和蚁冢里,躺在那里面才觉得舒服,心才变得专一。同样,眼这个感官也是喜好不平整的,它不喜欢光滑的金墙之类的地方,连看都不想看,只喜欢色彩、图画、花、藤蔓等等五花八门的东西。因为在那种地方,眼睛还没看够的时候,人甚至张着嘴都想要去看。巴利
Imaṃ pana upamaṃ bhagavā sarikkhakena vā āhareyya āyatanānaṃ vā nānattadassanavasena. Tattha sarikkhakena tāva visuṃ appanākiccaṃ natthi, pāḷiyaṃyeva appitā. Āyatanānaṃ nānattadassanena pana ayaṃ appanā – ahi nāmesa bahi sittasammaṭṭhe ṭhāne nābhiramati, saṅkāraṭṭhānatiṇapaṇṇagahanavammikāniyeva pana pavisitvā nipannakāle abhiramati, ekaggataṃ āpajjati. Evameva cakkhupetaṃ visamajjhāsayaṃ, maṭṭhāsu suvaṇṇabhittiādīsu nābhiramati, oloketumpi na icchati, rūpacittapupphalatādivicittesuyeva pana abhiramati. Tādisesu hi ṭhānesu cakkhumhi appahonte mukhampi vivaritvā oloketukāmo hoti.
鳄鱼从水里出来以后,在外面也看不到有什么可以抓取的东西,只是闭着眼睛游动。可是当它潜入约一百寻深的水里,钻进洞穴躺下时,心就变得专一,睡得安稳快乐。同样,耳这个感官也喜欢像洞穴一样的住处,它依于虚空,只把住处安立在耳孔里面,耳孔里的虚空就是它听见声音的条件。其实没有遮蔽的虚空也同样可以。因为在山洞里诵经时,声音并不会冲破洞顶传到外面,而是从门窗的缝隙传出去,再通过诸界的相续撞击一路传来,最后撞击到耳净色。那时,坐在洞顶上的人也知道:“某某人正在诵经。”巴利
Susumāropi bahi nikkhanto gahetabbaṃ na passati, akkhiṃ nimīletvā carati. Yadā pana byāmasatamattaṃ udakaṃ ogāhitvā bilaṃ pavisitvā nipanno hoti, tadā tassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, sukhaṃ supati. Evameva sotampetaṃ bilajjhāsayaṃ ākāsasannissitaṃ, kaṇṇacchiddakūpakeyeva ajjhāsayaṃ karoti, kaṇṇacchiddākāsoyeva tassa saddasavane paccayo hoti. Ajaṭākāsopi vaṭṭatiyeva. Antoleṇasmiñhi sajjhāye kayiramāne na leṇacchadanaṃ bhinditvā saddo bahi nikkhamati, dvāravātapānachiddehi pana nikkhamitvā dhātuparamparā ghaṭṭento āgantvā sotapasādaṃ ghaṭṭeti. Atha tasmiṃ kāle ‘‘asukaṃ nāma sajjhāyatī’’ti leṇapiṭṭhe nisinnā jānanti.
如果这样的话,就成了“到达境”。那什么才是“到达境”呢?是的,就是“到达境”。如果真是这样,那么远处敲鼓等声音响起时,就不该有“远处有声音”的认识了。但并不是没有这种认识。因为当耳净色受到撞击时,就会生起“远处的声音、近处的声音、对岸的声音、此岸的声音”这样种种不同的认知方式,这是法性。这个法性说明了什么呢?声音从哪里有孔窍,就从哪里被听到,就像看见日月等一样,所以这其实仍是“未到达境”。巴利
Evaṃ sante sampattagocaratā hoti, kiṃ panetaṃ sampattagocaranti? Āma sampattagocaraṃ. Yadi evaṃ dūre bheriādīsu vajjamānesu ‘‘dūre saddo’’ti jānanaṃ na bhaveyyāti. No na bhavati. Sotapasādasmiñhi ghaṭṭite ‘‘dūre saddo, āsanne saddo, paratīre orimatīre’’ti tathā tathā jānanākāro hoti, dhammatā esāti. Kiṃ etāya dhammatāya? Yato yato chiddaṃ, tato tato savanaṃ hoti candimasūriyādīnaṃ dassanaṃ viyāti asampattagocaramevetaṃ.
鸟也不喜欢停在树上或地上。但当它越过一两块土块的距离,纵身飞向无障碍的虚空时,心就变得专一了。同样,鼻根也倾向于虚空,以风为依托,以香气为对象。就像牛在刚下过雨时,反复嗅地面,然后面向虚空去吸风。即使用手指捏着香团凑近鼻子闻,如果不吸气,也闻不到它的香味。巴利
Pakkhīpi rukkhe vā bhūmiyaṃ vā na ramati. Yadā pana ekaṃ vā dve vā leḍḍupāte atikkamma ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhando hoti, tadā ekaggacittataṃ āpajjati. Evameva ghānampi ākāsajjhāsayaṃ vātūpanissayagandhagocaraṃ. Tathā hi gāvo navavuṭṭhe deve bhūmiṃ ghāyitvā ghāyitvā ākāsābhimukho hutvā vātaṃ ākaḍḍhanti. Aṅgulīhi gandhapiṇḍaṃ gahetvāpi ca upasiṅghanakāle vātaṃ anākaḍḍhanto neva tassa gandhaṃ jānāti.
狗在外面游荡时,找不到安稳的地方,还会被土块、棍棒之类的东西伤害。可是它进了村子,在灶边扒开灰烬一躺下,就舒服了。舌头也是这样,它偏好村落,依托于水,以味道为对象。正因为如此,即使整夜修习沙门法,天一亮还是得拿着钵和袈裟进村去。而且对于干硬的食物,不用唾液把它润湿,是尝不出味道的。巴利
Kukkuropi bahi caranto khemaṭṭhānaṃ na passati, leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi upadduto hoti. Antogāmaṃ pavisitvā uddhanaṭṭhāne chārikaṃ byūhitvā nipannassa panassa phāsu hoti. Evameva jivhāpi gāmajjhāsayā āposannissitarasārammaṇā. Tathā hi tiyāmarattiṃ samaṇadhammaṃ katvāpi pātova pattacīvaramādāya gāmaṃ pavisitabbaṃ hoti. Sukkhakhādanīyassa ca na sakkā kheḷena atemitassa rasaṃ jānituṃ.
豺狼在外面游荡时得不到快乐,只有在尸林里吃了人肉躺下来,才觉得舒服。同样,身也倾向于执受,依止地界,以触为所缘。正因为这样,众生得不到别的可执受之物时,就把头枕在自己手掌上躺下。对于他,在执取所缘时,内在和外在的地界都是缘。即使是被铺好的床,如果不坐上去压一压,也无法知道下面木板的软硬;所以,内在和外在的地界,就是他觉知触的缘。巴利
Siṅgālopi bahi caranto ratiṃ na vindati, āmakasusāne manussamaṃsaṃ khāditvā nipannasseva panassa phāsu hoti. Evameva kāyopi upādiṇṇakajjhāsayo pathavīsannissitaphoṭṭhabbārammaṇo. Tathā hi aññaṃ upādiṇṇakaṃ alabhamānā sattā attanova hatthatale sīsaṃ katvā nipajjanti. Ajjhattikabāhirā cassa pathavī ārammaṇaggahaṇe paccayo hoti. Susanthatassāpi hi sayanassa heṭṭhāṭhitānampi vā phalakānaṃ na sakkā anisīdantena vā anuppīḷantena vā thaddhamudubhāvo jānitunti ajjhattikabāhirā pathavī etassa phoṭṭhabbajānane paccayo hoti.
猴子在地上到处跑动时也不会觉得舒服,可一旦爬上高达百手的大树,坐在枝头上四处张望,才觉得自在。同样,心也有种种不同的倾向,有分是它的缘;即使以前见过的所缘,心还是会生起对各种所缘的倾向。不过,根本有分才是它的缘。以上就是这里的简要说明;至于处的种种多样性,在《清净道论》的“处分别”里已经详细讲过了。巴利
Makkaṭopi bhūmiyaṃ vicaranto nābhiramati, hatthasatubbedhaṃ panassa rukkhaṃ āruyha viṭapapiṭṭhe nisīditvā disāvidisā olokentasseva phāsuko hoti. Evaṃ manopi nānajjhāsayo bhavaṅgapaccayo, diṭṭhapubbepi nānārammaṇajjhāsayaṃ karotiyeva mūlabhavaṅgaṃ panassa paccayo hotīti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārena pana āyatanānaṃ nānattaṃ visuddhimagge āyatananiddese vuttameva.
那眼不牵引它,因为那些被贪欲之索系缚、被拴在身至念之柱上的处所众生,已经达到了不受灼烧的状态,所以它不拉拽。在这部经里,所说的正是前分观。巴利
Taṃ cakkhu nāviñchatīti taṇhārajjukānaṃ āyatanapāṇakānaṃ kāyagatāsatithambhe baddhānaṃ nibbisevanabhāvaṃ āpannattā nākaḍḍhatīti imasmiṃ sutte pubbabhāgavipassanāva kathitā.
第十一 大麦束经的注释巴利
11. Yavakalāpisuttavaṇṇanā
248 248. 在第十一经的注释中,“大麦束”是指收割后堆起来的大麦堆。“手持扁担的人”是指手里拿着扁担的人。“用六根扁担打”是指用六根粗扁担棒去捶打。“第七个人”是指那六个人打完大麦、装进袋子拿走后,又来了另外第七个人。“被打得更惨”是指为了抢走那里剩下的哪怕只是一点点谷壳和麦秸,这个人被打得更加厉害。巴利
248. Ekādasame yavakalāpīti lāyitvā ṭhapitayavapuñjo. Byābhaṅgihatthāti kājahatthā. Chahi byābhaṅgīhi haneyyunti chahi puthulakājadaṇḍakehi potheyyuṃ. Sattamoti tesu chasu janesu yave pothetvā pasibbake pūretvā ādāya gatesu añño sattamo āgaccheyya. Suhatatarā assāti yaṃ tattha avasiṭṭhaṃ atthi bhusapalāpamattampi, tassa gahaṇatthaṃ suṭṭhutaraṃ hatā.
同样地,在这里应当把六处看作十字路口,把众生看作放在十字路口的大麦束,把十八种所缘看作六根扁担棒——它们按可爱、不可爱、中舍来分,把对生存的希求这一烦恼看作第七根扁担棒。就像放在十字路口的大麦束被六根扁担棒捶打,这些众生也在六处中被十八种所缘之棒捶打。又像被第七根棒打得更重,众生被对生存的希求烦恼打得更重,从而承受以“有”为根本的苦。巴利
Evameva khoti ettha catumahāpatho viya cha āyatanāni daṭṭhabbāni, catumahāpathe nikkhittayavakalāpī viya satto, cha byābhaṅgiyo viya iṭṭhāniṭṭhamajjhattavasena aṭṭhārasa ārammaṇāni, sattamā byābhaṅgī viya bhavapatthanā kilesā. Yathā catumahāpathe ṭhapitā yavakalāpī chahi byābhaṅgīhi haññati, evamime sattā aṭṭhārasahi ārammaṇadaṇḍakehi chasu āyatanesu haññanti. Yathā sattamena suhatatarā honti, evaṃ sattā bhavapatthanakilesehi suhatatarā honti bhavemūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavamānā.
现在,为了说明他们对生存的渴求这一烦恼,世尊说“诸比丘,过去曾发生……”等等。其中,“在那里”指的是善法堂,意思是善法堂天众集会处的门口。“如法的天众”:这些天众被称为如法的,因为他们抓住像我这样的阿修罗王,却连让我受一点损伤都没有做。“不如法的天众”:这些天众被称为不如法的,因为他们抓住像我这样的阿修罗王,用五重绑缚把我捆起来,像一头浑身沾满新粪的猪一样,让我动弹不得。“比丘们,毗摩质多的束缚就是如此微细”——据说,那束缚就像莲茎搓成的线、猴网搓成的线一样微细,可是既不能用刀砍断,也不能用斧劈开。然而,因为它是用心来系缚、用心来解脱,所以称为“毗摩质多缚”。巴利
Idāni nesaṃ taṃ bhavapatthanakilesaṃ dassetuṃ bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatrāti sudhammāyaṃ bhummaṃ, sudhammāya devasabhāya dvāreti attho. Dhammikā kho devāti dhammikā ete devā nāma, yehi mādisaṃ asurādhipatiṃ gahetvā mayhaṃ bhedanamattampi na katanti sandhāya vadati. Adhammikā devāti adhammikā ete devā nāma, ye mādisaṃ asurādhipatiṃ navagūthasūkaraṃ viya kaṇṭhapañcamehi bandhanehi bandhitvā nisīdāpenti. Evaṃ sukhumaṃ kho, bhikkhave, vepacittibandhananti taṃ kira padumanāḷasuttaṃ viya makkaṭajālasuttaṃ viya ca sukhumaṃ hoti, chettuṃ pana neva vāsiyā na pharasunā sakkā. Yasmā pana citteneva bajjhati, cittena muccati, tasmā ‘‘vepacittibandhana’’nti vuttaṃ.
比那个更微细的魔的束缚,即是烦恼的束缚,而这烦恼的束缚比那个还要更微细,它根本不会出现在眼根面前,也不会阻碍行住坐卧的威仪。被这种束缚绑住的众生,即使走在地面上或虚空中,走上百由旬、上千由旬,也照样来去自如。不过,这种束缚只有靠智慧才能断除,不是靠别的东西,所以也被称为以智慧解脱的束缚。巴利
Tato sukhumataraṃ mārabandhananti kilesabandhanaṃ panesaṃ tatopi sukhumataraṃ, neva cakkhussa āpāthaṃ gacchati, na iriyāpathaṃ nivāreti. Tena hi baddhā sattā pathavitalepi ākāsepi yojanasatampi yojanasahassampi gacchantipi āgacchantipi. Chijjamānaṃ panetaṃ ñāṇeneva chijjati, na aññenāti ‘‘ñāṇamokkhaṃ bandhana’’ntipi vuccati.
“思量”是指以渴爱、邪见和慢为根据,对诸蕴进行思量。“被魔罗所缚”是指被魔罗的束缚绑住。或者这里的属格表示行为的手段,意思是:被烦恼魔所绑住。“从邪恶者解脱”是指从魔罗的束缚中解脱。或者这里的属格同样表示行为的手段,意思是:从邪恶者的烦恼束缚中解脱出来。巴利
Maññamānoti taṇhādiṭṭhimānānaṃ vasena khandhe maññanto. Baddho mārassāti mārabandhanena baddho. Karaṇatthe vā etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, kilesamārena baddhoti attho. Mutto pāpimatoti mārassa bandhanena mutto. Karaṇattheyeva vā idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, pāpimatā kilesabandhanena muttoti attho.
用“我是”这个词,说的是被渴爱所构画出来的妄想。用“我即是此”,说的是被见解所构画出来的妄想。“我将是”,是依常见而说的,同样是被见解所构画出来的妄想。“我将不是”,则是依断见而说的。“有色”等词,是对常见所作的进一步分类说明。所谓“因此”,是因为这种妄想就像病、痈、刺一样,从内部不断造成伤害和逼迫,所以才这样说。“悸动”等词,是因为众生被这些烦恼所搅动、所颤动,陷入概念戏论,呈现出放逸的状态,为了显示这些烦恼的表现方式,才这么说的。巴利
Asmīti padena taṇhāmaññitaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayamahasmīti diṭṭhimaññitaṃ. Bhavissanti sassatavasena diṭṭhimaññitameva. Na bhavissanti ucchedavasena. Rūpītiādīni sassatasseva pabhedadīpanāni. Tasmāti yasmā maññitaṃ ābādhaṃ antodosanikantanavasena rogo ceva gaṇḍo ca sallañca, tasmā. Iñjitantiādīni yasmā imehi kilesehi sattā iñjanti ceva phandanti ca papañcitā ca honti pamattākārapattā, tasmā tesaṃ ākāradassanatthaṃ vuttāni.
在“慢行”这一节里,慢的“行”就是“慢行”,意思是慢的活动方式。慢本身就是“慢行”,就像说“粪行”“尿行”一样。其中,“我是”这句话,是就与渴爱相应的慢来说的;“我即是此”则是就见来说的。难道没有与见相应的慢吗?确实没有。但因为慢还没有被断除,所以它也就成了一种见。这是针对以慢为根的见而说的。其余各处都很浅显易懂。巴利
Mānagatavāre pana mānassa gataṃ mānagataṃ, mānapavattīti attho. Mānoyeva mānagataṃ gūthagataṃ muttagataṃ viya. Tattha asmīti idaṃ taṇhāya sampayuttamānavasena vuttaṃ. Ayamahamasmīti diṭṭhivasena. Nanu ca diṭṭhisampayutto nāma māno natthīti? Āma natthi, mānassa pana appahīnattā diṭṭhi nāma hoti. Mānamūlakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.